Epson S1D13705 Users Manual S1d13705tm

S1D13705 to the manual 9c2971a4-3e2b-40d8-9cca-76f398d10cf8

2015-01-23

: Epson Epson-S1D13705-Users-Manual-250985 epson-s1d13705-users-manual-250985 epson pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 562 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
S1D13705
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Document No. X27A-Q-001-04
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 TECHNICAL MANUAL
X27A-Q-001-04 Issue Date: 01/04/18
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
TECHNICAL MANUAL S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/04/18 X27A-Q-001-04
Customer Support Information
Comprehensive Support Tools
Seiko Epson Corp. provides to the system designer and computer OEM manufacturer a
complete set of resources and tools for the development of graphics systems.
Evaluation / Demonstration Board
• Assembled and fully tested graphics evaluation board with installation guide and sche-
matics.
• To borrow an evaluation board, please contact your local Seiko Epson Corp. sales repre-
sentative.
Chip Documentation
• Technical manual includes Data Sheet, Application Notes, and Programmer’s Refer-
ence.
Software
• OEM Utilities.
• User Utilities.
• Evaluation Software.
• To obtain these programs, contact Application Engineering Support.
Application Engineering Support
Engineering and Sales Support is provided by:
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 TECHNICAL MANUAL
X27A-Q-001-04 Issue Date: 01/04/18
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
X27A-C-001-04 1
GRAPHICS
S1D13705
ENERGY
SAVING
EPSON
February 2001
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
The S1D13705 is a color/monochrome LCD graphics controller with an embedded 80K Byte SRAM
display buffer. The high integration of the S1D13705 provides a low cost, low power, single chip solution
to meet the requirements of embedded markets such as Office Automation equipment, Mobile Commu-
nications devices, and Palm-size PCs where board size and battery life are major concerns.
Products requiring a “Portrait” display can take advantage of the Hardware Portrait Mode feature of the
S1D13705. Virtual and Split Screen are just some of the display modes supported. While focusing on
devices targeted by the Microsoft Windows CE Operating System, the S1D13705’s impartiality to CPU
type or operating system makes it an ideal display solution for a wide variety of applications.
■FEATURES
■SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
•Embedded 80K byte SRAM display buffer.
•Direct support for the following CPU’s:
Hitachi SH-3.
Hitachi SH-4.
Motorola M68xxx.
MPU bus interface with programmable
READY.
•Resolutions up to:
640x480 at a color depth of 2 bpp.
640x240 at a color depth of 4 bpp.
320x240 at a color depth of 8 bpp.
•Up to 256 simultaneous colors from a possible
4096 colors on passive LCD panels and active
matrix TFT/D-TFD LCD panels.
•Register level support for EL panels.
•Hardware Portrait Mode
•Split Screen Display
•Virtual Display Support
•LCD power-down sequencing.
S1D13705
Flat Panel
Data and
CPU Control Signals
Digital Out
X27A-C-001-04 2
GRAPHICS
S1D13705
■DESCRIPTION
Memory Interface
• Embedded 80K byte SRAM display buffer.
CPU Interface
• Direct support for:
Hitachi SH-3.
Hitachi SH-4.
Motorola M68xxx.
MPU bus interface with programmable READY.
• CPU write buffer.
Display Support
• 4/8-bit monochrome LCD interface.
• 4/8-bit color LCD interface.
• Single-panel, single-drive passive displays.
• Dual-panel, dual-drive passive displays.
• Active matrix TFT / D-TFD interface.
• Example resolutions:
640x480 at a color depth of 2 bpp.
640x240 at a color depth of 4 bpp.
320x240 at a color depth of 8 bpp.
Clock Source
• Single clock input for both pixel and memory clocks.
• The S1D13705 clock source can be internally divided
down for a higher frequency clock input.
• Dynamic switching of memory clocks in portrait mode.
Display Modes
• 1/2/4/8 bit-per-pixel (bpp) support on LCD.
• Up to 16 shades of gray using FRM on
monochrome passive LCD panels.
• Up to 256 simultaneous colors from a possible 4096
colors on passive STN and active matrix TFT/D-TFD
LCD panels.
• Split Screen Display: allows two different images to be
simultaneously viewed on the same display.
• Virtual Display Support: displays images larger than
the display size through the use of panning.
• Double Buffering/multi-pages: provides smooth
animation and instantaneous screen update.
• Hardware Portrait Mode: direct hardware 90°
rotation of display image for portrait mode display.
Power Down Modes
• Software Suspend mode.
• LCD power-down sequencing.
Operating Voltage
•COREVDD 2.7 to 3.6 volts; IOVDD 2.7 to 5.5 volts.
Package
• 80-pin QFP14.
FOR SYSTEM INTEGRATION SERVICES
FOR WINDOWS® CE CONTACT:
Epson Research & Development, Inc.
Suite #320 - 11120 Horseshoe Way
Richmond, B.C., Canada V7A 5H7
Tel: (604) 275-5151
Fax: (604) 275-2167
Email: wince@erd.epson.com
http://www.erd.epson.com
CONTACT YOUR SALES REPRESENTATIVE FOR THESE
COMPREHENSIVE DESIGN TOOLS:
• S1D13705 Technical Manual
• S5U13705 Evaluation Boards
• Windows CE Display Driver
• CPU Independent Software Utilities
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All rights reserved. VDC
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in evaluating Seiko Epson/
EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any representation that the contents of this document are
accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows CE Logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Hardware Functional Specification
Document Number: X27A-A-001-10
Copyright © 1999, 2002 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
1.2 Overview Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1 Integrated Frame Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 CPU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3 Display Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4 Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5 Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3 Typical System Implementation Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 Functional Block Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.1 Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.2 Memory Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.3 Sequence Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1.4 Look-Up Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1.5 LCD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.1.6 Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5 Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.1 Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.2 Pin Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2.1 Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.2.2 LCD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.3 Clock Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.4 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.3 Summary of Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.4 Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5.5 LCD Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6 D.C. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7 A.C. Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.1 Bus Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.1.1 SH-4 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.1.2 SH-3 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.1.3 Motorola MC68K #1 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7.1.4 Motorola MC68K #2 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.1.5 Generic #1 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
7.1.6 Generic #2 Interface Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.2 Clock Input Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
7.3 Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
7.3.1 Power On/Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3.2 Power Down/Up Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3.3 Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.3.4 Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.3.5 Single Color 4-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.3.6 Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7.3.7 Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.3.8 Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.3.9 Dual Color 8-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.3.10 9/12-Bit TFT/D-TFD Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
8 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
8.1 Register Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
8.2 Register Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
9 Frame Rate Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
10 Display Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
11 Look-Up Table Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
11.1 Monochrome Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
11.2 Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
12 SwivelView™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
12.1 Default SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
12.1.1 How to Set Up Default SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
12.2 Alternate SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
12.2.1 How to Set Up Alternate SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
12.3 Comparison Between Default and Alternate SwivelView Modes . . . . . . . . . . .81
12.4 SwivelView Mode Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
13 Power Save Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
13.1 Software Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
13.2 Hardware Power Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
13.3 Power Save Mode Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
13.4 Panel Power Up/Down Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
13.5 Turning Off BCLK Between Accesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
13.6 Clock Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
14 Mechanical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
15 Sales and Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
List of Tables
Table 5-1: Summary of Power On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 5-2: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 5-3: LCD Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 6-1: Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 6-2: Recommended Operating Conditions for Core VDD = 3.3V ± 10% . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 6-3: Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 6-4: Output Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Table 7-1: SH-4 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Table 7-2: SH-3 Bus Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 7-3: MC68K #1 Bus Timing (MC68000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 7-4: MC68K #2 Timing (MC68030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 7-5: Generic #1 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 7-6: Generic #2 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 7-7: Clock Input Requirements for CLKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 7-8: Clock Input Requirements for BCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 7-9: LCD Panel Power On/Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 7-10: Power Down/Up Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 7-11: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 7-12: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Table 7-13: Single Color 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 7-14: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Table 7-15: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 7-16: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 7-17: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 7-18: TFT/D-TFD A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 8-1: Panel Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Table 8-2: Gray Scale/Color Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 8-3: High Performance Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 8-4: Inverse Video Mode Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 8-5: Hardware Power Save/GPIO0 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 8-6: Software Power Save Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 8-7: Selection of SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 8-8: Selection of PCLK and MCLK in SwivelView Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 12-1: Default and Alternate SwivelView Mode Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 13-1: Power Save Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 13-2: Software Power Save Mode Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 13-3: Hardware Power Save Mode Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 13-4: Power Save Mode Function Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 13-5: S1D13705 Internal Clock Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
List of Figures
Figure 3-1: Typical System Diagram (SH-4 Bus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 3-2: Typical System Diagram (SH-3 Bus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 3-3: Typical System Diagram (M68K #1 Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Figure 3-4: Typical System Diagram (M68K #2 Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Figure 3-5: Typical System Diagram (Generic #1 Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Figure 3-6: Typical System Diagram (Generic #2 Bus - e.g. ISA Bus). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Figure 4-1: System Block Diagram Showing Data Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Figure 5-1: Pinout Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Figure 7-1: SH-4 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Figure 7-2: SH-3 Bus Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Figure 7-3: MC68K #1 Bus Timing (MC68000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Figure 7-4: MC68K #2 Timing (MC68030) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Figure 7-5: Generic #1 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Figure 7-6: Generic #2 Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Figure 7-7: Clock Input Requirements for CLKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Figure 7-8: Clock Input Requirements for BCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Figure 7-9: LCD Panel Power On/Reset Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Figure 7-10: Power Down/Up Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Figure 7-11: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Figure 7-12: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Figure 7-13: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Figure 7-14: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Figure 7-15: Single Color 4-Bit Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Figure 7-16: Single Color 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Figure 7-17: Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Figure 7-18: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Figure 7-19: Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Figure 7-20: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Figure 7-21: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Figure 7-22: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Figure 7-23: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Figure 7-24: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Figure 7-25: 12-Bit TFT/D-TFD Panel Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Figure 7-26: TFT/D-TFD A.C. Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Figure 8-1: Screen-Register Relationship, Split Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Figure 10-1: 1/2/4/8 Bit-Per-Pixel Display Data Memory Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Figure 11-1: 1 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
Figure 11-2: 2 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Figure 11-3: 4 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Figure 11-4: 1 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Figure 11-5: 2 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Figure 11-6: 4 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Figure 11-7: 8 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Figure 12-1: Relationship Between The Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by
S1D13705 in Default Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Figure 12-2: Relationship Between The Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by
S1D13705 in Alternate Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Figure 13-1: Panel On/Off Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Figure 14-1: Mechanical Drawing QFP14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
1 Introduction
1.1 Scope
This is the Hardware Functional Specification for the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD
Controller Chip. Included in this document are timing diagrams, AC and DC character-
istics, register descriptions, and power management descriptions. This document is
intended for two audiences: Video Subsystem Designers and Software Developers.
This document is updated as appropriate. Please check for the latest revision of this
document before beginning any development. The latest revision can be downloaded at
www.erd.epson.com.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
1.2 Overview Description
The S1D13705 is a color / monochrome LCD graphics controller with an embedded 80K
byte SRAM display buffer. The high integration of the S1D13705 provides a low cost, low
power, single chip solution to meet the requirements of embedded markets such as Office
Automation equipment, Mobile Communications devices, and Hand-Held PCs where
board size and battery life are major concerns.
Products requiring a “Portrait” display can take advantage of the SwivelView™ Mode
feature of the S1D13705. Virtual and Split Screen are just some of the display modes
supported. The above features, combined with the Operating System independence of the
S1D13705, make it the ideal solution for a wide variety of applications.
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
2 Features
2.1 Integrated Frame Buffer
• Embedded 80K byte SRAM display buffer.
2.2 CPU Interface
• Direct support of the following interfaces:
Hitachi SH-3.
Hitachi SH-4.
Motorola M68K.
MPU bus interface using WAIT# signal.
• Direct memory mapping of internal registers.
• Single level CPU write buffer.
• Registers are mapped into upper 32 bytes of 128K byte address space.
• The complete 80K byte display buffer is directly and contiguously available through the
17-bit address bus.
2.3 Display Support
• 4/8-bit monochrome LCD interface.
• 4/8-bit color LCD interface.
• Single-panel, single-drive passive displays.
• Dual-panel, dual-drive passive displays.
• Active Matrix TFT / D-TFD interface
• Register level support for EL panels.
• Example resolutions:
640x480 at a color depth of 2 bpp
640x240 at a color depth of 4 bpp
320x240 at a color depth of 8 bpp
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
2.4 Display Modes
• SwivelView™: direct 90° hardware rotation of display image for portrait mode display
• 1/2/4 bit-per-pixel (bpp), 2/4/16-level grayscale display.
• 1/2/4/8 bit-per-pixel, 2/4/16/256-level color display.
• Up to 16 shades of gray by FRM on monochrome passive LCD panels; a 256x4 Look-
Up Table is used to map 1/2/4 bpp modes into these shades.
• 256 simultaneous of 4096 colors on color passive and active matrix LCD panels; three
256x4 Look-Up Tables are used to map 1/2/4/8 bpp modes into these colors.
• Split screen display for all landscape panel modes allows two different images to be
simultaneously displayed.
• Virtual display support (displays images larger than the panel size through the use of
panning).
2.5 Clock Source
• Maximum operating clock (CLK) frequency of 25MHz.
• Operating clock (CLK) is derived from CLKI input.
CLK = CLKI
or
CLK = CLKI/2
• Pixel Clock (PCLK) and Memory Clock (MCLK) are derived from CLK.
2.6 Miscellaneous
• Hardware/Software Video Invert.
• Software Power Save mode.
• Hardware Power Save mode.
• LCD power-down sequencing.
• 5 General Purpose Input/Output pins are available.
• GPIO0 is available if Hardware Power Save is not required.
• GPIO[4:1] are available if upper LCD data pins (FPDAT[11:8]) are not required for
TFT/D-TFD support or hardware inverse video.
• Core operates from 2.7 volts to 3.6 volts.
• IO Operates from the core voltage up to 5.5 volts.
2.7 Package
• 80 pin QFP14 package.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
3 Typical System Implementation Diagrams
.
Figure 3-1: Typical System Diagram (SH-4 Bus)
.
Figure 3-2: Typical System Diagram (SH-3 Bus)
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[7:0]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
MOD
D[7:0]
8-bit
LCD
Display
SH-4
BUS
RESET#
WE0#
D[15:0]
BS#
RD/WR#
RD#
RDY#
A[16:0]
CKIO
WE0#
RD/WR#
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
BS#
RD#
CS#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
CSn#
WE1#
LCDPWR
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[7:4]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
MOD
D[3:0]
4-bit
LCD
Display
SH-3
BUS
RESET#
WE0#
D[15:0]
BS#
RD/WR#
RD#
WAIT#
A[16:0]
CKIO
WE0#
RD/WR#
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
BS#
RD#
CS#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
CSn#
WE1#
LCDPWR
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
.
Figure 3-3: Typical System Diagram (M68K #1 Bus)
.
Figure 3-4: Typical System Diagram (M68K #2 Bus)
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[7:4]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
MOD
D[3:0]
4-bit
LCD
Display
MC68000
BUS
RESET#
LDS#
D[15:0]
AS#
R/W#
DTACK#
A[16:1]
CLK
AB0
RD/WR#
AB[16:1]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
BS#
CS#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
A[23:17]
FC0, FC1, FC2 Decoder
UDS#
LCDPWR
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[7:0]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
MOD
D[7:0]
8-bit
LCD
Display
MC68030
BUS
RESET#
SIZ0
D[31:16]
AS#
R/W#
SIZ1
DSACK1#
A[16:0]
CLK
WE0#
RD/WR#
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
BS#
RD#
CS#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
A[31:17]
FC0, FC1, FC2 Decoder
DS#
LCDPWR
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
.
Figure 3-5: Typical System Diagram (Generic #1 Bus)
.
Figure 3-6: Typical System Diagram (Generic #2 Bus - e.g. ISA Bus)
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[11:0]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
D[11:0]
12-bit
TFT
Display
GENERIC #1
BUS
RESET#
D[15:0]
RD0#
WAIT#
A[16:0]
BCLK
RD/WR#
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
RD
CS#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
CSn#
WE1#
LCDPWR
WE0#
WE0#
BS#
RD1#
S1D13705 FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
FPDAT[8:0]
CLKI
Oscillator
FPFRAME
FPSHIFT
FPLINE
DRDY
D[8:0]
9-bit
TFT
Display
ISA
BUS
RESET
SD[15:0]
SMEMR#
IOCHRDY
SA[16:0]
BCLK
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
WE1#
RD#
BCLK
WAIT#
RESET#
LCDPWR
WE0#
SMEMW#
BS#
Decoder CS#
SA[19:17]
REFRESH
SBHE#
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
4 Functional Block Diagram
Figure 4-1: System Block Diagram Showing Data Paths
4.1 Functional Block Descriptions
4.1.1 Host Interface
The Host Interface provides the means for the CPU/MPU to communicate with the display
buffer and internal registers.
4.1.2 Memory Controller
The Memory Controller arbitrates between CPU accesses and display refresh accesses. It
also generates the necessary signals to control the SRAM frame buffer.
4.1.3 Sequence Controller
The Sequence Controller controls data flow from the Memory Controller through the Look-
Up Table and to the LCD Interface. It also generates memory addresses for display refresh
accesses.
LCD
Memory
Controller
40k x 16-bit SRAM
LCD
Clocks
Power Save
Register
Sequence Controller
Look-Up
I/F
Generic MPU
MC68K
SH-3 Host
I/F
Bus Clock Memory Clock Pixel Clock
Table
SH-4
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
4.1.4 Look-Up Table
The Look-Up Table contains three 256x4 Look-Up Tables or palettes, one for each primary
color. In monochrome mode only the green Look-Up Table is used.
4.1.5 LCD Interface
The LCD Interface performs frame rate modulation for passive LCD panels. It also
generates the correct data format and timing control signals for various LCD and
TFT/D-TFD panels.
4.1.6 Power Save
Power Save contains the power save mode circuitry.
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
5 Pins
5.1 Pinout Diagram
Figure 5-1: Pinout Diagram
Note
Package type: 80 pin surface mount QFP14
1234567891011121314151617181920
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
21
22
23
24
25
26
34
35
36
37
38
39
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
40
S1D13705
IOVDD
DB6
DB5
DB4
DB3
DB2
DB0
DB1
COREVDD
DB8
DRDY
FPDAT7
COREVDD
GPIO0
AB3
VSS
AB4
AB5
AB6
AB11
AB14
FPDAT11
FPDAT10
FPDAT9
VSS
FPSHIFT
IOVDD
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT3
FPDAT2
FPDAT1
FPDAT0
FPLINE
FPFRAME
VSS
CNF2
DB12
DB9
DB10
DB11
DB13
DB14
DB15
WAIT#
VSS
RD/WR#
WE1#
WE0#
RD#
BS#
CS#
RESET#
AB0
AB1
AB2
COREVDD
COREVDD
LCDPWR
AB9
AB10
VSS
AB8
VSS
FPDAT8
FPDAT6
TESTEN
CNF3
CNF1
CNF0
CLKI
IOVDD
AB15
AB12
BCLK
AB13
VSS
AB7
AB16
DB7
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
5.2 Pin Description
Key:
5.2.1 Host Interface
I=Input
O=Output
IO = Bi-Directional (Input/Output)
P=Power pin
C = CMOS level input
CS = CMOS level Schmitt input
COx = CMOS output driver, x denotes driver type (see IOL/IOH in Table 6-4: “Output Specifications,” on page 25)
TSx = Tri-state CMOS output driver, x denotes driver type (see IOL/IOH in Table 6-4: “Output Specifications,” on
page 25)
CNx = CMOS low-noise output driver, x denotes driver type (see IOL/IOH in Table 6-4: “Output Specifications,” on
page 25)
TEST = CMOS level test input with pull down resistor
Pin NamesTypePin #Cell
RESET#
State Description
AB0 I 70 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs system address bit 0
(A0).
• For MC68K #1, this pin inputs the lower data strobe (LDS#).
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs system address bit 0 (A0).
• For Generic #1, this pin inputs system address bit 0 (A0).
• For Generic #2, this pin inputs system address bit 0 (A0).
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
AB[16:1] I
45, 53, 54,
55, 56, 57,
58, 59, 62,
63, 64, 65,
66, 67, 68,
69
C Input These pins input the system address bits 16 through 1 (A[16:1]).
DB[15:0] IO
3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 11, 12,
13, 14, 15,
16, 17, 18,
19
C/TS2 Hi-Z
These pins have multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, these pins are connected to [D15:0].
• For MC68K #1, these pins are connected to D[15:0].
• For MC68K #2, these pins are connected to D[31:16] for a
32-bit device (e.g. MC68030) or D[15:0] for a 16-bit device
(e.g. MC68340).
• For Generic #1, these pins are connected to D[15:0].
• For Generic #2, these pins are connected to D[15:0].
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
WE0# I 77 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs the write enable signal
for the lower data byte (WE0#).
• For MC68K #1, this pin must be tied to IO VDD
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs the bus size bit 0 (SIZ0).
• For Generic #1, this pin inputs the write enable signal for the
lower data byte (WE0#).
• For Generic #2, this pin inputs the write enable signal (WE#)
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
WE1# I 78 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs the write enable signal
for the upper data byte (WE1#).
• For MC68K #1, this pin inputs the upper data strobe (UDS#).
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs the data strobe (DS#).
• For Generic #1, this pin inputs the write enable signal for the
upper data byte (WE1#).
• For Generic #2, this pin inputs the byte enable signal for the
high data byte (BHE#).
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
CS# I 74 C Input This pin inputs the chip select signal.
BCLK I 71 C Input This pin inputs the system bus clock.
BS# I 75 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs the bus start signal
(BS#).
• For MC68K #1, this pin inputs the address strobe (AS#).
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs the address strobe (AS#).
• For Generic #1, this pin must be tied to VSS.
• For Generic #2, this pin must be tied to IO VDD.
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
RD/WR# I 79 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs the RD/WR# signal.
The S1D13705 needs this signal for early decode of the bus
cycle.
• For MC68K #1, this pin inputs the R/W# signal.
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs the R/W# signal.
• For Generic #1, this pin inputs the read command for the
upper data byte (RD1#).
• For Generic #2, this pin must be tied to IO VDD.
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
Pin NamesTypePin #Cell
RESET#
State Description
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
5.2.2 LCD Interface
RD# I 76 CS Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3/SH-4 mode, this pin inputs the read signal (RD#).
• For MC68K #1, this pin must be tied to IO VDD.
• For MC68K #2, this pin inputs the bus size bit 1 (SIZ1).
• For Generic #1, this pin inputs the read command for the
lower data byte (RD0#).
• For Generic #2, this pin inputs the read command (RD#).
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
WAIT# O 2 TS2 Hi-Z
This pin has multiple functions.
• For SH-3 mode, this pin outputs the wait request signal
(WAIT#).
• For SH-4 mode, this pin outputs the device ready signal
(RDY#).
• For MC68K #1, this pin outputs the data transfer
acknowledge signal (DTACK#).
• For MC68K #2, this pin outputs the data transfer and size
acknowledge bit 1 (DSACK1#).
• For Generic #1, this pin outputs the wait signal (WAIT#).
• For Generic #2, this pin outputs the wait signal (WAIT#).
See Table 5-2: “Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 22
for
summary.
RESET# I 73 CS 0 Active low input to set all internal registers to the default state and
to force all signals to their inactive states.
Pin Name Type Pin # Cell RESET#
State Description
FPDAT[7:0] O 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35,
36, 37 CN3 0 Panel Data
FPDAT[10:8] O,
IO 24, 25, 26 CN3 Input
These pins have multiple functions.
• Panel Data bits [10:8] for TFT/D-TFD panels.
• General Purpose Input/Output pins GPIO[3:1].
These pins should be connected to IO VDD when unused.
See Table 5-3: “LCD Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 23
for
summary.
FPDAT11 O,
IO 23 CN3 Input
This pin has multiple functions.
• Panel Data bit 11 for TFT/D-TFD panels.
• General Purpose Input/Output pin GPIO4.
• Inverse Video select pin.
This pin should be connected to IO VDD when unused. See
Table 5-3: “LCD Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 23
for
summary.
FPFRAME O 39 CN3 0 Frame Pulse
Pin NamesTypePin #Cell
RESET#
State Description
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
5.2.3 Clock Input
5.2.4 Miscellaneous
5.2.5 Power Supply
FPLINE O 38 CN3 0 Line Pulse
FPSHIFT O 28 CN3 0 Shift Clock
LCDPWR O 43 CO1 0 Active high LCD Power Control
DRDY O 42 CN3 0
This pin has multiple functions.
• TFT/D-TFD Display Enable (DRDY).
• LCD Backplane Bias (MOD).
• Second Shift Clock (FPSHIFT2).
See Table 5-3: “LCD Interface Pin Mapping,” on page 23
for
summary.
Pin Name Type Pin # Driver Description
CLKI I 51 C Input Clock
Pin Name Type Pin # Cell RESET#
State Description
CNF[3:0] I 46, 47,
48, 49 CAs set by
hardware
These inputs are used to configure the S1D13705 - see Table
5-1: “Summary of Power On/Reset Options,” on page 22.
Must be connected directly to IO VDD or VSS.
GPIO0 IO,
I22 CS/
TS1 Input
This pin has multiple functions - see REG[03h] bit 2.
• General Purpose Input/Output pin.
• Hardware Power Save.
TESTEN I 44 TEST pulled low Test Enable input. This input must be connected to VSS.
Pin Name Type Pin # Driver Description
COREVDD P 1, 21, 41,
61 PCore V
DD
IOVDD P 10, 29, 52 P IO VDD
VSS P 20, 27, 40,
50, 60, 72,
80 P Common VSS
Pin Name Type Pin # Cell RESET#
State Description
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
5.3 Summary of Configuration Options
5.4 Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
Table 5-1: Summary of Power On/Reset Options
Configuration
Pin Power On/Reset State
CNF[3:0]
Select host bus interface as follows:
CNF3 CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus
1000X SH-4 interface Big Endian
0000X SH-4 interface Little Endian
1001X SH-3 interface Big Endian
0001X SH-3 interface Little Endian
X010X reserved
1011X MC68K #1, 16-bit Big Endian
0011X reserved
X 1 0 0 X reserved
1101X MC68K #2, 16-bit Big Endian
0101X reserved
X1100 reserved
X1101 reserved
11110 Generic #1, 16-bit Big Endian
01110 Generic #1, 16-bit Little Endian
11111 reserved
01111 Generic #2, 16-bit Little Endian
Table 5-2: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names SH-3 SH-4 MC68K #1 MC68K #2 Generic #1 Generic #2
AB[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1]
AB0 A0 A0 LDS# A0 A0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[31:16] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1# WE1# UDS# DS# WE1# BHE#
CS# CSn# CSn# External Decode External Decode External Decode External Decode
BCLK CKIO CKIO CLK CLK BCLK BCLK
BS# BS# BS# AS# AS# connect to VSS connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# RD/WR# RD/WR# R/W# R/W# RD1# connect to IO VDD
RD# RD# RD# connect to IO VDD SIZ1 RD0# RD#
WE0# WE0# WE0# connect to IO VDD SIZ0 WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT# RDY# DTACK# DSACK1# WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET#
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
5.5 LCD Interface Pin Mapping
Note
1. Unused GPIO pins must be connected to IO VDD.
2. Hardware Video Invert is enabled on FPDAT11 by REG[02h] bit 1.
Table 5-3: LCD Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Name
Monochrome Passive Panel Color Passive Panel Color TFT/D-TFD
4-bit
Single
8-bit
Single 8-bit Dual 4-bit
Single
8-bit
Single
Format 1
8-bit
Single
Format 2
8-bit Dual 9-bit 12-bit
FPFRAME FPFRAME
FPLINE FPLINE
FPSHIFT FPSHIFT
DRDY MOD MOD MOD MOD FPSHIFT2 MOD MOD DRDY
FPDAT0 driven 0 D0 LD0 driven 0 D0 D0 LD0 R2 R3
FPDAT1 driven 0 D1 LD1 driven 0 D1 D1 LD1 R1 R2
FPDAT2 driven 0 D2 LD2 driven 0 D2 D2 LD2 R0 R1
FPDAT3 driven 0 D3 LD3 driven 0 D3 D3 LD3 G2 G3
FPDAT4 D0 D4 UD0 D0 D4 D4 UD0 G1 G2
FPDAT5 D1 D5 UD1 D1 D5 D5 UD1 G0 G1
FPDAT6 D2 D6 UD2 D2 D6 D6 UD2 B2 B3
FPDAT7 D3 D7 UD3 D3 D7 D7 UD3 B1 B2
FPDAT8 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 B0 B1
FPDAT9 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 R0
FPDAT10 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 G0
FPDAT11
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4/
Hardware
Video
Invert
GPIO4 B0
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
6 D.C. Characteristics
Table 6-1: Absolute Maximum Ratings
Symbol Parameter Rating Units
Core VDD Supply Voltage VSS - 0.3 to 4.0 V
IO VDD Supply Voltage Core VDD to 7.0 V
VIN Input Voltage VSS - 0.3 to IO VDD + 0.5 V
VOUT Output Voltage VSS - 0.3 to IO VDD + 0.5 V
TSTG Storage Temperature -65 to 150 ° C
TSOL Solder Temperature/Time 260 for 10 sec. max at lead ° C
Table 6-2: Recommended Operating Conditions for Core VDD = 3.3V ± 10%
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Core VDD Supply Voltage VSS = 0 V 2.7 3.0/3.3 3.6 V
IO VDD Supply Voltage VSS = 0 V, IO VDD ≥ Core VDD 2.7 3.0/3.3/5.0 5.5 V
VIN Input Voltage VSS IO VDD V
TOPR Operating Temperature -40 25 85 ° C
Table 6-3: Input Specifications
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VIL Low Level Input Voltage
CMOS inputs
IO VDD = 3.0
3.3
5.0
0.8
0.8
1.0 V
VIH High Level Input Voltage
CMOS inputs
IO VDD = 3.0
3.3
5.0
1.9
2.0
3.5 V
VT+ Positive-going Threshold
CMOS Schmitt inputs
IO VDD = 3.0
3.3
5.0
1.0
1.1
2.0
2.3
2.4
4.0 V
VT- Negative-going Threshold
CMOS Schmitt inputs
IO VDD = 3.0
3.3
5.0
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.7
1.8
3.1 V
IIZ Input Leakage Current VDD = Max
VIH = VDD
VIL = VSS
-1 1 µA
CIN Input Pin Capacitance 10 pF
Epson Research and Development Page 25
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Table 6-4: Output Specifications
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
IOL (3.0V) Low Level Output Current
IO VDD = 3.0V
VO = 0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
1.8
5
10
mA
IOL (3.3V) Low Level Output Current
IO VDD = 3.3V
VO = 0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
2
6
12
mA
IOL (5.0V) Low Level Output Current
IO VDD = 5.0V
VO = 0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
3
8
12
mA
IOH (3.0V) High Level Output Current
IO VDD = 3.0V
VO = IO VDD-0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
-1.8
-5
-10
mA
IOH (3.3V) High Level Output Current
IO VDD = 3.3V
VO = IO VDD-0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
-2
-6
-12
mA
IOH (5.0V) High Level Output Current
IO VDD = 5.0V
VO = IO VDD-0.4V, Type = 1
2
3
-3
-8
-12
mA
VOL Low Level Output Voltage I = IOL 0.4 V
VOH High Level Output Voltage I = IOH IO VDD - 0.4 V
IOZ Output Leakage Current VDD = MAX
VOH = VDD
VOL = VSS
-1 1 µA
COUT Output Pin Capacitance 10 pF
CBID Bidirectional Pin Capacitance 10 pF
Page 26 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7 A.C. Characteristics
Conditions: IO VDD = 2.7 V to 5.0 V
TA = -40° C to 85° C
Trise and Tfall for all inputs must be < 5 nsec (10% ~ 90%)
CL = 60pF (Bus/MPU Interface)
CL = 60pF (LCD Panel Interface)
7.1 Bus Interface Timing
7.1.1 SH-4 Interface Timing
Figure 7-1: SH-4 Timing
Note
The SH-4 Wait State Control Register for the area in which the S1D13705 resides must be set to
a non-zero value. The SH-4 read-to-write cycle transition must be set to a non-zero value
(with reference to BUSCLK).
RDY#
TCKIO t2 t3
t4
t11
t12
t17
t5
t6 t7
t8
t9
t13
t18
t15 t16
CKIO
A[16:0], M/R#
CSn#
RD/WR#
RD#
D[15:0]
BS#
WEn#
D[15:0] Hi-Z Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z VALID
(write)
(read)
t10
t14
Epson Research and Development Page 27
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Note
CKIO may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-1: SH-4 Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fCKIO Bus Clock frequency 50 MHz
TCKIO Bus Clock period 1/fCKIO
t2 Bus Clock pulse width low 8ns
t3 Bus Clock pulse width high 8ns
t4 A[16:0], RD/WR# setup to CKIO 0ns
t5 A[16:0], RD/WR# hold from CS# 0ns
t6 BS# setup 5ns
t7 BS# hold 5ns
t8 CSn# setup 0ns
t9 Falling edge RD# to DB[15:0] driven 25 ns
t10 CKIO to WE#, RD# high 1.5TCKIO
t11 Rising edge CSn# to RDY# high impedance TCKIO
t12 Falling edge CSn# to RDY# driven 20 ns
t13 CKIO to RDY# low 20 ns
t14 Rising edge CSn# to RDY# high 16 ns
t15 DB[15:0] setup to 2nd CKIO after BS# (write cycle) 0ns
t16 DB[15:0] hold (write cycle) 0ns
t17 RDY# falling edge to DB[15:0] valid (read cycle) 7ns
t18 Rising edge RD# to DB[15:0] high impedance (read cycle) 10 ns
Page 28 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.1.2 SH-3 Interface Timing
Figure 7-2: SH-3 Bus Timing
Note
The SH-3 Wait State Control Register for the area in which the S1D13705 resides must
be set to a non-zero value.
TCKIO t2 t3
t4
t11
t12
t16
t5
t6 t7
t8
t9
t13
t17
t14 t15
CKIO
A[16:0], M/R#
CSn#
RD/WR#
RD#
D[15:0]
BS#
WAIT#
WEn#
D[15:0]
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z VALID
(write)
(read)
t10
Epson Research and Development Page 29
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Note
CKIO may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-2: SH-3 Bus Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Maxa
aOne Software WAIT State Required
Units
fCKIO Bus Clock frequency 50 MHz
TCKIO Bus Clock period 1/fCKIO
t2 Bus Clock pulse width low 8ns
t3 Bus Clock pulse width high 8ns
t4 A[16:0], RD/WR# setup to CKIO 0ns
t5 A[16:0], RD/WR# hold from CS# 0ns
t6 BS# setup 5ns
t7 BS# hold 5ns
t8 CSn# setup 0ns
t9 Falling edge RD# to DB[15:0] driven 25 ns
t10 CKIO to WEn#, RD# high 1.5TCKIO
t11 Rising edge CSn# to WAIT# high impedance 10 ns
t12 Falling edge CSn# to WAIT# driven 15 ns
t13 CKIO to WAIT# delay 20 ns
t14 DB[15:0] setup to 2nd CKIO after BS# (write cycle) 0ns
t15 DB[15:0] hold from rising edge of WEn# (write cycle) 0ns
t16 WAIT# rising edge to DB[15:0] valid (read cycle) 6ns
t17 Rising edge RD# to DB[15:0] high impedance (read cycle) 10 ns
Page 30 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.1.3 Motorola MC68K #1 Interface Timing
Figure 7-3: MC68K #1 Bus Timing (MC68000)
Note
CLK may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-3: MC68K #1 Bus Timing (MC68000)
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fCLK Bus Clock Frequency 33 MHz
TCLK Bus Clock period 1/fCLK
t1 A[16:1], CS# valid before AS# falling edge 0 ns
t2 A[16:1], CS# hold from AS# rising edge 0 ns
t3 AS# low to DTACK# driven high 16 ns
t4 CLK to DTACK# low 15 ns
t5 CLK to AS#, UDS#, LDS# high 1TCLK
t6 AS# high to DTACK# high 20 ns
t7 AS# high to DTACK# high impedance TCLK
t8 UDS#, LDS# falling edge to D[15:0] valid (write cycle) TCLK
t9 D[15:0] hold from AS# rising edge (write cycle) 0 ns
t10 UDS#, LDS# falling edge to D[15:0] driven (read cycle) 15 ns
t11 D[15:0] valid to DTACK# falling edge (read cycle) 0 ns
t12 UDS#, LDS# rising edge to D[15:0] high impedance 10 ns
t3
A[16:1]
AS#
UDS#, LDS#
VALID
VALID
t1
t9
t2
t8
R/W#
Hi-Z Hi-Z
INVALID
t6
t4
DTACK# Hi-Z
Hi-Z
CLK
t7
TCLK
CS#
t10 t11
Hi-Z VALID Hi-Z
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
t12
(write
(read)
t5
Epson Research and Development Page 31
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
7.1.4 Motorola MC68K #2 Interface Timing
Figure 7-4: MC68K #2 Timing (MC68030)
Note
CLK may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-4: MC68K #2 Timing (MC68030)
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fCLK Bus Clock frequency 33 MHz
TCLK Bus Clock period 1/fCLK
t1 A[16:0], CS#, SIZ0, SIZ1 valid before AS# falling edge 0 ns
t2 A[16:0], CS#, SIZ0, SIZ1 hold from AS#, DS# rising edge 0 ns
t3 AS# low to DSACK1# driven high 22 ns
t4 CLK to DSACK1# low 18 ns
t5 CLK to AS#, DS# high 1TCLK ns
t6 AS# high to DSACK1# high 20 ns
t7 AS# high to DSACK1# high impedance TCLK
t8 DS# falling edge to D[31:16] valid (write cycle) TCLK/2
t9 AS#, DS# rising edge to D[31:16] invalid (write cycle) 0 ns
t10 D[31:16] valid to DSACK1# low (read cycle) 0 ns
t11 AS#, DS# rising edge to D[31:16] high impedance 20 ns
A[16:0]
AS#
DS#
VALID
t1
t9
t2
t8
R/W#
Hi-Z
CS#
SIZ0, SIZ1
CLK
t6
t3
t4
DSACK1# Hi-Z
Hi-Z
t7
TCLK
t10
VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[31:16]
D[31:16]
VALID Hi-Z
t11
(write)
(read)
t5
Page 32 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.1.5 Generic #1 Interface Timing
Figure 7-5: Generic #1 Timing
Note
BCLK may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-5: Generic #1 Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fBCLK Bus Clock frequency 50 MHz
TBCLK Bus Clock period 1/fBCLK MHz
t1 A[16:0], CS# valid to WE0#, WE1# low (write cycle) or RD0#, RD1#
low (read cycle) 0ns
t2 WE0#, WE1# high (write cycle) or RD0#, RD1# high (read cycle) to
A[16:0], CS# invalid 0ns
t3 WE0#, WE1# low to D[15:0] valid (write cycle) TBCLK
t4 RD0#, RD1# low to D[15:0] driven (read cycle) 17 ns
t5 WE0#, WE1# high to D[15:0] invalid (write cycle) 0 ns
t6 D[15:0] valid to WAIT# high (read cycle) 0 ns
t7 RD0#, RD1# high to D[15:0] high impedance (read cycle) 10 ns
t8 WE0#, WE1# low (write cycle) or RD0#, RD1# low (read cycle) to
WAIT# driven low 16 ns
t9 BCLK to WAIT# high 16 ns
t10 WE0#, WE1# high (write cycle) or RD0#, RD1# high (read cycle) to
WAIT# high impedance 16 ns
t11 WAIT# high to WE0#, WE1#, RD0#, RD1# high 1TBCLK
TBCLK
t8
t5
t9
t3
t1
t10
BCLK
A[16:0]
CS#
WE0#,WE1#
WAIT#
VALID
t2
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
VALID
t6 t7
VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
t4
RD0#, RD1#
(write)
(read)
t11
Epson Research and Development Page 33
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
7.1.6 Generic #2 Interface Timing
Figure 7-6: Generic #2 Timing
Note
BCLK may be turned off (held low) between accesses - see Section 13.5, “Turning Off
BCLK Between Accesses” on page 84
Table 7-6: Generic #2 Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fBCLK Bus Clock frequency 50 MHz
TBCLK Bus Clock period 1/fBCLK
t1 A[16:0], BHE#, CS# valid to WE#, RD# low 0 ns
t2 WE#, RD# high to A[16:0], BHE#, CS# invalid 0 ns
t3 WE# low to D[15:0] valid (write cycle) TBCLK
t4 WE# high to D[15:0] invalid (write cycle) 0 ns
t5 RD# low to D[15:0] driven (read cycle) 16 ns
t6 D[15:0] valid to WAIT# high (read cycle) 0 ns
t7 RD# high to D[15:0] high impedance (read cycle) 10 ns
t8 WE#, RD# low to WAIT# driven low 14 ns
t9 BCLK to WAIT# high 10 ns
t10 WE#, RD# high to WAIT# high impedance 11 ns
t11 WAIT# high to WE#, RD# high 1TBCLK
t8
t4
t9
t3
t1
t10
BCLK
A[16:0]
CS#
WE#,RD#
WAIT#
VALID
t2
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
Hi-Z
VALID
TBCLK
t6 t7
VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
t5
BHE#
(write)
(read)
t11
Page 34 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.2 Clock Input Requirements
Figure 7-7: Clock Input Requirements for CLKI
Note
When CLKI is > 25MHz the Input Clock Divide bit (REG[02h] bit 4) must be set to 1.
Table 7-7: Clock Input Requirements for CLKI
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fCLKI Input Clock Frequency (CLKI) 50 MHz
TCLKI Input Clock period (CLKI) 1/fCLKI ns
tPWH Input Clock Pulse Width High (CLKI) 8 ns
tPWL Input Clock Pulse Width Low (CLKI) 8 ns
tfInput Clock Fall Time (10% - 90%) 5 ns
trInput Clock Rise Time (10% - 90%) 5 ns
tPWL
tPWH
tf
Clock Input Waveform
tr
T
CLKI
VIH
VIL
10%
90%
Epson Research and Development Page 35
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-8: Clock Input Requirements for BCLK
Table 7-8: Clock Input Requirements for BCLK
Symbol Parameter Min Max Units
fBCLK Input Clock Frequency (BCLK) 50 MHz
TBCLK Input Clock period (BCLK) 1/fCLKI
tPWH Input Clock Pulse Width High (BCLK) 8 ns
tPWL Input Clock Pulse Width Low (BCLK) 8 ns
tfInput Clock Fall Time (10% - 90%) 5 ns
trInput Clock Rise Time (10% - 90%) 5 ns
tPWL
tPWH
tf
Clock Input Waveform
tr
T
BCLK
VIH
VIL
10%
90%
Page 36 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3 Display Interface
7.3.1 Power On/Reset Timing
Figure 7-9: LCD Panel Power On/Reset Timing
Note
Where TFPFRAME is the period of FPFRAME and TPCLK is the period of the pixel clock.
Table 7-9: LCD Panel Power On/Reset Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 REG[03h] to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY
active TFPFRAME ns
t2 FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY active to
LCDPWR 0Frames
RESET#
REG[03h] bits [1:0]
LCDPWR
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
FPDAT
DRDY
t1 t2
00 11
FPFRAME
ACTIVE
Epson Research and Development Page 37
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
7.3.2 Power Down/Up Timing
Figure 7-10: Power Down/Up Timing
Table 7-10: Power Down/Up Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 HW Power Save active to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY
inactive - LCDPWR Override = 1 1Frame
t2 HW Power Save inactive to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY
active - LCDPWR Override = 1 1Frame
t3 HW Power Save active to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY
inactive - LCDPWR Override = 0 1Frame
t4 LCDPWR low to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY inactive
- LCDPWR Override = 0 127 Frame
t5 HW Power Save inactive to FPLINE, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPDAT, DRDY,
LCDPWR active - LCDPWR Override = 0 0Frame
t6 LCDPWR Override active (1) to LCDPWR inactive 1 Frame
t7 LCDPWR Override inactive (1) to LCDPWR active 1 Frame
t4
t3
t1
Active Inactive Active Inactive Active
LCDPWR Override
(REG[03h] bit 3)
HW Power Save
FP Signals
LCDPWR
t2
Software Power Save 11 00 11 00 11
t5 t6 t7
REG[03h] bits [1:0]
or
Page 38 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.3 Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel Timing
Figure 7-11: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE239 LINE240
FPFRAME
LINE1 LINE2
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
1-2 1-6 1-318
1-3 1-7 1-319
1-4 1-8 1-320
1-1 1-5 1-317
DRDY (MOD)
VNDP
HDP HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 320x240 panel
FPDAT[7:4]]
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT7
For this timing diagram Mask FPSHIFT, REG[01h] bit 3, is set to 1
Epson Research and Development Page 39
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-12: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8]Ts
4. t6min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 2]Ts
5. t7min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 11]Ts
Table 7-11: Single Monochrome 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse rising edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 4
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 5
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 2 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 4 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 2 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 2 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:4] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 2 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:4] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 2 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 23 Ts
Frame Pulse
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
FPDAT[7:4]
Data Timing
t12 t13
t14 t10t11
t5
t1 t2
t3
t4
t8 t9
12
t7
t6
Note: For this timing diagram Mask FPSHIFT, REG[01h] bit 3, is set to 1
Page 40 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.4 Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing
Figure 7-13: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
HNDP
VDP
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE479 LINE480
FPFRAME
LINE1 LINE2
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
1-2 1-10 1-634
1-3 1-11 1-635
1-4 1-12 1-636
1-5 1-13 1-637
1-6 1-14 1-638
1-7 1-15 1-639
1-8 1-16 1-640
1-1 1-9 1-633
DRDY (MOD)
VNDP
HDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 640x480 panel
FPDAT[7:0]
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT7
FPDAT2
FPDAT1
FPDAT0
FPDAT3
For this timing diagram Mask FPSHIFT, REG[01h] bit 3, is set to 1
Epson Research and Development Page 41
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-14: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8]Ts
4. t6min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 4]Ts
5. t7min =[(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 13]Ts
Table 7-12: Single Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse rising edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 4
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 5
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 4 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 8 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 4 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 4 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:0] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 4 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:0] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 4 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 23 Ts
t12 t13
Frame Pulse
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
FPDAT[7:0]
Data Timing
t5
t1 t2
t3
t4
t14
t8 t9
t10t11
12
t7
t6
Note: For this timing diagram Mask FPSHIFT, REG[01h] bit 3, is set to 1
Page 42 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.5 Single Color 4-Bit Panel Timing
Figure 7-15: Single Color 4-Bit Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPDAT[7:4] LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE239 LINE240
FPFRAME
LINE1 LINE2
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT7
DRDY (MOD)
VNDP
1-R1
1-G1
1-B1
1-R2
1-G2
1-B2
1-R3
1-G3
1-B3
1-R4
1-G4
1-B4
1-B319
1-R320
1-G320
1-B320
HDP HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 320x240 panel
FPSHIFT
Epson Research and Development Page 43
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-16: Single Color 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8]Ts
4. t6min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 1.5]Ts
5. t7min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 10]Ts
Table 7-13: Single Color 4-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse rising edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 4
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 5
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 0.5 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 1 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 0.5 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 0.5 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:4] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:4] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 24 Ts
Frame Pulse
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
FPDAT[7:4]
Data Timing
t5
t14
t1 t2
t3
t4
t8 t9
t10t11
t12 t13
12
t7
t6
Page 44 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.6 Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 1)
Figure 7-17: Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 1)
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPSHIFT 2
LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE479 LINE480
FPFRAME
LINE1 LINE2
FPLINE
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT3
FPDAT2
FPDAT1
FPDAT0
FPDAT7
HDP
VNDP
1-R1
1-B1
1-G2
1-R3
1-B3
1-G4
1-R5
1-B5
1-G1
1-R2
1-B2
1-G3
1-R4
1-B4
1-G5
1-R6
1-G6
1-R7
1-B7
1-G8
1-R9
1-B9
1-G10
1-R11
1-B6
1-G7
1-R8
1-B8
1-G9
1-R10
1-B10
1-G11
1-R636
1-B636
1-G637
1-R638
1-B638
1-G639
1-R640
1-B640
FPSHIFT
1-B11
1-G12
1-R13
1-B13
1-G14
1-R15
1-B15
1-G16
1-R12
1-B12
1-G13
1-R14
1-B14
1-G15
1-R16
1-B16
HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 640x480 panel
FPDAT[7:0]
Epson Research and Development Page 45
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-18: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 1)
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8]Ts
4. t6amin = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8]Ts
5. t6bmin = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 2]Ts
6. t7amin = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 11]Ts
7. t7bmin = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 11] - t10]Ts
Table 7-14: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 1)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t6a Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 4
t6b Shift Pulse 2 falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 5
t7a Shift Pulse 2 falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 6
t7b Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 7
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising, Shift Pulse 2 falling edge t14 + 2 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse 2, Shift Pulse period 4 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse 2, Shift Pulse pulse width low 2 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse 2, Shift Pulse pulse width high 2 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:0] setup to Shift Pulse 2, Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:0] hold from Shift Pulse 2, Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 25 Ts
Frame Pulse
Line Pulse
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse 2
FPDAT[7:0]
Data Timing
t14
t1 t2
t3
t4
t8 t9
t10t11
t12 t13
12
t7a
t6b
Shift Pulse
t6a
t7b
t12 t13
Page 46 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.7 Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 2)
Figure 7-19: Single Color 8-Bit Panel Timing (Format 2)
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPDAT[7:0] LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 LINE4 LINE479 LINE480
FPFRAME
LINE1 LINE2
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT3
FPDAT2
FPDAT1
FPDAT0
FPDAT7
DRDY (MOD)
VNDP
1-R1
1-G1
1-B1
1-R2
1-G2
1-B2
1-R3
1-G3
1-B3
1-R4
1-G4
1-B4
1-R5
1-G5
1-B5
1-R6
1-G6
1-B6
1-R7
1-G7
1-B7
1-R8
1-G8
1-B8
1-G638
1-B638
1-R639
1-G639
1-B639
1-R640
1-G640
1-B640
HDP HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 640x480 panel
FPSHIFT
Epson Research and Development Page 47
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-20: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 2)
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8]Ts
4. t6min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 1]Ts
5. t7min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 10]Ts
Table 7-15: Single Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing (Format 2)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse rising edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 4
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 5
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 2 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 2 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 1 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 1 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:0] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:0] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 23 Ts
t14 t10t11
t12 t13
Data Timing
Frame Pulse
t1 t2
t3
t5
t4
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
t8 t9
12
t7
t6
FPDAT[7:0]
Page 48 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.8 Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing
Figure 7-21: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
FPDAT[7:0]
FPFRAME
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
FPDAT6 1-2 1-6 1-638
FPDAT5 1-3 1-7 1-639
FPDAT4 1-4 1-8 1-640
FPDAT3 241-1 241-5 241-637
FPDAT2 241-638
FPDAT1 241-639
FPDAT0 241-640
FPDAT7 1-1 1-5 1-637
HDP
DRDY (MOD)
241-2 241-6
241-3 241-7
241-4 241-8
VNDP
HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 640x480 panel
LINE 1/241 LINE 2/242 LINE 3/243 LINE 4/244 LINE 239/479 LINE 240/480 LINE 1/241 LINE 2/242
Epson Research and Development Page 49
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-22: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [(((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8) x 2]Ts
5. t6min = [((REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 2)x 8 + 20]Ts
6. t7min = [((REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 2)x 8 + 29]Ts
Table 7-16: Dual Monochrome 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 5
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 6
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 2 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 8 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 4 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 4 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:0] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 4 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:0] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 4 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 39 Ts
t14 t10t11
t12 t13
Data Timing
Frame Pulse
t1 t2
t3
t5
t4
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
t8 t9
12
t7
t6
FPDAT[7:0]
Note: For this timing diagram Mask FPSHIFT, REG[01h] bit 3, is set to 1
Page 50 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.9 Dual Color 8-Bit Panel Timing
Figure 7-23: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = REG[0Ah] bits 5-0 Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
VDP
FPLINE
FPDAT[7:0]
FPFRAME
FPLINE
DRDY (MOD)
DRDY (MOD)
VNDP
1-R1
1-G1
1-B1
1-R2
1-G2
1-B2
1-R3
1-G3
1-B3
1-R4
1-G4
1-B4
1-R5
1-G5
1-B5
1-R6
1-G6
1-B6
1-R7
1-G7
1-R8
1-G8
1-B8
1-B639
1-R640
1-G640
1-B640
241-
B639
241-
R640
241-
G640
241-
B640
241-R1
241-G1
241-B1
241-R2
241-G2
241-B2
241-R3
241-G3
241-B3
241-R4
241-G4
241-B4
241-R5
241-G5
241-B5
241-R6
241-G6
241-B6
241-R7
241-G7
241-B7
241-R8
241-G8
241-B8
1-B7
FPSHIFT
HDP HNDP
* Diagram drawn with 2 FPLINE vertical blank period
Example timing for a 640x480 panel
LINE 1/241 LINE 2/242 LINE 239/479 LINE 240/480 LINE 1/241
FPDAT6
FPDAT5
FPDAT4
FPDAT3
FPDAT2
FPDAT1
FPDAT0
FPDAT7
Epson Research and Development Page 51
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-24: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t1min = t3min - 9Ts
3. t3min = [(((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8) x 2]Ts
5. t6min = [((REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 2)x 8 + 17]Ts
6. t7min = [((REG[08h] bits 4-0) x 2)x 8 + 26]Ts
Table 7-17: Dual Color 8-Bit Panel A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Frame Pulse setup to Line Pulse falling edge note 2 (note 1)
t2 Frame Pulse hold from Line Pulse falling edge 9 Ts
t3 Line Pulse period note 3
t4 Line Pulse pulse width 9 Ts
t5 MOD delay from Line Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t6 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse rising edge note 5
t7 Shift Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 6
t8 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse falling edge t14 + 1 Ts
t9 Shift Pulse period 2 Ts
t10 Shift Pulse pulse width low 1 Ts
t11 Shift Pulse pulse width high 1 Ts
t12 FPDAT[7:0] setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t13 FPDAT[7:0] hold to Shift Pulse falling edge 1 Ts
t14 Line Pulse falling edge to Shift Pulse rising edge 39 Ts
t14 t10t11
t12 t13
Data Timing
Frame Pulse
t1 t2
t3
t5
t4
Line Pulse
DRDY (MOD)
Sync Timing
Line Pulse
Shift Pulse
t8 t9
12
t7
t6
FPDAT[7:0]
Page 52 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
7.3.10 9/12-Bit TFT/D-TFD Panel Timing
Figure 7-25: 12-Bit TFT/D-TFD Panel Timing
VDP = Vertical Display Period = (REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1 Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = VNDP1 + VNDP2 = (REG[0Ah] bits 5-0) Lines
VNDP1 = Vertical Non-Display Period 1 = REG[09h] bits 5-0 Lines
VNDP2 = Vertical Non-Display Period 2 = (REG[0Ah] bits 5-0) - (REG[09Ah] bits 5-0) Lines
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8Ts
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = HNDP1 + HNDP2 = (REG[08h] + 4) x 8Ts
HNDP1= Horizontal Non-Display Period 1 = ((REG[07h] bits4-0) x 8) +16Ts
HNDP2= Horizontal Non-Display Period 2 = (((REG[08h] bits4-0) - (REG[07h] bits 4-0)) x 8) +16Ts
FPFRAME
FPLINE
LINE1 LINE480
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-640
1-640
1-640
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
DRDY
FPDAT[11:0]
FPDAT[9]
FPDAT[10]
FPDAT[11]
VDP
DRDY
Note: DRDY is used to indicate the first pixel
Example Timing for 12-bit 640x480 panel
VNDP2
HDP
HNDP2HNDP1
LINE480
VNDP1
FPDAT[8:6]
FPDAT[4:3]
FPDAT[2:0]
Epson Research and Development Page 53
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 7-26: TFT/D-TFD A.C. Timing
t12
t7
Line Pulse
t8
t6
Frame Pulse
DRDY
Shift Pulse
640
t9
Line Pulse
21639
t13
t2 t3 t16
t4 t5
t14
t15
t1 t11
t10
FPDAT[11:0]
Note: DRDY is used to indicate the first pixel
t17
Page 54 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
1. Ts = pixel clock period
2. t6min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8 + ((REG[08h] bits 4-0)+4) x 8] Ts
3. t8 min = [((REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0)+1) + (REG[0Ah] bits 6-0)] Lines
4. t10min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8] Ts
5. t14min = [((REG[04h] bits 6-0)+1) x 8] Ts
6. t15min = [(REG[07h] bits 4-0) x 8 + 16] Ts
7. t17min = [(REG[08h] bits 4-0) - (REG[07]) x 8 + 16] Ts
Table 7-18: TFT/D-TFD A.C. Timing
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
t1 Shift Pulse period 1 (note 1)
t2 Shift Pulse pulse width high 0.5 Ts
t3 Shift Pulse pulse width low 0.5 Ts
t4 data setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t5 data hold from Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t6 Line Pulse cycle time note 2
t7 Line Pulse pulse width low 9 Ts
t8 Frame Pulse cycle time note 3
t9 Frame Pulse pulse width low 2t6
t10 horizontal display period note 4
t11 Line Pulse setup to Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t12 Frame Pulse falling edge to Line Pulse falling
edge phase difference t6 - 18Ts
t13 DRDY to Shift Pulse falling edge setup time 0.5 Ts
t14 DRDY pulse width note 5
t15 DRDY falling edge to Line Pulse falling edge note 6
t16 DRDY hold from Shift Pulse falling edge 0.5 Ts
t17 Line Pulse Falling edge to DRDY active note 7 250
Epson Research and Development Page 55
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
8 Registers
8.1 Register Mapping
The S1D13705 registers are located in the upper 32 bytes of the 128K byte S1D13705
address range. The registers are accessible when CS# = 0 and AB[16:0] are in the range
1FFE0h through 1FFFFh.
8.2 Register Descriptions
Unless specified otherwise, all register bits are reset to 0 during power up.
All bits marked n/a should be programmed 0.
bits 7-2 Product Code
This is a read-only register that indicates the product code of the chip. The product code is
001001.
bits 1-0 Revision Code
This is a read-only register that indicates the revision code of the chip. The revision code is
00.
bit 7 TFT/STN
When this bit = 0, STN (passive) panel mode is selected. When this bit = 1, TFT/D-TFD
panel mode is selected. If TFT/D-TFD panel mode is selected, Dual/Single (REG[01h] bit
6) and Color/Mono (REG[01h] bit5) are ignored. See Table 8-1: “Panel Data Format” for a
comprehensive description of panel selection.
bit 6 Dual/Single
When this bit = 0, Single LCD panel drive is selected. When this bit = 1, Dual LCD panel
drive is selected. See Table 8-1: “Panel Data Format” for a comprehensive description of
panel selection.
bit 5 Color/Mono
When this bit = 0, Monochrome LCD panel drive is selected. When this bit = 1, Color
LCD panel drive is selected. See Table 8-1: “Panel Data Format” for a comprehensive
description of panel selection.
REG[00h] Revision Code Register
Address = 1FFE0h Read Only.
Product Code
Bit 5 Product Code
Bit 4 Product Code
Bit 3 Product Code
Bit 2 Product Code
Bit 1 Product Code
Bit 0 Revision
Code Bit 1 Revision
Code Bit 0
REG[01h] Mode Register 0
Address = 1FFE1h Read/Write.
TFT/STN Dual/Single Color/Mono FPLine
Polarity FPFrame
Polarity Mask
FPSHIFT Data Width
Bit 1 Data Width
Bit 0
Page 56 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bit 4 FPLINE Polarity
This bit controls the polarity of FPLINE in TFT/D-TFD mode (no effect in passive panel
mode). When this bit = 0, FPLINE is active low. When this bit = 1, FPLINE is active high.
bit 3 FPFRAME Polarity
This bit controls the polarity of FPFRAME in TFT/D-TFD mode (no effect in passive
panel mode). When this bit = 0, FPFRAME is active low. When this bit = 1, FPFRAME is
active high.
bit 2 Mask FPSHIFT
FPSHIFT is masked during non-display periods if either of the following two criteria is
met: 1. Color passive panel is selected (REG[01h] bit 5 = 1)
2. This bit (REG[01h] bit 2) = 1
bits 1-0 Data Width Bits [1:0]
These bits select the display data format. See Table 8-1: “Panel Data Format” below for a
comprehensive description of panel selection.
Table 8-1: Panel Data Format
TFT/STN
REG[01h] bit 7
Color/Mono
REG[01h] bit 5
Dual/Single
REG[01h] bit 6
Data Width
Bit 1
REG[01h] bit 1
Data Width
Bit 0
REG[01h] bit 0
Function
0
0
0
00 Mono Single 4-bit passive LCD
1 Mono Single 8-bit passive LCD
10 reserved
1 reserved
1
00 reserved
1 Mono Dual 8-bit passive LCD
10 reserved
1 reserved
1
0
00 Color Single 4-bit passive LCD
1 Color Single 8-bit passive LCD format 1
10 reserved
1 Color Single 8-bit passive LCD format 2
1
00 reserved
1 Color Dual 8-bit passive LCD
10 reserved
1 reserved
1 X (don’t care) 0 9-bit TFT/D-TFD panel
1 12-bit TFT/D-TFD panel
Epson Research and Development Page 57
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
bits 7-6 Bit-Per-Pixel Bits [1:0]
These bits select the color or gray-scale depth (Display Mode).
bit 5 High Performance (Landscape Modes Only)
When this bit = 0, the internal Memory Clock (MCLK) is a divided-down version of the
Pixel Clock (PCLK). The denominator is dependent on the bit-per-pixel mode - see the
table below.
When this bit = 1, MCLK is fixed to the same frequency as PCLK for all bit-per-pixel
modes. This provides a faster screen update performance in 1/2/4 bit-per-pixel modes, but
also increases power consumption. This bit can be set to 1 just before a major screen
update, then set back to 0 to save power after the update. This bit has no effect in Swivel-
View mode. Refer to REG[1Bh] SwivelView Mode Register on page 67 for SwivelView
mode clock selection.
REG[02h] Mode Register 1
Address = 1FFE2h Read/Write.
Bit-Per-Pixel
Bit 1 Bit-Per-Pixel
Bit 0 High
Performance
Input Clock
divide
(CLKI/2) Display Blank Frame
Repeat
Hardware
Video Invert
Enable
Software
Video Invert
Table 8-2: Gray Scale/Color Mode Selection
Color/Mono
REG[01h] bit 5
Bit-Per-Pixel Bit 1
REG[02h] bit 7
Bit-Per-Pixel Bit 0
REG[02h] bit 6 Display Mode
0
00 2 Gray scale 1 bit-per-pixel
1 4 Gray scale 2 bit-per-pixel
10 16 Gray scale 4 bit-per-pixel
1reserved
1
00 2 Colors 1 bit-per-pixel
1 4 Colors 2 bit-per-pixel
10 16 Colors 4 bit-per-pixel
1 256 Colors 8 bit-per-pixel
Table 8-3: High Performance Selection
High Performance BPP Bit 1 BPP Bit 0 Display Modes
0
00 MClk = PClk/8 1 bit-per-pixel
1 MClk = PClk/4 2 bit-per-pixel
10 MClk = PClk/2 4 bit-per-pixel
1 MClk = PClk 8 bit-per-pixel
1XXMClk = PClk
Page 58 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bit 4 Input Clock Divide
When this bit = 0, the Operating Clock(CLK) is the same as the Input Clock (CLKI).
When this bit = 1, CLK = CLKI/2.
In landscape mode PCLK=CLK and MCLK is selected as per Table 8-3: “High Perfor-
mance Selection”.
In SwivelView mode, MCLK and PCLK are derived from CLK as shown in Table 8-8:
“Selection of PCLK and MCLK in SwivelView Mode,” on page 68.
bit 3 Display Blank
This bit blanks the display image. When this bit = 1, the display is blanked (FPDAT lines
to the panel are driven low). When this bit = 0, the display is enabled.
bit 2 Frame Repeat (EL support)
This feature is used to improve Frame Rate Modulation of EL panels. When this bit = 1,
an internal frame counter runs from 0 to 3FFFFh. When the frame counter rolls over, the
modulated image pattern is repeated (every 1 hour when the frame rate is 72Hz). When
this bit = 0, the modulated image pattern is never repeated.
bit 1 Hardware Video Invert Enable
In passive panel modes (REG[01h] bit 7 = 0) FPDAT11 is available as either GPIO4 or
hardware video invert. When this bit = 1, Hardware Video Invert is enabled via the
FPDAT11 pin. When this bit = 0, FPDAT11 operates as GPIO4. See Table 8-4: “Inverse
Video Mode Select Options” below.
Note
Video data is inverted after the Look-Up Table.
bit 0 Software Video Invert
When this bit = 1, Inverse Video Mode is selected. When this bit = 0, Standard Video
Mode is selected. See Table 8-4: “Inverse Video Mode Select Options” below.
Note
Video data is inverted after the Look-Up Table.
Table 8-4: Inverse Video Mode Select Options
Hardware Video
Invert Enable
Software Video Invert
(Passive and Active
Panels)
FPDAT11
(Passive Panels Only) Video Data
00 XNormal
01 XInverse
1X 0Normal
1X 1Inverse
Epson Research and Development Page 59
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
bit 3 LCDPWR Override
This bit is used to override the panel on/off sequencing logic. When this bit = 0, LCDPWR
and the panel interface signals are controlled by the sequencing logic. When this bit 1,
LCDPWR is forced to off and the panel interface signals are forced low immediately upon
entering power save mode. See Section 7.3.2, “Power Down/Up Timing” on page 37 for
further information.
bit 2 Hardware Power Save Enable
When this bit = 1 GPIO0 is used as the Hardware Power Save input pin. When this bit = 0,
GPIO0 operates normally.
bits 1-0 Software Power Save Bits [1: 0]
These bits select the Power Save Mode as shown in the following table.
Refer to Section 13, “Power Save Modes” on page 82 for a complete description of the
power save modes.
REG[03h] Mode Register 2
Address = 1FFE3h Read/Write
n/an/an/an/a
LCDPWR
Override
Hardware
Power Save
Enable
Software
Power Save
Bit 1
Software
Power Save
Bit 0
Table 8-5: Hardware Power Save/GPIO0 Operation
RESET#
State
Hardware Power
Save Enable
REG[03h] bit 2
GPIO0 Config
REG[18h] bit 0
GPIO0
Status/Control
REG[19h] bit 0
GPIO0 Operation
0X X X
1 0 0 reads pin status GPIO0 Input
(high impedance)
1 0 1 0 GPIO0 Output = 0
1 0 1 1 GPIO0 Output = 1
11 X X
Hardware Power Save
Input (active high)
Table 8-6: Software Power Save Mode Selection
Bit 1 Bit 0 Mode
0 0 Software Power Save
0 1 reserved
1 0 reserved
1 1 Normal Operation
Page 60 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bits 6-0 Horizontal Panel Size Bits [6:0]
This register determines the horizontal resolution of the panel. This register must be pro-
grammed with a value calculated as follows:
Note
This register must not be set to a value less than 03h.
.
REG[05h] bits 7-0 Vertical Panel Size Bits [9:0]
REG[06h] bits 1-0 This 10-bit register determines the vertical resolution of the panel. This register must be
programmed with a value calculated as follows:
3FFh is the maximum value of this register for a vertical resolution of 1024 lines.
REG[04h] Horizontal Panel Size Register
Address = 1FFE4h Read/Write
n/a Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
6
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
5
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
4
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
3
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
2
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
1
Horizontal
Panel Size Bit
0
REG[05h] Vertical Panel Size Register (LSB)
Address = 1FFE5h Read/Write
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 7
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 6
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 5
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 4
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 3
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 2
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 1
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 0
REG[06h] Vertical Panel Size Register (MSB)
Address = 1FFE6h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 9
Vertical Panel
Size
Bit 8
HorizontalPanelSizeRegister HorizontalPanelResolution pixels()
8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


1–=
VerticalPanelSizeRegister VerticalPanelResolution lines()1–=
Epson Research and Development Page 61
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
bits 4-0 FPLINE Start Position
These bits are used in TFT/D-TFD mode to specify the position of the FPLINE pulse.
These bits specify the delay, in 8-pixel resolution, from the end of a line of display data
(FPDAT) to the leading edge of FPLINE. This register is effective in TFT/D-TFD mode
only (REG[01h] bit 7 = 1). This register is programmed as follows:
The following constraint must be satisfied:
bits 4-0 Horizontal Non-Display Period
These bits specify the horizontal non-display period in 8-pixel resolution.
bits 5-0 FPFRAME Start Position
These bits are used in TFT/D-TFD mode to specify the position of the FPFRAME pulse.
These bits specify the number of lines between the last line of display data (FPDAT) and
the leading edge of FPFRAME. This register is effective in TFT/D-TFD mode only
(REG[01h] bit 7 = 1). This register is programmed as follows:
The contents of this register must be greater than zero and less than or equal to the Vertical
Non-Display Period Register, i.e.
REG[07h] FPLINE Start Position
Address = 1FFE7h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a FPLINE Start
Position Bit 4 FPLINE Start
Position Bit 3 FPLINE Start
Position Bit 2 FPLINE Start
Position Bit 1 FPLINE Start
Position Bit 0
REG[08h] Horizontal Non-Display Period
Address = 1FFE8h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a Horizontal
Non-Display
Period Bit 4
Horizontal
Non-Display
Period Bit 3
Horizontal
Non-Display
Period Bit 2
Horizontal
Non-Display
Period Bit 1
Horizontal
Non-Display
Period Bit 0
REG[09h] FPFRAME Start Position
Address = 1FFE9h Read/Write
n/a n/a FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 5
FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 4
FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 3
FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 2
FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 1
FPFRAME
Start Position
Bit 0
FPLINEposition pixels()REG 07h[]2+()8×=
REG 07h[]REG 08h[]≤
HorizontalNonDisplayPeriod pixels()REG 08h[]4+()8×=
FPFRAMEposition lines()REG 09h[]=
1REG09h[]REG 0Ah[]Bits 5:0≤≤
Page 62 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bit 7 Vertical Non-Display Status
This bit =1 during the Vertical Non-Display period.
bits 5-0 Vertical Non-Display Period
These bits specify the vertical non-display period. This register is programmed as follows:
Note
This register should be set only once, on power-up during initialization.
.
bits 5-0 MOD Rate Bits [5:0]
When the value of this register is 0, the MOD output signal toggles every FPFRAME. For
a non-zero value, the value in this register + 1 specifies the number of FPLINEs between
toggles of the MOD output signal. These bits are for passive LCD panels only.
REG[0Ah] Vertical Non-Display Period
Address = 1FFEAh Read/Write
Vertical Non-
Display
Status n/a Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 5
Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 4
Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 3
Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 2
Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 1
Vertical Non-
Display
Period Bit 0
REG[0Bh] MOD Rate Register
Address = 1FFEBh Read/Write
n/a n/a MOD Rate
Bit 5 MOD Rate
Bit 4 MOD Rate
Bit 3 MOD Rate
Bit 2 MOD Rate
Bit 1 MOD Rate
Bit 0
VerticalNonDisplayPeriod lines()REG[0Ah] bits [5:0]=
Epson Research and Development Page 63
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
REG[0Dh] bits 7-0 Screen 1 Start Address Bits [15:0]
REG[0Ch] bits 7-0 These bits determine the word address of the start of Screen 1 in Landscape modes or the
byte address of the start of Screen 1 in SwivelView modes.
Note
For SwivelView mode the most significant bit (bit 16) is located in REG[10h].
REG[0Fh] bits 7-0 Screen 2 Start Address Bits [15:0]
REG[0Eh] bits 7-0 These bits determine the word address of the start of Screen 2 in Landscape modes only
and has no effect in SwivelView modes.
bit 0 Screen 1 Start Address Bit 16
This bit is the most significant bit of Screen 1 Start Address for SwivelView mode. This
bit has no effect in Landscape mode.
REG[0Ch] Screen 1 Start Address Register (LSB)
Address = 1FFECh Read/Write
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 7
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 6
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 5
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 4
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 3
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 2
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 1
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 0
REG[0Dh] Screen 1 Start Address Register (MSB)
Address = 1FFEDh Read/Write
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 15
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 14
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 13
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 12
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 11
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 10
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 9
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 8
REG[0Eh] Screen 2 Start Address Register (LSB)
Address = 1FFEEh Read/Write
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 7
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 6
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 5
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 4
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 3
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 2
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 1
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 0
REG[0Fh] Screen 2 Start Address Register (MSB)
Address = 1FFEFh Read/Write
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 15
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 14
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 13
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 12
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 11
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 10
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 9
Screen 2 Start
Address
Bit 8
REG[10h] Screen Start Address Overflow Register
Address = 1FFF0h Read/Write
n/an/an/an/an/an/an/a
Screen 1 Start
Address
Bit 16
Page 64 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bits 7-0 Memory Address Offset Bits [7:0] (Landscape Modes Only)
This register is used to create a virtual image by setting a word offset between the last
address of one line and the first address of the following line. If this register is not equal to
zero, then a virtual image is formed. The displayed image is a window into the larger vir-
tual image. See Figure 8-1: “Screen-Register Relationship, Split Screen,” on page 65.
This register has no effect in SwivelView modes. See “REG[1Ch] Line Byte Count Regis-
ter for SwivelView Mode” on page 68.
.
REG[13h] bits 1-0 Screen 1 Vertical Size Bits [9:0]
REG[12h] bits 7-0 This register is used to implement the Split Screen feature of the S1D13705. These bits
determine the height (in lines) of Screen 1.
In landscape modes, if this register is programmed with a value, n, where n is less than the
Vertical Panel Size (REG[06h], REG[05h]), then lines 0 to n of the panel contain Screen 1
and lines n+1 to REG[06h], REG[05h] of the panel contain Screen 2. See Figure 8-1:
“Screen-Register Relationship, Split Screen,” on page 65. If Split Screen is not desired,
this register must be programmed greater than, or equal to the Vertical Panel Size,
REG[06h] and REG[05h].
In SwivelView modes this register must be programmed greater than, or equal to the Verti-
cal Panel Size, REG[06h] and REG[05h]. See “SwivelView™” on page 77.
REG[11h] Memory Address Offset Register
Address = 1FFF1h Read/Write
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 7
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 6
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 5
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 4
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 3
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 2
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 1
Memory
Address
Offset Bit 0
REG[12h] Screen 1 Vertical Size Register (LSB)
Address = 1FFF2h Read/Write
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 7
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 6
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 5
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 4
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 3
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 2
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 1
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 0
REG[13h] Screen 1 Vertical Size Register (MSB)
Address = 1FFF3h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 9
Screen 1
Vertical Size
Bit 8
Epson Research and Development Page 65
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
Figure 8-1: Screen-Register Relationship, Split Screen
Consider an example where REG[13h], REG[12] = 0CEh for a 320x240 display system.
The upper 207 lines (CEh + 1) of the panel show an image from the Screen 1 Start Word
Address. The remaining 33 lines show an image from the Screen 2 Start Word Address.
bits 7-0 LUT Address Bits [7:0]
These 8 bits control a pointer into the Look-Up Tables (LUT). The S1D13705 has three
256-position, 4-bit wide LUTs, one for each of red, green, and blue – refer to Section 11,
“Look-Up Table Architecture” on page 71 for details.
This register selects which LUT entry is read/write accessible through the LUT Data Reg-
ister (REG[17h]). Writing the LUT Address Register automatically sets the pointer to the
Red LUT. Accesses to the LUT Data Register automatically increment the pointer.
For example, writing a value 03h into the LUT Address Register sets the pointer to R[3].
A subsequent access to the LUT Data Register accesses R[3] and moves the pointer onto
G[3]. Subsequent accesses to the LUT Data Register move the pointer onto B[3], R[4],
G[4], B[4], R[5], etc.
Note
The RGB data is inserted into the LUT after the Blue data is written, i.e. all three colors
must be written before the LUT is updated.
REG[15h] Look-Up Table Address Register
Address = 1FFF5h Read/Write
LUT Address
Bit 7 LUT Address
Bit 6 LUT Address
Bit 5 LUT Address
Bit 4 LUT Address
Bit 3 LUT Address
Bit 2 LUT Address
Bit 1 LUT Address
Bit 0
Line 0
Line 1
(REG[0Dh], REG[0Ch]) Words
Line 0 Last Pixel Address + REG[11h] Words
Line 0 Last Pixel Address=((REG[0Dh], REG[0Ch]) +
(8(REG[04h]+1) × BPP/16))
8(REG[04h]+1) Pixels
Virtual Image
REG[11h] Words
Line=(REG[13h], REG[12h])
((REG[06h], REG[05])+1) Lines
Image 1
Image 2 (REG[0Fh], REG[0Eh]) Words
Where:
(REG[0Dh], REG[0Ch]) is the Screen 1 Start Word Address
BPP is Bits-per-Pixel as set by REG[02h] bits 7:6
REG[11h] is the Address Pitch Adjustment in Words
(REG[0Fh], REG[0Eh]) is the Screen 2 Start Word Address
(REG[13h], REG[12h]) is the Screen 1 Vertical Size
(REG[06h], REG[05h]) is the Vertical Panel Size
Words
Page 66 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bits 7-4 LUT Data Bits [3:0]
This register is used to read/write the RGB Look-Up Tables. This register accesses the
entry at the pointer controlled by the Look-Up Table Address Register (REG[15h]).
Accesses to the Look-Up Table Data Register automatically increment the pointer.
Note
The RGB data is inserted into the LUT after the Blue data is written, i.e. all three colors
must be written before the LUT is updated.
bits 4-0 GPIO[4:0] Pin IO Configuration
These bits determine the direction of the GPIO[4:0] pins.
When the GPIOn Pin IO Configuration bit = 0, the corresponding GPIOn pin is configured
as an input. The input can be read at the GPIOn Status/Control Register bit. See REG[19h]
GPIO Status/Control Register.
When the GPIOn Pin IO Configuration bit = 1, the corresponding GPIOn pin is configured
as an output. The output can be controlled by writing the GPIOn Status/Control Register
bit.
Note
These bits have no effect when the GPIOn pin is configured for a specific function (i.e.
as FPDAT[11:8] for TFT/D-TFD operation).
When configured as IO, all unused pins must be tied to IO VDD.
REG[17h] Look-Up Table Data Register
Address = 1FFF7h Read/Write
LUT Data
Bit 3 LUT Data
Bit 2 LUT Data
Bit 1 LUT Data
Bit 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a
REG[18h] GPIO Configuration Control Register
Address = 1FFF8h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a GPIO4 Pin IO
Configuration GPIO3 Pin IO
Configuration GPIO2 Pin IO
Configuration GPIO1 Pin IO
Configuration GPIO0 Pin IO
Configuration
Epson Research and Development Page 67
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
bits 4-0 GPIO[4:0] Status
When the GPIOn pin is configured as an input, the corresponding GPIO Status bit is used
to read the pin input. See REG[18h] above.
When the GPIOn pin is configured as an output, the corresponding GPIO Status bit is used
to control the pin output.
bits 7-0 Scratch Pad Register
This register contains general use read/write bits. These bits have no effect on hardware.
bit 7 SwivelView Mode Enable
When this bit = 1, SwivelView Mode is enabled. When this bit = 0, Landscape Mode is
enabled.
bit 6 SwivelView Mode Select
When this bit = 0, Default SwivelView Mode is selected. When this bit = 1, Alternate
SwivelView Mode is selected. See Section 12, “SwivelView™” on page 77 for further
information on SwivelView Mode.
The following table shows the selection of SwivelView Mode.
REG[19h] GPIO Status/Control Register
Address = 1FFF9h Read/Write
n/a n/a n/a GPIO4 Pin IO
Status GPIO3 Pin IO
Status GPIO2 Pin IO
Status GPIO1 Pin IO
Status GPIO0 Pin IO
Status
REG[1Ah] Scratch Pad Register
Address = 1FFFAh Read/Write
Scratch bit 7 Scratch bit 6 Scratch bit 5 Scratch bit 4 Scratch bit 3 Scratch bit 2 Scratch bit 1 Scratch bit 0
REG[1Bh] SwivelView Mode Register
Address = 1FFFBh Read/Write
SwivelView
Mode Enable SwivelView
Mode Select n/a n/a n/a reserved
SwivelView
Mode Pixel
Clock Select
Bit 1
SwivelView
Mode Pixel
Clock Select
Bit 0
Table 8-7: Selection of SwivelView Mode
SwivelView
Mode Enable
(REG[1Bh] bit 7)
SwivelView
Mode Select
(REG[1Bh] bit 6)
Mode
0 X Landscape
1 0 Default SwivelView
1 1 Alternate SwivelView
Page 68 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
bit 2 reserved
reserved bits must be set to 0.
bits 1-0 SwivelView Mode Pixel Clock Select Bits [1:0]
These two bits select the Pixel Clock (PCLK) source in SwivelView Mode - these bits
have no effect in Landscape Mode. The following table shows the selection of PCLK and
MCLK in SwivelView Mode - see Section 12, “SwivelView™” on page 77 for details.
bits 7-0 Line Byte Count Bits [7:0]
This register is the byte count from the beginning of one line to the beginning of the next
consecutive line (commonly called “stride” by programmers). This register may be used to
create a virtual image in SwivelView mode.
When this register = 00 the “stride” = 256 bytes. This value is used for 240x320 8 bpp
default SwivelView mode
When the Line Byte Count Register = n, where 1 ≤ n ≤ FFh, the “stride” = n bytes.
REG[1Eh] and REG[1Fh]
REG[1Eh] and REG[1Fh] are reserved for factory S1D13705 testing and should not be
written. Any value written to these registers may result in damage to the S1D13705 and/or
any panel connected to the S1D13705.
Table 8-8: Selection of PCLK and MCLK in SwivelView Mode
SwivelView
Mode Enable
(REG[1Bh] bit 7)
SwivelView
Mode Select
(REG[1Bh] bit 6)
Pixel Clock (PCLK) Select
(REG[1Bh] bits [1:0] PCLK = MCLK =
Bit 1 Bit 0
0 X X X CLK See Reg[02h] bit 5
1000CLK CLK
1001CLK/2CLK/2
1010CLK/4CLK/4
1011CLK/8CLK/8
1100CLK/2CLK
1101CLK/2CLK
1110CLK/4CLK/2
1111CLK/8CLK/4
Where CLK is CLKI (REG[02h] bit 4 = 0) or CLKI/2 (REG[02h] bit 4 = 1)
REG[1Ch] Line Byte Count Register for SwivelView Mode
Address = 1FFFCh Read/Write
Line Byte
Count bit 7 Line Byte
Count bit 6 Line Byte
Count bit 5 Line Byte
Count bit 4 Line Byte
Count bit 3 Line Byte
Count bit 2 Line Byte
Count bit 1Line Byte
Count bit 0
Epson Research and Development Page 69
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
9 Frame Rate Calculation
The following formulae are used to calculate the display frame rate.
TFT/D-TFD and Passive Single-Panel modes
Where: fPCLK = PClk frequency (Hz)
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8 Pixels
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8 Pixels
VDP = Vertical Display Period = ((REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1) Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = (REG[0Ah] bits 5-0) Lines
Passive Dual-Panel mode
Where: fPCLK = PClk frequency (Hz)
HDP = Horizontal Display Period = ((REG[04h] bits 6-0) + 1) x 8 Pixels
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period = ((REG[08h] bits 4-0) + 4) x 8 Pixels
VDP = Vertical Display Period = ((REG[06h] bits 1-0, REG[05h] bits 7-0) + 1) Lines
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period = (REG[0Ah] bits 5-0) Lines
FrameRate fPCLK
HDP HNDP+()VDP VNDP+()×
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
FrameRate fPCLK
2 HDP HNDP+()×VDP
2
------------ V N D P+


×
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
Page 70 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
10 Display Data Formats
Figure 10-1: 1/2/4/8 Bit-Per-Pixel Display Data Memory Organization
1-bpp:
A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7
Host Address Display Memory
Panel Display
P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7
2-bpp:
A0B0A1B1A2B2A3B3
Host Address Display Memory
A4B4A5B5A6B6A7B7
bit 7 bit 0
bit 7 bit 0
4-bpp:
A0B0C0D0A1B1C1D1
Host Address Display Memory
A2B2C2D2A3B3C3D3
bit 7 bit 0
A4B4C4D4A5B5C5D5
Host Address Display Memory
bit 7 bit 0
8-bpp:
A0B0C0D0E0F0G0H0
A1B1C1D1E1F1G1H1
A2B2C2D2E2F2G2H2
Byte 0
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Panel Display
P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7
Panel Display
P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7
Panel Display
P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7
Pn = (An)
Pn = (An, Bn)
Pn = (An, Bn, Cn, Dn)
Pn = (An, Bn, Cn, Dn, En, Fn, Gn, Hn)
Epson Research and Development Page 71
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
11 Look-Up Table Architecture
The following figures are intended to show the display data output path only.
Note
When Video Data Invert is enabled the video data is inverted after the Look-Up Table.
11.1 Monochrome Modes
The green Look-Up Table (LUT) is used for all monochrome modes.
1 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome mode
Figure 11-1: 1 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path
2 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode
Figure 11-2: 2 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
FC
FD
FE
FF
1 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Gray Data
from Display Buffer
0
1
02
= unused Look-Up Table entries
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
FC
FD
FE
FF
00
01
2 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Gray Data
from Display Buffer
10
11
= unused Look-Up Table entries
04
Page 72 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
4 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode
Figure 11-3: 4 Bit-per-pixel Monochrome Mode Data Output Path
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
FC
FD
FE
FF
0000
0001
4 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Gray Data
from Display Buffer
0010
0011
04
05
06
07
0100
0101
0110
0111
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
= unused Look-Up Table entries
10
Epson Research and Development Page 73
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
11.2 Color Modes
1 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode
Figure 11-4: 1 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path
Red Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
FC
FD
FE
FF
1 bit-per-pixel data
from Display Buffer
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
FC
FD
FE
FF
Blue Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
FC
FD
FE
FF
0
1
0
1
0
1
4-bit Red Data
4-bit Green Data
4-bit Blue Data
= unused Look-Up Table entries
02
02
02
Page 74 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
2 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode
Figure 11-5: 2 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path
Red Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
FC
FD
FE
FF
00
01
2 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Red Data
from Display Buffer
10
11
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
00
01 4-bit Green Data
10
11
Blue Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
00
01 4-bit Blue Data
10
11
= unused Look-Up Table entries
04
04
FC
FD
FE
FF
04
FC
FD
FE
FF
Epson Research and Development Page 75
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
4 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode
Figure 11-6: 4 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path
Red Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000
0001
4 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Red Data
from Display Buffer
0010
0011
04
05
06
07
0100
0101
0110
0111
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000
0001
4-bit Green Data
0010
0011
04
05
06
07
0100
0101
0110
0111
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Blue Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000
0001
4-bit Blue Data
0010
0011
04
05
06
07
0100
0101
0110
0111
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
= unused Look-Up Table entries
10
FC
FD
FE
FF
10
FC
FD
FE
FF
10
FC
FD
FE
FF
Page 76 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
8 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode
Figure 11-7: 8 Bit-per-pixel Color Mode Data Output Path
Red Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000 0000
0000 0001
8 bit-per-pixel data
4-bit Red Data
from Display Buffer
0000 0010
0000 0011
04
05
06
07
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
1111 1000
1111 1001
1111 1010
1111 1011
1111 1100
1111 1101
1111 1110
1111 1111
Green Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000 0000
0000 0001
4-bit Green Data
0000 0010
0000 0011
04
05
06
07
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
1111 1000
1111 1001
1111 1010
1111 1011
1111 1100
1111 1101
1111 1110
1111 1111
Blue Look-Up Table 256x4
00
01
02
03
0000 0000
0000 0001
4-bit Blue Data
0000 0010
0000 0011
04
05
06
07
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
1111 1000
1111 1001
1111 1010
1111 1011
1111 1100
1111 1101
1111 1110
1111 1111
Epson Research and Development Page 77
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
12 SwivelView™
Many of todays applications use the LCD panel in a portrait orientation. In this case it
becomes necessary to “rotate” the displayed image by 90°. This rotation can be done by
software at the expense of performance or, it can be done by the S1D13705 hardware with
no CPU penalty.
There are two SwivelView modes: Default SwivelView Mode and Alternate SwivelView
Mode.
12.1 Default SwivelView Mode
Default SwivelView Mode requires the SwivelView image width be a power of two, e.g. a
240-line panel requires a minimum virtual image width of 256. This mode should be used
whenever the required virtual image can be contained within the integrated display buffer
(i.e. virtual image size ≤ 80K bytes), as it consumes less power than the Alternate
SwivelView Mode.
For example, the panel size is 320x240 and the display mode is 8 bit-per-pixel. The virtual
image size is 320x256 which can be contained within the 80K Byte display buffer.
Default SwivelView Mode also requires Memory Clock (MCLK) ≥ Pixel Clock (PCLK).
The following figure shows how the programmer sees a 240x320 image and how the image
is displayed. The application image is written to the S1D13705 in the following sense:
A–B–C–D. The display is refreshed by the S1D13705 in the following sense: B-D-A-C.
Figure 12-1: Relationship Between The Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by S1D13705 in Default Mode
256
256
image seen by programmer
= image in display buffer
320
SwivelView
window
320
240
AB
CD
D
C
B
A
240
start
address
SwivelView
window
display
E
E
image refreshed by S1D13705
start
address
physical
memory
Page 78 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
12.1.1 How to Set Up Default SwivelView Mode
The following describes the register settings needed to set up Default SwivelView Mode
for a 240x320x8 bpp image:
• Select Default SwivelView Mode: REG[1Bh] bit 7 = 1 and bit 6 = 0
• The display refresh circuitry starts at pixel “B”, therefore the Screen 1 Start Address
register must be programmed with the address of pixel “B”, i.e.
• The Line Byte Count Register for SwivelView Mode must be set to the virtual-image
width in bytes, i.e.
• Panning is achieved by changing the Screen 1 Start Address register:
• Increment the register by 1 to pan horizontally by one byte, e.g. one pixel in 8 bpp
mode
• Increment the register by twice the effective value of the Line Byte Count register to
pan vertically by two lines, e.g. add 200h to pan by two lines in the example above.
Note
Vertical panning by a single line is not supported in Default SwivelView Mode.
REG[10h], REG[0Dh], REG[0Ch] AddressOfPixelB=
AddressOfPixelA ByteOffset+()=
AddressOfPixelA 240pixels 8bpp×
8bpb
--------------------------------------------


1–+=
AddressOfPixelA EFh+=
Where bpp is bits-per-pixel and bpb is bits-per-byte.
REG 1Ch[] 256
8bpb()8bpp()÷
------------------------------------------256
1
--------- 256 00h :see REG[1Ch] for explanation====
Where bpb is bits-per-byte and bpp is bits-per-pixel.
Epson Research and Development Page 79
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
12.2 Alternate SwivelView Mode
Alternate SwivelView Mode may be used when the virtual image size of Default
SwivelView Mode cannot be contained in the 80K byte integrated frame buffer. For
example, the panel size is 480x320 and the display mode is 4 bit-per-pixel. The minimum
virtual image size for Default SwivelView Mode would be 480x512 which requires
122,880 bytes. Alternate SwivelView Mode requires a panel size of only 480x320 which
needs only 76,800 bytes.
Alternate SwivelView Mode requires the Memory Clock (MCLK) to be at least twice the
frequency of the Pixel Clock (PCLK), i.e. MCLK ≥ 2 x PCLK. This makes the power
consumption in Alternate SwivelView Mode higher than in Default SwivelView Mode
while increasing performance.
The following figure shows how the programmer sees a 480x320 image and how the image
is being displayed. The application image is written to the S1D13705 in the following
sense: A–B–C–D. The display is refreshed by the S1D13705 in the following sense: B-D-
A-C.
Figure 12-2: Relationship Between The Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by S1D13705 in Alternate Mode
image seen by programmer
= image in display buffer
480
SwivelView
window
480
320
AB
CD
D
C
B
A
320
start
address
SwivelView
window
display
image refreshed by S1D13705
start
address
physical
memory
Page 80 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
12.2.1 How to Set Up Alternate SwivelView Mode
The following describes the register settings needed to set up Alternate SwivelView Mode
for a 320x480x4 bpp image.
• Select Alternate SwivelView Mode:
REG[1Bh] bit 7 = 1 and bit 6 = 1
• The display refresh circuitry starts at pixel “B”, therefore the Screen 1 Start Address
register must be programmed with the address of pixel “B”, or
• The Line Byte Count Register for SwivelView Mode must be set to the image width in
bytes, i.e.
• Panning is achieved by changing the Screen 1 Start Address register:
• Increment the register by 1 to pan horizontally by one byte, e.g. two pixels in 4 bpp
mode
• Increment the register by the value in the Line Byte Count register to pan vertically by
one line, e.g. add A0h to pan by one line in the example above
REG[10h], REG[0Dh], REG[0Ch] AddressOfPixelB=
AddressOfPixelA ByteOffset+()=
AddressOfPixelA 320pixels 4bpp×
8bpb
--------------------------------------------


1–+=
AddressOfPixelA 9Fh+=
Where bpp is bits-per-pixel and bpb is bits-per-byte.
REG 1Ch[] 320
8bpb()4bpp()÷
------------------------------------------320
2
---------160A0h====
Where bpb is bits-per-byte and bpp is bits-per-pixel.
Epson Research and Development Page 81
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
12.3 Comparison Between Default and Alternate SwivelView Modes
12.4 SwivelView Mode Limitations
The only limitation to using SwivelView mode on the S1D13705 is that split screen
operation is not supported.
Table 12-1: Default and Alternate SwivelView Mode Comparison
Item Default SwivelView Mode Alternate SwivelView Mode
Memory Requirements
The width of the rotated image must be a power
of 2. In most cases, a virtual image is required
where the right-hand side of the virtual image is
unused and memory is wasted. For example, a
320x480x4bpp image would normally require only
76,800 bytes - possible within the 80K byte
address space, but the virtual image is
512x480x4bpp which needs 122,880 bytes - not
possible.
Does not require a virtual image.
Clock Requirements CLK need only be as fast as the required PCLK.
MCLK, and hence CLK, need to be 2x PCLK. For
example, if the panel requires a 3MHz PCLK,
then CLK must be 6MHz. Note that 25MHz is the
maximum CLK, so PCLK cannot be higher than
12.5MHz in this mode.
Power Consumption Lowest power consumption. Higher than Default Mode.
Panning Vertical panning in 2 line increments. Vertical panning in 1 line increments.
Performance Nominal performance. Higher performance than Default Mode.
Page 82 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
13 Power Save Modes
Two Power Save Modes have been incorporated into the S1D13705 to accommodate the
need for power reduction in the hand-held devices market. These modes are enabled as
follows:
13.1 Software Power Save Mode
Software Power Save Mode saves power by powering down the panel and stopping display
refresh accesses to the display buffer.
13.2 Hardware Power Save Mode
Hardware Power Save Mode saves power by powering down the panel, stopping accesses
to the display buffer and registers, and disabling the Host Bus Interface.
Table 13-1: Power Save Mode Selection
Hardware Power
Save
Software Power
Save Bit 1
Software Power
Save Bit 0 Mode
Not Configured or 0 0 0 Software Power Save Mode
Not Configured or 0 0 1 reserved
Not Configured or 0 1 0 reserved
Not Configured or 0 1 1 Normal Operation
Configured and 1 X X Hardware Power Save Mode
Table 13-2: Software Power Save Mode Summary
• Registers read/write accessible
• Memory read/write accessible
• Look-Up Table registers not accessible
• LCD outputs are forced low
Table 13-3: Hardware Power Save Mode Summary
• Host Interface not accessible
• Memory read/write not accessible
• Look-Up Table registers not accessible
• LCD outputs are forced low
Epson Research and Development Page 83
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
13.3 Power Save Mode Function Summary
Note
When FPDAT[11:8] are designated as GPIO outputs, the output state prior to enabling
the Power Save Mode is maintained. When FPDAT[11:8] are designated as GPIO in-
puts, unused inputs must be tied to either IO VDD or GND - see Table 5.5 “LCD Inter-
face Pin Mapping,” on page 23.
13.4 Panel Power Up/Down Sequence
After chip reset or when entering/exiting a power save mode, the Panel Interface signals
follow a power on/off sequence shown below. This sequence is essential to prevent damage
to the LCD panel.
Table 13-4: Power Save Mode Function Summary
Hardware
Power Save
Software
Power Save Normal
IO Access Possible? No Yes Yes
Memory Access Possible? No Yes Yes
Look-Up Table Registers Access Possible? No No Yes
Sequence Controller Running? No No Yes
Display Active? No No Yes
LCDPWR Inactive Inactive Active
FPDAT[11:0], FPSHIFT (see note) Forced Low Forced Low Active
FPLINE, FPFRAME, DRDY Forced Low Forced Low Active
Page 84 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
Figure 13-1: Panel On/Off Sequence
After chip reset, LCDPWR is inactive and the rest of the panel interface output signals are
held “low”. Software initializes the chip (i.e. programs all registers except the Look-Up
Table registers) and then programs REG[03h] bits [1:0] to 11b. This starts the power-up
sequence as shown. The power-up/power-down sequence delay is 127 frames. The Look-
Up Table registers may be programmed any time after REG[03h] bits[1:0] = 11b.
The power-up/power-down sequence also occurs when exiting/entering Software Power
Save Mode.
13.5 Turning Off BCLK Between Accesses
BCLK may be turned off (held low) between accesses if the following rules are observed:
1. BCLK must be turned off/on in a glitch free manner
2. BCLK must continue for a period equal to [8TBCLK + 12TMCLK] after the end of the
access (RDY# asserted or WAIT# deasserted).
3. BCLK must be present for at least one TBCLK before the start of an access.
RESET#
LCDPWR
Panel Interface
Output Signals
(except LCDPWR)
0 frame 127 frames 0 frame
Power Save Mode
power-down power-uppower-up
Software Power Save 00 11 00 11
Hardware Power Save
REG[03h] bits [1:0]
or
Epson Research and Development Page 85
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
13.6 Clock Requirements
The following table shows what clock is required for which function in the S1D13705
Table 13-5: S1D13705 Internal Clock Requirements
Function BCLK CLKI
Register Read/Write
Is required during register accesses. BCLK
can be shut down between accesses: allow
eight BCLK pulses plus 12 MCLK pulses
(8TBCLK + 12TMCLK) after the last access
before shutting BCLK off. Allow one BCLK
pulse after starting up BCLK before the next
access
Not Required
Memory Read/Write
Is required during memory accesses. BCLK
can be shut down between accesses: allow
eight BCLK pulses plus 12 MCLK pulses
(8TBCLK + 12TMCLK) after the last access
before shutting BCLK off. Allow one BCLK
pulse after starting up BCLK before the next
access
Required
Look-Up Table Register
Read/Write
Is required during LUT register accesses.
BCLK can be shut down between accesses:
allow eight BCLK pulses plus 12 MCLK
pulses (8TBCLK + 12TMCLK) after the last
access before shutting BCLK off. Allow one
BCLK pulse after starting up BCLK before
the next access
Not Required
Software Power Save Required Can be stopped after 128 frames from
entering Software Power Save, i.e. after
REG[03h] bits 1-0 = 11
Hardware Power Save Not Required Can be stopped after 128 frames from
entering Hardware Power Save
Page 86 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
14 Mechanical Data
Figure 14-1: Mechanical Drawing QFP14
QFP14 - 80 pin Unit: mm
120
60 41
40
21
61
80
Index
0~10°
12.0 ± 0.1
12.0 ± 0.1
14.0 ± 0.4
14.0 ± 0.4
0.5 0.18
1.4 ± 0.1
0.125
1.0
0.5 ± 0.2
0.1
- 0.05
+ 0.1
- 0.025
+ 0.05
Epson Research and Development Page 87
Vancouver Design Center
Hardware Functional Specification S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/02/01 X27A-A-001-10
15 Sales and Technical Support
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
http://www.epson.com.hk/
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
http://www.epson.com.tw/
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
http://www.epson.com.sg/
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
http://www.epson-electronics.de
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 88 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification
X27A-A-001-10 Issue Date: 02/02/01
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Programming Notes and Examples
Document Number: X27A-G-002-03
Copyright © 2001, 2002 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 Display Buffer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.2 Register Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.3 Frame Rate Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3 Memory Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 1 Bit-Per-Pixel (2 Colors/Gray Shades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 2 Bit-Per-Pixel (4 Colors/Gray Shades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3 4 Bit-Per-Pixel (16 Colors/Gray Shades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4 Eight Bit-Per-Pixel (256 Colors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 Look-Up Table (LUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 Look-Up Table Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2 Look-Up Table Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.1 Color Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.2 Gray Shade Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5 Advanced Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1 Virtual Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1.1 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.1.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.2 Panning and Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.2.1 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5.2.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.3 Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.3.1 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.3.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6 LCD Power Sequencing and Power Save Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.1 LCD Power Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.2 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3 LCD Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7 Hardware Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.1 Introduction To Hardware Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2 Default Portrait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.3 Alternate Portrait Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
7.4 Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7.5 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
8 Identifying the S1D13705 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
9 Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
9.2 Contents of the HAL_STRUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
9.3 Using the HAL library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
9.4 API for 13705HAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
9.4.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9.4.2 General HAL Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
9.4.3 Advanced HAL Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9.4.4 Register / Memory Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9.4.5 Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
9.4.6 Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
9.4.7 LUT Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.5 Porting LIBSE to a new target platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
9.5.1 Building the LIBSE library for SH3 target example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.5.2 Building the HAL library for the target example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
10 Sample Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
10.1 Sample code using the S1D13705 HAL API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
10.2 Sample code without using the S1D13705 HAL API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
10.3 Header Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
List of Tables
Table 2-1: S1D13705 Initialization Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 4-1: Recommended LUT Values for 1 Bpp Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 4-2: Example LUT Values for 2 Bpp Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 4-3: Suggested LUT Values to Simulate VGA Default 16 Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 4-4: Suggested LUT Values to Simulate VGA Default 256 Color Palette . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 4-5: Recommended LUT Values for 1 Bpp Gray Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 4-6: Suggested Values for 2 Bpp Gray Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 4-7: Suggested LUT Values for 4 Bpp Gray Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 5-1: Number of Pixels Panned Using Start Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 7-1: Default and Alternate Portrait Mode Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 9-1: HAL Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
List of Figures
Figure 3-1: Pixel Storage for 1 Bpp (2 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer . . . . .12
Figure 3-2: Pixel Storage for 2 Bpp (4 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer . . . . .13
Figure 3-3: Pixel Storage for 4 Bpp (16 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer . . . .13
Figure 3-4: Pixel Storage for 8 Bpp (256 Colors) in One Byte of Display Buffer . . . . . . . . . . .14
Figure 5-1: Viewport Inside a Virtual Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Figure 5-2: 320x240 Single Panel For Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Figure 7-1: Relationship Between the Default Mode Screen Image and the Image
Refreshed by S1D13705 38
Figure 7-2: Relationship Between the Alternate Mode Screen Image and the Image
Refreshed by S1D13705 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
1 Introduction
This guide demonstrates how to program the S1D13705 Embedded Memory Color LCD
Controller. The guide presents the basic concepts of the LCD controller and provides
methods to directly program the registers. It explains some of the advanced techniques used
and the special features of the S1D13705.
The guide also introduces the Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL), which is designed to
make programming the S1D13705 as easy as possible. Future S1D1370x products will
support the HAL allowing OEMs the ability to upgrade to future chips with relative ease.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
2 Initialization
Prior to doing anything else with the S1D13705 the controller must be initialized. Initial-
ization is the process of setting up the control registers to a known state in order to generate
proper display signals.
2.1 Display Buffer Location
Before we can perform the initialization we have to know where to find the S1D13705
display memory and control registers.
The S1D13705 contains 80 kilobytes of internal display memory. External support logic
must be employed to decode the starting address for this display memory in CPU address
space. On the S5U13705B00x PC platform evaluation boards the address is usually fixed
at F00000h. Alternatively the address can be set to D0000h.
The control registers are located by adding 1FFE0h (128 Kb less 32 bytes) to the base
memory address. Thus, on the typical PC platform, we access control register 0 at address
F1FFE0h. Control register 5 would be located at address F1FFE5, etc.
2.2 Register Values
This section describes the register settings and sequence of setting the registers. In addition
to these setting the Look-Up Table must be programmed with appropriate colors. Look-Up
Table setup is not covered here. See Section 4 on page 15 of this manual for Look-Up Table
programming details.
The following initialization, presented in table form, shows the sequences and values to set
the registers. The notes column comments the reason for the particular value being written.
This example writes to all the necessary registers. Initially, when the S1D13705 is powered
up, all registers, unless noted otherwise in the specification, are set to zero. This example
programs these registers to zero to establish a known state. In practice, it may be possible
to write to only a subset of the registers.
The example initializes a S1D13705 to control a panel with the following specifications:
• 320x240 color single passive LCD panel at 70Hz.
• Color Format 2, 8-bit data interface.
• 8 bit-per-pixel (256 colors).
• 6 MHz input clock (CLKI).
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
2.3 Frame Rate Calculation
Frame rate specifies the number of complete frame which are drawn on the display in one
second. Configuring a frame rate that is too high or too low adversely effects the quality of
the displayed image.
System configuration imposes certain non-variable limitations. For instance the width and
height of the display panel are fixed as is, typically, the input clock to the S1D13705. From
the following formula it is evident that the two variables the programmer can use to adjust
frame rate are horizontal and vertical non-display periods.
Table 2-1: S1D13705 Initialization Sequence
Register Value (hex) Notes See Also
[01] 0010 0011 (23) Select a passive, Single, Color panel with an 8-bit data width
[02] 1100 0000 (C0) Select 8-bit per pixel color depth
[03] 0000 0011 (03) Select normal power operation
[04] 0010 0111 (27) Horizontal display size = (Reg[04]+1)*8 = (39+1) * 8 = 320 pixels
[05] 1110 1111 (EF) Vertical display size = Reg[06][05] + 1
= 0000 0000 1110 1111 + 1 = 239 +1 = 240 lines
[06] 0000 0000 (00)
[07] 0000 0000 (00) FPLINE start position (only required for TFT configuration)
[08] 0000 0000 (00) Horizontal non-display period = (Reg[08] + 4) * 8
= 4 * 8 = 32 pixels Frame Rate Calculation
[09] 0000 0000 (00) FPFRAME start position (only required for TFT configuration)
[0A] 0000 0011 (03) Vertical non-display period = REG[0A] = 3 lines Frame Rate Calculation
[0B] 0000 0000 (00) MOD rate is only required by some monochrome panels
[0C] 0000 0000 (00) Screen 1 Start Address - set to 0 for initialization Split Screen on page 31
[0D] 0000 0000 (00)
[0E] 0000 0000 (00) Screen 2 Start Address - set to 0 for initialization Split Screen on page 31
[0F] 0000 0000 (00)
[10] 0000 0000 (00) Screen 1 / Screen 2 Start Address MSB - set to 0
[11] 0000 0000 (00) Memory Address offset - not virtual setup - so set to 0 Virtual Display on page 25
[12] 1111 1111 (FF) Set the vertical size to the maximum value. Split Screen on page 31
[13] 0000 0011 (03)
[15] Leave the LUT alone for now Look-Up Table (LUT) on
page 15
[17]
[18] 0000 0000 (00) GPIO control and status registers - set to “0”.
[19] 0000 0000 (00)
[1A] 0000 0000 (00) Set the scratch pad bits to “0”.
[1B] 0000 0000 (00) This is not portrait mode so set this register to “0”. Introduction To Hardware
Rotation on page 37
[1C] 0000 0000 (00) Line Byte Count is only required for portrait mode.
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
The following are the formulae for determining the frame rate of a panel. The formula for
a single passive or TFT panel is calculated as follows:
for a dual passive panel the formula is:
where: PCLK = Pixel clock (in Hz)
HDP = Horizontal Display Period (in pixels)
HNDP = Horizontal Non-Display Period (in pixels)
VDP = Vertical Display Period (in lines)
VNDP = Vertical Non-Display Period (in lines)
In addition to varying the HNDP and VNDP times we can also select divider values which
will reduce CLKi to one half, one quarter up to one eight of the CLKi value. The example
below is a portion of a ’C’ routine to calculate HNDP and VNDP from a desired frame rate.
for (int loop = 0; loop < 2; loop++)
{
for (VNDP = 2; VNDP < 0x3F; VNDP += 3)
{
// Solve for HNDP
HNDP = (PCLK / (FrameRate * (VDP + VNDP))) - HDP;
if ((HNDP >= 32) && (HNDP <= 280))
{
// Solve for VNDP.
VNDP = (PCLK / (FrameRate * (HDP + HNDP))) - VDP;
// If we have satisfied VNDP then we're done.
if ((VNDP >= 0) && (VNDP <= 0x3F))
goto DoneCalc;
}
}
// Divide ClkI and try again.
// (Reg[02] allows us to dived CLKI by 2)
PCLK /= 2;
}
// If we still can't hit the frame rate - throw an error.
if ((VNDP < 0) || (VNDP > 0x3F) || (HNDP < 32) || (HNDP > 280))
{
sprintf("ERROR: Unable to set the desired frame rate.\n");
exit(1);
}
FrameRate PCLK
HDP HNDP+()VDP VNDP+()×
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
FrameRate PCLK
2 HDP HNDP+()
VDP
2
------------ V N D P+


××
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
This routine first performs a formula rearrangement so that HNDP or VNDP can be solved.
Start with VNDP set to a small value. Loop increasing VNDP and solving the equation for
HNDP until satisfactory HNDP and VNDP values are found. If no satisfactory values are
found then divide CLKI and repeat the process. If a satisfactory frame rate still can’t be
reached - return an error.
Note
Most passive (STN) panels are tolerant of nearly any combination of HNDP and VNDP
values, however panel specifications generally specify only a few lines of vertical non-
display period. The S1D13705 is capable of generating a vertical non-display period of
up to sixty-three lines. This amount of VNDP is far too great a non-display period and
will likely degrade display quality. Similarly, setting a large HNDP value may cause a
degrade in image quality.
If possible the system should be designed such that VNDP values of 7 or less lines and
HNDP values of 20 or less characters can be selected.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
3 Memory Models
The S1D13705 is capable of operating at four different color depths. For each color depth
the data format is packed pixel. S1D13705 packed pixel modes can range from one byte
containing eight adjacent pixels (1-bpp) to one byte containing just one pixel (8-bpp).
Packed pixel data may be envisioned as a stream of pixels. In this stream, pixels are packed
in adjacent to each other. If a pixel requires four bits then it will be located in the four most
significant bits of a byte. The pixel to the immediate right on the display will occupy the
lower four bits of the same byte. The next two pixels to the immediate right are located in
the following byte, etc.
3.1 1 Bit-Per-Pixel (2 Colors/Gray Shades)
1-bit pixels support two color/gray shades. In this memory format each byte of display
buffer contains eight adjacent pixels. Setting or resetting any pixel requires reading the
entire byte, masking out appropriate bits and, if necessary, setting bits to “1”.
When using a color panel the two colors are derived by indexing into positions 0 and 1 of
the Look-Up Table. If the first two LUT elements are set to black (RGB = 0 0 0) and white
(RGB = F F F) then each “0” bit of display memory will display as a black pixel and each
“1” bit will display as a white pixel. The two LUT entries can be set to any desired colors,
for instance red and green or cyan and yellow.
For monochrome panels the two displayed gray shades are generated by indexing into the
first two elements of the green component of the Look-Up Table (LUT). Thus, by manip-
ulating the green LUT components we can set either of the two gray shades to any of sixteen
possible levels.
Figure 3-1: Pixel Storage for 1 Bpp (2 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Pixel 0Pixel 1Pixel 2Pixel 3Pixel 4Pixel 5Pixel 6Pixel 7
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
3.2 2 Bit-Per-Pixel (4 Colors/Gray Shades)
2-bit pixels support four color/gray shades. In this memory format each byte of display
buffer contains four adjacent pixels. Setting or resetting any pixel requires reading the
entire byte, masking out the appropriate bits and, if necessary, setting bits to “1”.
Color panels derive their four colors by indexing into positions 0 through 3 of the Look-Up
Table. These four LUT entries can be set to any of the 4096 possible color combinations.
Monochrome panels derive four gray shades by indexing into the first four elements of the
green component of the Look-Up Table. Any of the four LUT entries can be set to any of
the sixteen possible gray shades.
Figure 3-2: Pixel Storage for 2 Bpp (4 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer
3.3 4 Bit-Per-Pixel (16 Colors/Gray Shades)
Four bit pixels support 16 color/gray shades. In this memory format each byte of display
buffer contains two adjacent pixels. Setting or resetting any pixel requires reading the entire
byte, masking out the upper or lower nibble (4 bits) and setting the appropriate bits to “1”.
Color panels can display up to sixteen colors simultaneously. These sixteen colors are
derived by indexing into the first sixteen elements of the Look-Up Table. Each of these
colors may be selected from the 4096 possible available colors.
On a monochrome panel the gray shades are generated by indexing into the first sixteen
green components of the LUT. Each of these sixteen possible gray shades can be adjusted
to any of the sixteen possible gray shades. For instance, one could program the first eight
green LUT entries to be 0 and the second green LUT entries to be FFh. This would result
in nibble values of 0 through 7 displaying as black and nibble values 8 through 0Fh
displaying as white.
Figure 3-3: Pixel Storage for 4 Bpp (16 Colors/Gray Shades) in One Byte of Display Buffer
Bit 7Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0
Pixel 0
Bit 1 Pixel 0
Bit 0 Pixel 1
Bit 1 Pixel 1
Bit 0 Pixel 2
Bit 1 Pixel 2
Bit 0 Pixel 3
Bit 1 Pixel 3
Bit 0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Pixel 0
Bit 3 Pixel 0
Bit 2 Pixel 0
Bit 1 Pixel 0
Bit 0 Pixel 1
Bit 3 Pixel 1
Bit 2 Pixel 1
Bit 1 Pixel 1
Bit 0
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
3.4 Eight Bit-Per-Pixel (256 Colors)
In eight bit-per-pixel mode one byte of display buffer represents one pixel on the display.
At this color depth the read-modify-write cycles, required by the lessor pixel depths, are
eliminated.
When using a color panel, each byte of display memory acts as and index to one element
of the LUT. The displayed color is arrived at by taking the display memory value as an
index into the LUT.
Eight bit per pixel is not supported for monochrome display modes. The reason is that each
element of the LUT supports a 4-bit (sixteen value) level for red, green and blue. In
monochrome display modes on the green value is used to set the gray intensity. Thus we
have sixteen possible grey values but, because of the color
.
Figure 3-4: Pixel Storage for 8 Bpp (256 Colors) in One Byte of Display Buffer
Bit 7Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0
Red bit 2 Red bit 1 Red bit 0 Green bit 2 Green bit 1 Green bit 0 Blue bit 1 Blue bit 0
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
4 Look-Up Table (LUT)
This section is supplemental to the description of the Look-Up Table architecture found in
the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification. Covered here is a review of the LUT
registers, recommendations for the color and gray shade LUT values, and additional
programming considerations for the LUT. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional
Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for more detail.
The S1D13705 Look-Up Table consists of 256 indexed red/green/blue entries. Each entry
is 4 bits wide. Two registers, REG[15h] and REG[17h], control access to the LUT.
Each Look-Up Table entry consists of a red, green, and blue component. Each component
consisting of four bits, or sixteen intensity levels. Any Look-Up Table element can be
selected from a palette of 4096 (16x16x16) colors.
In color display modes, pixel values are used as an index to an RGB value stored in the
Look-Up Table. In monochrome modes, pixel values still index into the LUT, but only the
green component is used to determine display intensity.
The selected color depth determines how many index positions are used for image display.
For example at one bit-per-pixel (bpp) only index positions 0 and 1 of the Look-Up Table
are used. At 4-bpp the first 16 index positions of the Look-Up Table are used and at 8-bpp
all 256 Look-Up Table index positions are used.
The Look-Up Table mechanism itself consists of an index register and a data register. The
index, or address, register determines which element of the Look-Up Table will be
accessed. After setting the index the LUT may be read or written through the data register.
The first data element read or written is the red component of the entry. Subsequent
read/write operations access the green and then the blue elements of the Look-Up Table.
The S1D13705 LUT architecture is designed to provide a high degree of similarity in
operation to a standard VGA RAMDAC. However, there are two considerations which
must be kept in mind.
• The S1D13705 Look-Up Table has four bits (16 levels) of intensity per primary color.
The standard VGA RAMDAC has six bits (64 levels). This four to one difference must
be taken into consideration when converting from a VGA palette to a LUT palette. One
suggestion is to divide the VGA intensity level by four to arrive at the LUT intensity.
However, most applications specify the red, green and blue components as eight bit
intensities. To determine the appropriate S1D13705 Look-Up Table value we recom-
mend using the four most significant bits.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
4.1 Look-Up Table Registers
LUT Address
The LUT address register selects which of the 256 LUT entries will be accessed. After three
successive reads/writes to the data register this register is automatically incremented to
point to the next address.
LUT Data
This register is where the 4-bit red/green/blue data value is written/read. Immediately after
setting the LUT index with register [15h] this register accesses the red element of the Look-
Up Table. With each successive write/read the internal bank select is incremented. Thus the
second access is from the green element and the third is from the blue element.
After the third access the LUT Address is incremented by one, then next access to this
register will be the red element of the next Look-Up Table index.
REG[15h] Look-Up Table Address Register Read/Write
LUT Address
Bit 7 LUT Address
Bit 6 LUT Address
Bit 5 LUT Address
Bit 4 LUT Address
Bit 3 LUT Address
Bit 2 LUT Address
Bit 1 LUT Address
Bit 0
REG[17h] Look-Up Table Data Register Read/Write
LUT Data
Bit 3 LUT Data
Bit 2 LUT Data
Bit 1 LUT Data
Bit 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
4.2 Look-Up Table Organization
4.2.1 Color Modes
1 bpp color
When the S1D13705 is configured for 1 bpp color mode, the LUT is limited to selecting
colors from the first two entries. The two LUT entries can be any two RGB values but are
typically set to black-and-white.
Each byte in the display buffer contains eight adjacent pixels. If a bit has a value of “0” then
the color in LUT 0 index is displayed. A bit value of “1” results in the color in LUT 1 index
being displayed.
The following table shows the recommended values for obtaining a black-and-white mode
while in 1 bpp on a color panel.
Table 4-1: Recommended LUT Values for 1 Bpp Color Mode
Index Red Green Blue
00 00 00 00
01 F0 F0 F0
02 00 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
unused entries
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
2 bpp color
When the S1D13705 is configured for 2 bpp color mode, the displayed colors are selected
from the first four entries of the Look-Up Table. The LUT entries may be set to any of the
4096 possible colors.
Each byte in the display buffer contains four adjacent pixels. If a bit combination has a
value of “00” then the color in LUT index 0 is displayed. A bit value of “01” results in the
color in LUT index 1 being displayed. Likewise the bit combination of “10” displays from
the third LUT entry and “11” displays a color from the fourth LUT entry.
The following table shows the example values for 2 bit-per-pixel display mode.
Table 4-2: Example LUT Values for 2 Bpp Color Mode
Index Red Green Blue
00 00 00 00
01 70 70 70
02 A0 A0 A0
03 F0 F0 F0
04 00 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
indicates unused entries
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
4 bpp color
When the S1D13705 is configured for 4 bpp color mode, the displayed colors are selected
from the first sixteen entries of the Look-Up Table. The LUT entries may be set to any of
the 4096 possible colors.
Each byte in the display buffer contains two adjacent pixels. If a nibble has a value of
“0000” then the color in LUT index 0 is displayed. A nibble value of “0001” results in the
color in LUT index 1 being displayed. The pattern continues to the nibble pattern of “1111”
which results in the sixteenth color of the Look-Up Table being displayed.
The following table shows the example values for 4 bit-per-pixel display mode. These
colors simulate the colors used by the sixteen color modes of a VGA.
Table 4-3: Suggested LUT Values to Simulate VGA Default 16 Color Palette
Index Red Green Blue
00 00 00 00
01 00 00 A0
02 00 A0 00
03 00 A0 A0
04 A0 00 00
05 A0 00 A0
06 A0 A0 00
07 A0 A0 A0
08 00 00 00
09 00 00 F0
0A 00 F0 00
0B 00 F0 F0
0C F0 00 00
0D F0 00 F0
0E F0 F0 00
0F F0 F0 F0
10 00 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
indicates unused entries
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
8 bpp color
When the S1D13705 is configured for 8 bpp color mode the entire Look-Up Table is used
to display images. Each of the LUT entries may be set to any of the 4096 possible colors.
Each byte in the display buffer represents one pixels. The byte value is used directly as an
index into one of the 256 LUT entries. A display memory byte with a value of 00h will
display the color contained in the first Look-Up Table entry while a display memory byte
of FFh will display a color formed byte the two hundred and fifty sixth Look-Up Table
entry.
The following table depicts LUT values which approximate the VGA default 256 color
palette.
Table 4-4: Suggested LUT Values to Simulate VGA Default 256 Color Palette
Index R G B Index R G B Index R G B Index R G B
00 00 00 00 40 F0 70 70 80 30 30 70 C0 00 40 00
01 00 00 A0 41 F0 90 70 81 40 30 70 C1 00 40 10
02 00 A0 00 42 F0 B0 70 82 50 30 70 C2 00 40 20
03 00 A0 A0 43 F0 D0 70 83 60 30 70 C3 00 40 30
04 A0 00 00 44 F0 F0 70 84 70 30 70 C4 00 40 40
05 A0 00 A0 45 D0 F0 70 85 70 30 60 C5 00 30 40
06 A0 50 00 46 B0 F0 70 86 70 30 50 C6 00 20 40
07 A0 A0 A0 47 90 F0 70 87 70 30 40 C7 00 10 40
08 50 50 50 48 70 F0 70 88 70 30 30 C8 20 20 40
09 50 50 F0 49 70 F0 90 89 70 40 30 C9 20 20 40
0A 50 F0 50 4A 70 F0 B0 8A 70 50 30 CA 30 20 40
0B 50 F0 F0 4B 70 F0 D0 8B 70 60 30 CB 30 20 40
0C F0 50 50 4C 70 F0 F0 8C 70 70 30 CC 40 20 40
0D F0 50 F0 4D 70 D0 F0 8D 60 70 30 CD 40 20 30
0E F0 F0 50 4E 70 B0 F0 8E 50 70 30 CE 40 20 30
0F F0 F0 F0 4F 70 90 F0 8F 40 70 30 CF 40 20 20
10 00 00 00 50 B0 B0 F0 90 30 70 30 D0 40 20 20
11 10 10 10 51 C0 B0 F0 91 30 70 40 D1 40 20 20
12 20 20 20 52 D0 B0 F0 92 30 70 50 D2 40 30 20
13 20 20 20 53 E0 B0 F0 93 30 70 60 D3 40 30 20
14 30 30 30 54 F0 B0 F0 94 30 70 70 D4 40 40 20
15 40 40 40 55 F0 B0 E0 95 30 60 70 D5 30 40 20
16 50 50 50 56 F0 B0 D0 96 30 50 70 D6 30 40 20
17 60 60 60 57 F0 B0 C0 97 30 40 70 D7 20 40 20
18 70 70 70 58 F0 B0 B0 98 50 50 70 D8 20 40 20
19 80 80 80 59 F0 C0 B0 99 50 50 70 D9 20 40 20
1A 90 90 90 5A F0 D0 B0 9A 60 50 70 DA 20 40 30
1B A0 A0 A0 5B F0 E0 B0 9B 60 50 70 DB 20 40 30
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
1C B0 B0 B0 5C F0 F0 B0 9C 70 50 70 DC 20 40 40
1D C0 C0 C0 5D E0 F0 B0 9D 70 50 60 DD 20 30 40
1E E0 E0 E0 5E D0 F0 B0 9E 70 50 60 DE 20 30 40
1F F0 F0 F0 5F C0 F0 B0 9F 70 50 50 DF 20 20 40
20 00 00 F0 60 B0 F0 B0 A0 70 50 50 E0 20 20 40
21 40 00 F0 61 B0 F0 C0 A1 70 50 50 E1 30 20 40
22 70 00 F0 62 B0 F0 D0 A2 70 60 50 E2 30 20 40
23 B0 00 F0 63 B0 F0 E0 A3 70 60 50 E3 30 20 40
24 F0 00 F0 64 B0 F0 F0 A4 70 70 50 E4 40 20 40
25 F0 00 B0 65 B0 E0 F0 A5 60 70 50 E5 40 20 30
26 F0 00 70 66 B0 D0 F0 A6 60 70 50 E6 40 20 30
27 F0 00 40 67 B0 C0 F0 A7 50 70 50 E7 40 20 30
28 F0 00 00 68 00 00 70 A8 50 70 50 E8 40 20 20
29 F0 40 00 69 10 00 70 A9 50 70 50 E9 40 30 20
2A F0 70 00 6A 30 00 70 AA 50 70 60 EA 40 30 20
2B F0 B0 00 6B 50 00 70 AB 50 70 60 EB 40 30 20
2C F0 F0 00 6C 70 00 70 AC 50 70 70 EC 40 40 20
2D B0 F0 00 6D 70 00 50 AD 50 60 70 ED 30 40 20
2E 70 F0 00 6E 70 00 30 AE 50 60 70 EE 30 40 20
2F 40 F0 00 6F 70 00 10 AF 50 50 70 EF 30 40 20
30 00 F0 00 70 70 00 00 B0 00 00 40 F0 20 40 20
31 00 F0 40 71 70 10 00 B1 10 00 40 F1 20 40 30
32 00 F0 70 72 70 30 00 B2 20 00 40 F2 20 40 30
33 00 F0 B0 73 70 50 00 B3 30 00 40 F3 20 40 30
34 00 F0 F0 74 70 70 00 B4 40 00 40 F4 20 40 40
35 00 B0 F0 75 50 70 00 B5 40 00 30 F5 20 30 40
36 00 70 F0 76 30 70 00 B6 40 00 20 F6 20 30 40
37 00 40 F0 77 10 70 00 B7 40 00 10 F7 20 30 40
38 70 70 F0 78 00 70 00 B8 40 00 00 F8 00 00 00
39 90 70 F0 79 00 70 10 B9 40 10 00 F9 00 00 00
3A B0 70 F0 7A 00 70 30 BA 40 20 00 FA 00 00 00
3B D0 70 F0 7B 00 70 50 BB 40 30 00 FB 00 00 00
3C F0 70 F0 7C 00 70 70 BC 40 40 00 FC 00 00 00
3D F0 70 D0 7D 00 50 70 BD 30 40 00 FD 00 00 00
3E F0 70 B0 7E 00 30 70 BE 20 40 00 FE 00 00 00
3F F0 70 90 7F 00 10 70 BF 10 40 00 FF 00 00 00
Table 4-4: Suggested LUT Values to Simulate VGA Default 256 Color Palette (Continued)
Index R G B Index R G B Index R G B Index R G B
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
4.2.2 Gray Shade Modes
Gray shade modes are monochrome display modes. Monochrome display modes use the
Look-Up Table in a very similar fashion to the color modes. This most significant
difference is that the monochrome display modes use only the intensity of the green
element of the Look-Up Table to form the gray level.
One side effect of using only green for intensity selection is that in gray shade modes there
are only sixteen possible intensities. 8 bit-per-pixel is not supported for gray shade modes.
1 bpp gray shade
When the S1D13705 is configured for 1 bpp gray shade mode, the LUT is limited to
selecting colors from the first two green entries. The two LUT entries can be set to any of
sixteen possible intensities. Typically they would be set to 0h (black) and Fh (white).
Each byte in the display buffer contains eight adjacent pixels. If a bit has a value of “0” then
the color in the green LUT 0 index is displayed. A bit value of “1” results in the color in
green LUT 1 index being displayed.
The following table shows the recommended values 1 bpp gray shade display mode.
2 bpp gray shade
When the S1D13705 is configured for 2 bpp gray shade, the displayed colors are selected
from the first four green entries in the Look-Up Table. The remaining entries of the LUT
are unused. Each of the four entries can be set to any of the sixteen possible colors.
Each byte in the display buffer contains four adjacent pixels. If a bit combination has a
value of “00” then the intensity in the green LUT index 0 is displayed. A bit value of “01”
results in the intensity represented by the green in LUT index 1 being displayed. Likewise
the bit combination of “10” displays from the third LUT entry and “11” displays a from the
fourth LUT entry.
Table 4-5: Recommended LUT Values for 1 Bpp Gray Shade
Address Red Green Blue
00 00 00 00
01 00 F0 00
02 00 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
unused entries
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
The following table shows the example values for 2 bit-per-pixel display mode.
Table 4-6: Suggested Values for 2 Bpp Gray Shade
Index Red Green Blue
000 00 00
100 50 00
200 A0 00
300 F0 00
400 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
indicates unused entries
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
4 bpp gray shade
When the S1D13705 is configured for 4 bpp gray shade mode the displayed colors are
selected from the green values of the first sixteen entries of the Look-Up Table. Each of the
sixteen entries can be set to any of the sixteen possible intensity levels.
Each byte in the display buffer contains two adjacent pixels. If a nibble pattern is “0000”
then the green intensity of LUT index 0 is displayed. A nibble value of “0001” results in
the green intensity in LUT index 1 being displayed. The pattern continues to the nibble
pattern of “1111” which results in the sixteenth intensity of Look-Up Table being
displayed.
The following table shows the example values for 4 bit-per-pixel display mode.
Table 4-7: Suggested LUT Values for 4 Bpp Gray Shade
Index Red Green Blue
00 00 00 00
01 00 10 00
02 00 20 00
03 00 30 00
04 00 40 00
05 00 50 00
06 00 60 00
07 00 70 00
08 00 80 00
09 00 90 00
0A 00 A0 00
0B 00 B0 00
0C 00 C0 00
0D 00 D0 00
0E 00 E0 00
0F 00 F0 00
10 00 00 00
... 00 00 00
FF 00 00 00
indicates unused entries
Epson Research and Development Page 25
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
5 Advanced Techniques
This section contains programming suggestions for the following:
• virtual display
• panning and scrolling
• split screen display
5.1 Virtual Display
Virtual display refers to the situation where the image to be viewed is larger than the
physical display. The difference can be in the horizontal, vertical or both dimensions. To
view the image, the display is used as a window into the display buffer. At any given time
only a portion of the image is visible. Panning and scrolling are used to view the full image.
The Memory Address Offset register determines the number of horizontal pixels in the
virtual image. The offset register can be used to specify from 0 to 255 additional words for
each scan line. At 1 bpp, 255 words span an additional 4,080 pixels. At 8 bpp, 255 words
span an additional 510 pixels.
The maximum vertical size of the virtual image is the result of dividing 81920 bytes of
display memory by the number of bytes on each line (i.e. at 1 bpp with a 320x240 panel set
for a virtual width of 640x480 there is enough memory for 1024 lines).
Figure 5-1: “Viewport Inside a Virtual Display,” depicts a typical use of a virtual display.
The display panel is 320x240 pixels, an image of 640x480 pixels can be viewed by
navigating a 320x240 pixel viewport around the image using panning and scrolling.
Figure 5-1: Viewport Inside a Virtual Display
320x240
Viewport
640x480
“Virtual” Display
Page 26 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
5.1.1 Registers
Memory Address Offset Register
REG[11h] forms an 8-bit value called the Memory Address Offset. This offset is the
number of additional words on each line of the display. If the offset is set to zero there is
no virtual width.
Note
This value does not represent the number of words to be shown on the display. The dis-
play width is set in the Horizontal Display Width register.
5.1.2 Examples
Example 1:In this example we go through the calculations to display a 640x480 im-
age on a 320x240 panel at 2 bpp.
Step 1: Calculate the number of pixels per word for this color depth.
At 2 bpp each byte is comprised of 4 pixels, therefore each word contains 8 pixels.
pixels_per_word = 16 / bpp = 16 / 2 = 8
Step 2: Calculate the Memory Address Offset register value
We require a total of 640 pixels. The horizontal display register will account for 320 pixels,
this leaves 320 pixels for the Memory Address Offset register to account for.
offset = pixels / pixels_per_word = 320 / 8 = 40 = 28h
The Memory Address Offset register, REG[11h], will have to be set to 28h to satisfy the
above condition.
REG[11h] Memory Address Offset Register
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 7
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 6
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 5
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 4
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 3
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 2
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 1
Memory
Address
Offset
Bit 0
Epson Research and Development Page 27
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
Example 2: From the above, what is the maximum number of lines our image can
contain?
Step 1: Calculate the number of bytes on each line.
bytes_per_line = pixels_per_line / pixels_per_byte = 640 / 4 = 160
Each line of the display requires 160 bytes.
Step 2: Calculate the number of lines the S1D13705 is capable of.
total_lines = memory / bytes_per_line = 81920 / 160 = 512
We can display a maximum of 512 lines. Our example image requires 480 lines so this
example can be done.
5.2 Panning and Scrolling
Panning and scrolling describe the operation of moving a physical display viewport about
a virtual image in order to view the entire image a portion at time. For example, after setting
up the previous example (virtual display) and drawing an image into it we would only be
able to view one quarter of the image. Panning and scrolling are used to reveal the rest of
the image.
Panning describes the horizontal (side to side) motion of the viewport. When panning to the
right the image in the viewport appears to slide to the left. When panning to the left the
image to appears to slide to the right. Scrolling describes the vertical (up and down) motion
of the viewport. Scrolling down causes the image to appear to slide up and scrolling up
causes the image to appear to slide down.
Both panning and scrolling are performed by modifying the start address register. The start
address registers in the S1D13705 are a word offset to the data to be displayed in the top
left corner of a frame. Changing the start address by one means a change on the display of
the number of pixels in one word. The number of pixels in word varies according to the
color depth. At 1 bit-per-pixel a word contains sixteen pixels. At 2 bit-per-pixel there are
eight pixels, at 4 bit-per-pixel there are four pixels and at 8 bit-per-pixel there is two pixels
in each word. The number of pixels in each word represent the finest step we can pan to the
left or right.
When portrait mode (see Hardware Rotation on page 37) is enabled the start address
registers become offsets to bytes. In this mode the step rate for the start address registers if
halved making for smoother panning.
Page 28 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
5.2.1 Registers
Screen 1 Start Address Registers
These three registers form the seventeen bit screen 1 start address. Screen 1 is displayed
starting at the top left corner of the display.
In landscape mode these registers form the word offset to the first byte in display memory
to be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. Changing these registers by one will
shift the display image 2 to 16 pixels, depending on the current color depth.
In portrait mode these registers form the offset to the display memory byte where screen 1
will start displaying. Changing these registers in portrait mode will result in a shift of 1 to
8 pixels depending on the color depth.
Refer to Table 5-1: “Number of Pixels Panned Using Start Address” to see the minimum
number of pixels affected by a change of one to these registers
REG[0Ch] Screen 1 Display Start Address 0 (LSB)
Start Addr
Bit 7 Start Addr
Bit 6 Start Addr
Bit 5 Start Addr
Bit 4 Start Addr
Bit 3 Start Addr
Bit 2 Start Addr
Bit 1 Start Addr
Bit 0
REG[0Dh] Screen 1 Display Start Address 1 (MSB)
Start Addr
Bit 15 Start Addr
Bit 14 Start Addr
Bit 13 Start Addr
Bit 12 Start Addr
Bit 11 Start Addr
Bit 10 Start Addr
Bit 9 Start Addr
Bit 8
REG[10h] Screen 1 Display Start Address 2 (MSB)
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Start Addr
Bit 16
Table 5-1: Number of Pixels Panned Using Start Address
Color Depth (bpp) Pixels per Word Landscape Mode
Number of Pixels Panned Pixels Per Byte Portrait Mode
Number of Pixels Panned
116 16 8 8
28 8 4 4
44 4 2 2
82 2 1 1
Epson Research and Development Page 29
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
5.2.2 Examples
For the following examples we base our calculations on a 4 bit-per-pixel image displayed
on a 256w x 64h panel. We have set up a virtual size of 320w x 240h. Width is greater than
height so we are in landscape display mode. Refer to Section 2, “Initialization” on page 8
and Section 5.1, “Virtual Display” on page 25 for assistance with these settings.
These examples are shown using a C-like syntax.
Example 3: Panning (Right and Left)
To pan to the right increase the start address value by one. To pan to the left decrease the
start address value. Keep in mind that, with the exception of 8 bit-per-pixel portrait display
mode, the display will jump by more than one pixel as a result of changing the start address
registers.
Panning to the right.
StartWord = GetStartAddress();
StartWord ++;
SetStartAddress(StartWord);
Panning to the left.
StartWord = GetStartAddress();
StartWord --;
if (StartWord < 0)
StartWord = 0;
SetStartAddress(StartWord);
The routine GetStartAddress() is one which will read the start address registers and return
the start address as a long value. It would be written similar to:
long GetStartAddress()
{
return ((REG[10] & 1) * 65536) + (REG[0D] * 256) + (REG[0C]);
}
The routine SetStartAddress() break up its long integer argument into three register values
and store the values.
void SetStartAddress(long SA)
{
REG[0C] = SA & 0xFF;
REG[0D] = (SA >> 8) & 0xFF;
Reg[10] = (SA >> 16) & 0xFF;
}
In this example code the notation REG[] refers to whatever mechanism is employed to
read/write the registers.
Page 30 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
Example 4:Scrolling (Up and Down)
To scroll down, increase the value in the Screen 1 Display Start Address Register by the
number of words in one virtual scan line. To scroll up, decrease the value in the Screen 1
Display Start Address Register by the number of words in one virtual scan line. A virtual
scan line includes both the number of bytes required by the physical display and any extra
bytes that may be being used for creating a virtual width on the display.
The previous dimensions are still in effect for this example (i.e. 320w x 240h virtual size,
256h x 64w physical size at 4 bpp)
Step 1: Determine the number of words in one virtual scanline.
bytes_per_line = pixels_per_line / pixels_per_byte = 320 / 2 = 160
words_per_line = bytes_per_line / 2 = 160 /2 = 80
Step 2: Scroll up or down
To scroll up.
StartWord = GetStartAddress();
StartWord -= words_per_line;
if (StartWord < 0)
StartWord = 0;
SetStartAddress(StartWord);
To scroll down.
StartWord = GetStartAddress();
StartWord += words_per_line;
SetStartAddress(StartWord);
}
Epson Research and Development Page 31
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
5.3 Split Screen
Occasionally the need arises to display two different but related images. Take, for example,
a game where the main play area requires rapid updates and game status, displayed at the
bottom of the screen, requires infrequent updates.
The Split Screen feature of the S1D13705 allows a programmer to setup a display in such
a manor. When correctly configured the programmer has only to update the main area on a
regular basis. Occasionally, as the need arises, the secondary area is updated.
The figure below illustrates how a 320x240 panel may be configured to have one image
displaying from scan line 0 to scan line 199 and image 2 displaying from scan line 200 to
scan line 239. Although this example picks specific values, the split between image 1 and
image 2 may occur at any line of the display.
Figure 5-2: 320x240 Single Panel For Split Screen
In split screen operation “Image 1" is taken from the display memory location pointed to
by the Screen 1 Start Address registers and is always located at the top of the screen. “Image
2" is taken from the display memory location pointed to by the Screen 2 Start Address
registers. The line where “Image 1" end and “Image 2" begins is determined by the Screen
1 Vertical Size register.
Scan Line 0
Image 1...
Scan Line 199
Scan Line 200 Image 2...
Scan Line 239
Screen 1 Vertical Size Registers = 199 lines
Page 32 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
5.3.1 Registers
Split screen operation is performed primarily by manipulating three register sets. Screen 1
Start Address and Screen 2 Start Address determine from where in display memory the first
and second images will be taken from. The Vertical Size registers determine how many
lines Screen 1 will use. The following is a description of the registers used to do split screen.
Screen 1 Vertical Size
These two registers form a ten bit value which determines the size of screen 1. When the
vertical size is equal to or greater than the physical number of lines being displayed there
is no visible effect on the display. When the vertical size value is less than the number of
physical display lines, operation is like this:
1. From the beginning of a frame to the number of lines indicated by vertical size the dis-
play data will come from the memory area pointed to by the Screen 1 Display Start
Address.
2. After vertical size lines have been displayed the system will begin displaying data
from the memory area pointed to by Screen 2 Display Start Address.
On thing that must be pointed out here is that Screen 1 memory is always displayed at the
top of the screen followed by screen 2 memory. This relationship holds true regardless of
where in display memory Screen 1 Start Address and Screen 2 Start Address are pointing.
For instance, Screen 2 Start Address may point to offset zero of display memory while
Screen 1 Start Address points to a location several thousand bytes higher. Screen 1 will still
be shown first on the display. While not particularly useful, it is even possible to set screen
1 and screen 2 to the same address.
REG[12] Screen 1 Vertical Size (LSB)
Bit 7Bit 6Bit 5Bit 4Bit 3Bit 2Bit 1Bit 0
REG[13] Screen 1 Vertical Size (MSB)
n/an/an/an/an/an/aBit 9Bit 8
Epson Research and Development Page 33
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
Screen 2 Start Address Registers
These three registers form the seventeen bit Screen 2 Start Address. Screen 2 is always
displayed immediately following the screen 1 data and will begin at the left-most pixel on
a line. Keep in mind that if the Screen 1 Vertical Size is equal to or greater than the physical
display then Screen 2 will not be shown.
In landscape mode these registers form the word offset to the first byte in display memory
to be displayed. Changing these registers by one will shift the display image 2 to 16 pixels,
depending on the current color depth.
The S1D13705 does not support split screen operation in portrait mode. Screen 2 will never
be used if portrait mode is selected.
Refer to Table 5-1: “Number of Pixels Panned Using Start Address” to see the minimum
number of pixels affected by a change of one to these registers
Screen 1 Start Address registers, REG[0C], REG[0D] and REG[10] are discussed in
Section 5.2.1 on page 28
REG[0Eh] Screen 2 Display Start Address 0 (LSB)
Start Addr Bit
7Start Addr Bit
6Start Addr Bit
5Start Addr Bit
4Start Addr Bit
3Start Addr Bit
2Start Addr Bit
1Start Addr Bit
0
REG[0Fh] Screen 2 Display Start Address 1 (MSB)
Start Addr Bit
15 Start Addr Bit
14 Start Addr Bit
13 Start Addr Bit
12 Start Addr Bit
11 Start Addr Bit
10 Start Addr Bit
9Start Addr Bit
8
Page 34 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
5.3.2 Examples
Example 5:Display 200 scanlines of image 1 and 40 scanlines of image 2. Image 2 is
located first (offset 0) in the display buffer followed immediately by im-
age 1. Assume a 320x240 display and a color depth of 4 bpp.
1. Calculate the Screen 1Vertical Size register values.
vertical_size = 200 = C8h
Write the Vertical Size LSB, REG[12h], with C8h and Vertical Size MSB, REG[13h],
with a 00h.
2. Calculate the Screen 1 Start Word Address register values.
Screen 2 is located first in display memory, therefore we must calculate the number of
bytes taken up by the screen 2 data.
bytes_per_line = pixels_per_line / pixels_per_byte = 320 / 2 = 160
total bytes = bytes_per_line x lines = 160 x 40 = 6400.
Screen 2 requires 6400 bytes (0 to 6399) therefore the start address offset for screen 1
must be 6400 bytes. (6400 bytes = 3200 words = C80h words)
Set the Screen 1 Start Word Address MSB, REG[0Dh], to 0Ch and the Screen 1 Start
Word Address LSB, REG[0Ch], to 80h.
3. Calculate the Screen 2 Start Word Address register values.
Screen 2 display data is coming from the very beginning of the display buffer. All there is
to do here is ensure that both the LSB and MSB of the Screen 2 Start Word Address
registers are set to zero.
Epson Research and Development Page 35
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
6 LCD Power Sequencing and Power Save Modes
6.1 LCD Power Sequencing
Correct power sequencing is required to prevent long term damage to LCD panels and to
avoid unsightly “lines” during power-up and power-down. Power Sequencing allows the
LCD power supply to discharge prior to shutting down the LCD logic signals.
Proper LCD power sequencing dictates there must be a time delay between the LCD power
being disabled and the LCD signals being shut down. During power-up the LCD signals
must be active prior to or when power is applied to the LCD. The time intervals vary
depending on the power supply design.
The S1D13705 performs automatic power sequencing in response to both software power
save (REG[03h]) or in response to a hardware power save. One frame after a power save
mode is set, the S1D13705 disables LCD power, and the LCD logic signals continue for
one hundred and twenty seven frames allowing the LCD power supply to completely
discharge. For most applications the internal power sequencing is the appropriate choice.
There may be situations where the internal time delay is insufficient to discharge the LCD
power supply before the LCD signals are shut down, or the delay is too long and the
designer wishes to shorten it. This section details the sequences to manually power-up and
power-down the LCD interface.
6.2 Registers
The LCD Power (LCDPWR) Override bit forces LCD power inactive one frame after being
toggled. As long as this bit is “1” LCD power will be disabled.
The Hardware Power Save Enable bit must be set in order to activate hardware power save
through GPIO0.
The Software Power Save bits set and reset the software power save mode. These bits are
set to “11” for normal operation and set to “00” for power save mode.
LCD logic signals to the display panel are active for 128 frames after setting either
hardware or software power save modes. Power sequencing override is performed by
setting the LCDPWR Override bit some time before setting a power save mode for power
off sequences. During power on sequences the power save mode is reset some time before
the LCDPWR Override is reset resulting in the LCD logic signals being active before
power is applied to the panel.
REG[03h] Mode Register 2
LCDPWR
Override
Hardware
Power Save
Enable
Software
Power Save
bit 1
Software
Power Save
bit 0
Page 36 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
6.3 LCD Enable/Disable
The descriptions below cover manually powering the LCD panel up and down. Use the
sequences described in this section if the power supply connected to the panel requires
more than 127 frames to discharge on power-down, or if the panel requires starting the LCD
logic well in advance of enabling LCD power. Currently there are no known circumstances
where the LCD logic must be active well in advance of LCD power.
Note
If 127 frame period is to long, blank the display, then reprogram the Horizontal and Ver-
tical sizes to produce a shorter frame period before using these methods.
Power On/Enable Sequence
The following is a sequence for manually powering-up an LCD panel if LCD power had to
be applied later than LCD logic.
1. Set REG[03h] bit 3 (LCDPWR Override) to “1”. This ensures that LCD power will be
held disabled.
2. Enable LCD logic. This is done by either setting the GPIO0 pin low to disable hard-
ware power save mode and/or by setting REG[03h] bits 1-0 to “11” to disable soft-
ware power save.
3. Count “x” Vertical Non-Display Periods (OPTIONAL).
“x” corresponds the length of time LCD logic must be enabled before LCD power-up,
converted to the equivalent vertical non-display periods. For example, at 72 HZ count-
ing 36 non-display periods results in a one half second delay.
4. Set REG[03h] bit 3 to “0” to enable LCD Power.
Power Off/Disable Sequence
The following is a sequence for manually powering-down an LCD panel. These steps
would be used if the power supply discharge requirements are larger than the default 127
frames.
1. Set REG[03h] bit 3 (LCDPWR Override) to “1” which will disable LCD Power.
2. Count “x” Vertical Non-Display Periods.
“x” corresponds to the power supply discharge time converted to the equivalent verti-
cal non-display periods. (see the previous example)
3. Disable the LCD logic by setting the software power save in REG[03h] or setting
hardware power save via GPIO0. Keep in mind that after setting the power save mode
there will be 127 frames before the LCD logic signals are disabled.
Epson Research and Development Page 37
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
7 Hardware Rotation
7.1 Introduction To Hardware Rotation
Many of todays applications use the LCD panel in a portrait orientation (typically LCD
panels are landscape oriented). In this case it becomes necessary to “rotate” the displayed
image. This rotation can be done by software at the expense of performance or, as with the
S1D13705, it can be done by hardware with no performance penalty.
This discussion of display rotation is intended to augment the excellent description of the
hardware functionality found in the Hardware Functional Specification.
The S1D13705 supports two portrait modes: Default Portrait Mode and Alternate Portrait
Mode.
7.2 Default Portrait Mode
Default portrait mode was designed to reduce power consumption for portrait mode use.
The reduced power consumption comes with certain trade offs.
The most obvious difference between the two modes is that Default Portrait Mode requires
the portrait width be a power of two, e.g. a 240-line panel, used in portrait mode, requires
setting a virtual width of 256 pixels. Also default portrait mode is only capable of scrolling
the display in two line increments.
The benefits to using default portrait mode lies in the ability to use a slower input clock and
in reduced power consumption.
The following figure depicts the ways to envision memory layouts for the S1D13705 in
default portrait mode. This example uses a 320x240 panel.
Page 38 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
Figure 7-1: Relationship Between the Default Mode Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by S1D13705
From the programmers perspective the memory is laid out as shown on the left. The
programmer accesses memory exactly as for a panel of with the dimensions of 240x320
setup to have a 256 pixel horizontal stride. The programmer sees memory addresses
increasing from A->B and from B->C.
From a hardware perspective the S1D13705 always refreshes the LCD panel in the order
B->D and down to do A->C.
256
256
image seen by programmer
= image in display buffer
320
portrait
window
320
240
AB
CD
D
C
B
A
240
start
address
portrait
window
display
E
E
image refreshed by S1D13705
start
address
physical
memory
Epson Research and Development Page 39
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
7.3 Alternate Portrait Mode
Alternate portrait mode does not impose the power of two line width. To rotated the image
on 240 line panel requires a portrait stride of 240 pixels. Alternate portrait mode is capable
of scrolling by one line at a time in response to changes to the Start Address Registers.
However, to achieve the same frame rate requires a 2 x faster input clock, therefore using
more power.
The following figure depicts the ways to envision memory layouts for the S1D13705 in
alternate portrait mode. This example also uses a 320x240 panel. Notice that in alternate
portrait mode the stride may be as little as 240 pixels.
Figure 7-2: Relationship Between the Alternate Mode Screen Image and the Image Refreshed by S1D13705
From the programmers perspective the memory is laid out as shown on the left. The
programmer accesses memory exactly as for a panel of with the dimensions of 240x320.
The programmer sees memory addresses increasing from A->B and from B->C.
From a hardware perspective the S1D13705 always refreshes the LCD panel in the order
B->D and down to do A->C
The greatest factor in selecting alternate portrait mode over default portrait mode would be
for the ability to obtain an area of contiguous off screen memory. For example: A 640x480
panel in default portrait mode at two bit-per-pixel requires 81920 bytes (80 Kb). There is
unused memory but it is not contiguous. The same situation using alternate portrait mode
requires 76800 bytes leaving 5120 bytes of contiguous memory available to the application.
In fact the change in memory usage may make the difference between being able to run
certain panels in portrait mode or not being able to do so.
image seen by programmer
= image in display buffer
480
portrait
window
480
320
AB
CD
D
C
B
A
320
start
address
portrait
window
display
image refreshed by S1D13705
start
address
physical
memory
Page 40 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
7.4 Registers
This section describes the registers used to set portrait mode operation.
The Screen 1 Start Address registers must be set correctly for portrait mode. In portrait
mode the Start Address registers form a byte offset, as opposed to a word offset, into
display memory.
The initial required offset is the portrait mode stride (in bytes) less one.
The line byte count register informs the S1D13705 of the stride, in bytes, between two
consecutive lines of display in portrait mode. The Line Byte Count register only affects
portrait mode operation and are ignored when the S1D13705 is in landscape display mode.
The portrait mode register contains several items for portrait mode support.
The first is the Portrait Mode Enable bit. When this bit is “0” the S1D13705 is in landscape
mode and the remainder of the settings in this register as well as the Line Byte Count in
REG[1Ch] are ignored. Set this bit to “1” to enable portrait mode.
REG[0Ch] Screen 1 Start Word Address LSB
bit 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0
REG[0Dh] Screen 1 Start Word Address MSB
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8
REG[0Eh] Screen 1 Start Word Address MSB
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a bit 16
REG[1Ch] Line Byte Count Register
bit 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0
REG[1Bh] Portrait Mode Register
Portrait Mode
Enable Portrait Mode
Select n/a n/a n/a Portrait Mode
Memory
Clock Select
Portrait Mode
Pixel Clock
Select Bit 1
Portrait Mode
Pixel Clock
Select Bit 0
Epson Research and Development Page 41
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
The portrait mode select bit selects between the “Default Mode” and the “Alternate Mode”.
Setting this bit to “0” selects the default portrait mode while setting this bit to “1” enables
the alternate portrait mode.
Portrait Mode Memory Clock Select is another power saving measure which can be enabled
if the final MCLK value is less than or equal to 25 MHz. Memory Clock Select results in
the S1D13705 temporarily increasing the memory clock circuitry on CPU access and
resuming the slower speed when the access is complete. This results in better performance
while using the least power.
In portrait display mode the CLKI (input clock) is routed to the portrait section of the
S1D13705 as CLK. From the CLK signal the MCLK value can be determined from table
8-8 of the Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx. If
MCLK is determined to be less than or equal to 25 MHz then Portrait Mode Memory Clock
Select may be enabled.
Page 42 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
7.5 Limitations
The only limitation to using portrait mode on the S1D13705 is that split screen operation is
not supported.
A comparison of the two portrait modes is as follows:
Table 7-1: Default and Alternate Portrait Mode Comparison
Item Default Portrait Mode Alternate Portrait Mode
Memory Requirements
The width of the rotated image must be
a power of 2. In most cases, a virtual
image is required where the right-hand
side of the virtual image is unused and
memory is wasted. For example, a
320x480x4bpp image would normally
require only 76,800 bytes - possible
within the 80K byte address space, but
the virtual image is 512x480x4bpp
which needs 122,880 bytes - not
possible.
Does not require a virtual image.
Clock Requirements CLK need only be as fast as the
required PCLK.
MCLK, and hence CLK, need to be 2x
PCLK. For example, if the panel requires a
3MHz PCLK, then CLK must be 6MHz.
Note that 25MHz is the maximum CLK, so
PCLK cannot be higher than 12.5MHz in
this mode.
Power Consumption Lowest power consumption. Higher than Default Mode.
Panning Vertical panning in 2 line increments. Vertical panning in 1 line increments.
Performance
Nominal performance. Note that
performance can be increased by
increasing CLK and setting MCLK =
CLK (REG[1Bh] bit 2 = 1).
Higher performance than Default Mode.
Note that performance can be increased by
increasing CLK and setting MCLK = CLK
(REG[1Bh] bit 2 = 1).
Epson Research and Development Page 43
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
7.6 Examples
Example 6: Enable default portrait mode for a 320x240 panel at 4 bpp.
Before switching to portrait mode from landscape mode, display memory should be cleared
to make the user perceived transition smoother. Images in display memory are not rotated
automatically by hardware and a garbled image would be visible for a short period of time
if video memory is not cleared.
If alternate portrait is used then the CLK signal is divided in half to get the PCLK signal. If
the Input Clock Divide bit, in register[02] is set we can simply reset the divider. The result
of this is a PCLK of exactly the same frequency as we used for landscape mode and we can
use the current horizontal and vertical non-display periods. If the Input Clock Divide bit is
not set then we must recalculate the frame rate based on the a PCLK value. In this example
we will bypass recalculation of the horizontal and vertical non-display times (frame rate)
by selecting the default portrait mode scheme.
1. Calculate and set the Screen 1 Start Word Address register.
OffsetBytes = (Width x BitsPerPixel / 8) - 1 = (256 x 4 / 8) -1 = 127 = 007Fh
(“Width” is the width of the portrait mode display - in this case the next power of two
greater than 240 pixels or 256.)
Set Screen1 Display Start Word Address LSB (REG [0Ch]) to 7Fh and Screen1 Dis-
play Start Word Address MSB (REG[0Dh]) to 00h.
2. Calculate the Line Byte Count
The Line Byte Count also must be based on the power of two width.
LineByteCount = Width x BitsPerPixel / 8 = 256 x 4 / 8 = 128 = 80h.
Set the Line Byte Count (REG[1C]) to 80h.
3. Enable portrait mode.
This example uses the default portrait mode scheme. If we do not change the Portrait
Mode Pixel Clock Select bits then we will not have to recalculate the non-display tim-
ings to correct the frame rate.
Write 80h to the Portrait Mode Register (REG[1Bh]).
The display is now configured for portrait mode use. Offset zero into display memory will
corresponds to the upper left corner of the display. The only item to keep in mind is that the
count from the first pixel of one line to the first pixel of the next line (referred to as the
“stride”) is 128 bytes.
Page 44 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
Example 7: Enable alternate portrait mode for a 320x240 panel at 4 bpp.
Note
As we have to perform a frame rate calculation for this mode we need to know the fol-
lowing panel characteristics: 320x240 8-bit color to be run at 80 Hz with a 16 MHz in-
put clock.
As in the previous example, before switching to portrait mode, display memory should be
cleared. Images in display memory are not rotated automatically by hardware and the
garbled image would be visible for a short period of time if video memory is not cleared.
1. Calculate and set the Screen 1 Start Word Address register.
OffsetBytes = (Width x BitsPerPixel / 8) - 1 = (240 x 4 / 8) - 1 = 119 = 0077h
Set Screen1 Display Start Word Address LSB (REG [0Ch]) to 77h and Screen1 Dis-
play Start Word Address MSB (REG[0Dh]) to 00h.
2. Calculate the Line Byte Count.
LineByteCount = Width x BitsPerPixel / 8 = 240 x 4 / 8 = 120 = 78h.
Set the Line Byte Count (REG[1C]) to 78h.
3. Enable portrait mode.
This example uses the alternate portrait mode scheme. We will not change the MCLK
Autoswitch or Pixel Clock Select settings.
Write C0h to the Portrait Mode register (REG[1Bh])
4. Recalculate the frame rate dependents.
This example assumes the alternate portrait mode scheme. In this scheme, without touching
the Pixel Clock Select bits the PCLK value will be equal to CLK/2.
These examples don’t use the Pixel Clock Select bits. The ability to divide the PCLK value
down further than the default values was added to the S1D13705 to support hardware
portrait mode on very small panels.
The Pixel Clock value has changed so we must calculate horizontal and vertical non-display
times to reach the desired frame rate. Rather than perform the frame rate calculations here
I will refer the reader to the frame rate calculations in Frame Rate Calculation on page 9
and simply “arrive” at the following:
Horizontal Non-Display Period = 88h
Vertical Non-Display Period = 03h
Plugging the values into the frame rate calculations yields:
Epson Research and Development Page 45
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
For this example the Horizontal Non-Display register [REG[08h]) needs to be set to 07h
and the Vertical Non-Display register (REG[0Ah]) needs to be set to 03h.
The 16,000,000/2 in the formula above represents the input clock being divided by two
when this alternate portrait mode is selected. With the values given for this example we
must ensure the Input Clock Divide bit (REG[02h] b4) is reset (with the given values it was
likely set as a result of the frame rate calculations for landscape display mode).
No other registers need to be altered.
The display is now configured for portrait mode use. Offset zero of display memory corre-
sponds to the upper left corner of the display. Display memory is accessed exactly as it was
for landscape mode.
As this is the alternate portrait mode the power of two stride issue encountered with the
default portrait mode is no longer an issue. The stride is the same as the portrait mode width.
In this case 120 bytes.
FrameRate PCLK
HDP HNDP+()VDP VNDP+()×
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
FrameRate
16 000 000,,
2
------------------------------
320 88+()240 3+()×
------------------------------------------------------- 8 0 . 6 9==
Page 46 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
Example 8:Pan the above portrait mode image to the right by 4 pixels then scroll it
up by 6 pixels.
To pan by four pixels the start address needs to be advanced.
1. Calculate the number of bytes to change start address by.
Bytes = Pixels x BitsPerPixel / 8 = 4 x 4 / 8 = 2 bytes
2. Increment the start address registers by the just calculated value.
In this case the value write to the start address register will be 81h (7Fh + 2 = 81h)
To scroll by 4 lines we have to change the start address by the offset of four lines of display.
1. Calculate the number of bytes to change start address by.
BytesPerLine = LineByteCount = 128
Bytes = Lines x BytesPerLine = 4 x 128 = 512 = 200h
2. Increment the start address registers by the just calculated value
In this case 281h (81h + 200h) will be written to the Screen 1 Start Address register
set.
Set Screen1 Display Start Word Address LSB (REG[0Ch]) to 81h and Screen1 Dis-
play Start Word Address MSB (REG[0Dh]) to 02h.
Epson Research and Development Page 47
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
8 Identifying the S1D13705
There are several similar products in the 135X and 137X LCD controller families. Products
which can share significant portions of a generic code base. It may be important for a
program to identify between products at run time.
Identification of the S1D13705 can be performed any time after the system has been
powered up by reading REG[00h], the Revision Code register. The six most significant bits
form the product identification code and the two least significant bits form the product
revision.
From reset (power on) the steps to identifying the S1D13705 are as follows:
1. Read REG[00h]. Mask off the lower two bits, the revision code, to obtain the product
code.
2. The product code for the S1D13705 is 024h.
Page 48 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
9 Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL)
9.1 Introduction
The HAL is a processor independent programming library provided by Epson. The HAL
was developed to aid the implementation of internal test programs, and provides an easy,
consistent method of programming the S1D13705 on different processor platforms. The
HAL also allows for easier porting of programs between S1D1370X products. Integral to
the HAL is an information structure (HAL_STRUCT) that contains configuration data on
clocks, display modes, and default register values. This structure combined with the utility
13705CFG.EXE allows quick customization of a program for a new target display or
environment.
Using the HAL keeps sample code simpler, although some programmers may find the HAL
functions to be limited in their scope, and may wish to program the S1D13705 without
using the HAL.
9.2 Contents of the HAL_STRUCT
The HAL_STRUCT below is contained in the file “hal.h” and is required to use the HAL library.
typedef struct tagHalStruct
{
char szIdString[16];
WORD wDetectEndian;
WORD wSize;
BYTE Regs [MAX_REG + 1];
DWORD dwClkI; /* Input Clock Frequency (in kHz) */
DWORD dwDispMem; /* Starting address of display buffer memory */
WORD wFrameRate; /* Desired panel frame rate */
} HAL_STRUCT;
Within the Regs array ia a structure which defines all the registers described in the
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx. Using
the 13705CFG.EXE utility you can adjust the content of the registers contained in
HAL_STRUCT to allow for different LCD panel timing values and other default settings
used by the HAL. In the simplest case, the program only calls a few basic HAL functions
and the contents of the HAL_STRUCT are used to setup the S1D13705 for operation.
Epson Research and Development Page 49
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
9.3 Using the HAL library
To utilize the HAL library, the programmer must include two “.h” files in their code.
“Hal.h” contains the HAL library function prototypes and structure definitions, and
“appcfg.h” contains the instance of the HAL_STRUCT that is defined in “Hal.h” and
configured by 13705CFG.EXE. For a more thorough example of using the HAL see
Section 10.1, “Sample code using the S1D13705 HAL API” on page 66.
Note
Many of the HAL library functions have pointers as parameters. The programmer
should be aware that little validation of these pointers is performed, so it is up to the
programmer to ensure that they adhere to the interface and use valid pointers.
Programmers are recommended to use the highest warning levels of their compiler in
order to verify the parameter types.
9.4 API for 13705HAL
This section is a description of the HAL library Application Programmers Interface (API).
Updates and revisions to the HAL may include new functions not included in this documen-
tation.
Table 9-1: HAL Functions
Function Description
Initialization:
seRegisterDevice Registers the S1D13705 parameters with the HAL, calls seInitHal if necessary.
seRegisterDevice MUST be the first HAL function called by an application.
seSetInit Programs the S1D13705 for use with the default settings, calls seSetDisplayMode to do the
work, clears display memory. Note: either seSetInit or seSetDisplayMode must be called
AFTER calling seRegisterDevice
General HAL Support:
seGetId Interpret the revision code register to determine chip id
seGetHalVersion Return version information on the HAL library
seGetLastUsableByte Determine the offset of the last unreserved usable byte in the display buffer
seGetBytesPerScanline Determine the number of bytes or memory consumed per scan line in current mode
seGetScreenSize Determine the height and width of the display surface in pixels
seDelay Use the frame rate timing to delay for required seconds (requires registers to be initialized)
seSetHighPerformance Used in color modes less than 8-bpp to toggle the high performance bit on or off
Advanced HAL Functions:
seSplitInit Initialize split screen variables and setup start addresses
seSplitScreen Set the size of either the top or bottom screen
seVirtInit Initialize virtual screen mode setting x and y sizes
seVirtMove pan/scroll the virtual screen surface(s)
Hardware Rotate:
seSetHWRotate Set the hardware rotation to either Portrait or Landscape
seSetPortraitMethod Call before setting hardware portrait mode to set either Default or Alternate Portrait Mode
Page 50 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
Register / Memory Access:
seSetReg Write a Byte value to the specified S1D13705 register
seGetReg Read a Byte value from the specified S1D13705 register
seWriteDisplayBytes Write one or more bytes to the display buffer at the specified offset
seWriteDisplayWords Write one or more words to the display buffer at the specified offset
seWriteDisplayDwords Write one or more dwords to the display buffer at the specified offset
seReadDisplayByte Read a byte from the display buffer from the specified offset
seReadDisplayWord Read a word from the display buffer from the specified offset
seReadDisplayDword Read a dword from the display buffer from the specified offset
Color Manipulation:
seSetLut Write to the Look-Up Table (LUT) entries starting at index 0
seGetLut Read from the LUT starting at index 0
seSetLutEntry Write one LUT entry (red, green, blue) at the specified index
seGetLutEntry Read one LUT entry (red, green, blue) from the specified index
seSetBitsPerPixel Set the color depth
seGetBitsPerPixel Determine the current color depth
Drawing:
seSetPixel Draw a pixel at (x,y) in the specified color
seGetPixel Read pixel’s color at (x,y)
seDrawLine Draw a line from (x1,y1) to (x2,y2) in specified color
seDrawRect Draw a rectangle from (x1,y1) to (x2,y2) in specified color
Power Save:
seSetPowerSaveMode Control S1D13705 SW power save mode (enable/disable)
Table 9-1: HAL Functions (Continued)
Function Description
Epson Research and Development Page 51
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
9.4.1 Initialization
The following section describes the HAL functions dealing with S1D13705 initialization.
Typically a programmer has only to concern themselves with calls to seRegisterDevice()
and seSetInit().
int seRegisterDevice(const LPHAL_STRUC lpHalInfo)
Description: This function registers the S1D13705 device parameters with the HAL library. The
device parameters include address range, register values, desired frame rate, etc.,
and are stored in the HAL_STRUCT structure pointed to by lpHalInfo. Additionally
this routine allocates system memory as address space for accessing registers and the
display buffer.
Parameters: lpHalInfo - pointer to HAL_STRUCT information structure
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_UNKNOWN_DEVICE - the HAL was unable to find an S1D13705.
Note
seRegisterDevice() MUST be called before any other HAL functions.
No S1D13705 registers are changed by calling seRegisterDevice().
seSetInit()
Description: Configures the S1D13705 for operation. This function sets all the S1D13705 control
registers to their default values.
Initialization of the S1D13705 is a two step process to accommodate those programs
(e.g. 13705PLAY.EXE) which do not initialize the S1D13705 on start-up.
Parameters: None
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Note
After this call the Look-Up Table will be set to a default state appropriate to the display
type.
Unlike S1D1350x HAL versions, this function does not call seSetDisplayMode as this
function does not exist in the 13705 HAL.
Page 52 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
9.4.2 General HAL Support
Functions in this group do not fit into any specific category of support. They provide a
miscellaneous range of support for working with the S1D13705
int seGetId(int * pId)
Description: Reads the S1D13705 revision code register to determine the chip product and
revisions. The interpreted value is returned in pID.
Parameters: pId - pointer to an integer which will receive the controller ID.
S1D13705 values returned in pID are:
- ID_S1D13705_REV0
- ID_UNKNOWN
Other HAL libraries will return their respective controller IDs upon detection of
their controller.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_UNKNOWN_DEVICE - the HAL was unable to identify the display
controller. Returned when pID returns ID_UNKNOWN.
void seGetHalVersion(const char ** pVersion, const char ** pStatus,
const char **pStatusRevision)
Description: Retrieves the HAL library version. The return pointers are all to ASCII strings. A
typical return would be: *pVersion == “1.01” (HAL version 1.01),*pStatus == “B”
(The 'B' is the beta designator), *pStatusRevision == “5”. The programmer need
only create pointers of const char type to pass as parameters (see Example below).
Parameters: pVersion - Pointer to string to return the version in.
- must point to an allocated string of size VER_SIZE
pStatus - Pointer to a string to return the release status in.
- must point to an allocated string of size STATUS_SIZE
pStatusRevision - Pointer to return the current revision of status.
- must point to an allocated string of size STAT_REV_SIZE
Return Value: None
Example: const char *pVersion, *pStatus, *pStatusRevision;
seGetHalVersion( &pVersion, &pStatus, &pStatusRevision);
Epson Research and Development Page 53
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
int seSetBitsPerPixel(int BitsPerPixel)
Description: This routine sets the display color depth.
After performing validity checks to ensure the requested video mode can be set the
appropriate registers are changed and the Look-Up Table is set its default values
appropriate to the color depth.
This call is similar to a mode set call on a standard VGA.
Parameter: BitsPerPixel - desired color depth in bits per pixel.
- Valid arguments are: 1, 2, 4, and 8.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_FAILED- possible causes for this error include:
1) the desired frame rate may not be attainable with the specified input clock
2) the combination of width, height and color depth may require more memory than
is available on the S1D13705.
int seGetBitsPerPixel(int * pBitsPerPixel)
Description: This function reads the S1D13705 registers to determine the current color depth and
returns the result in pBitsPerPixel.
Parameters: pBitsPerPixel - pointer to an integer to receive current color depth.
- return values will be: 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
int seGetBytesPerScanline(int * pBytes)
Description: Determines the number of bytes per scan line of current display mode. It is assumed
that the registers have already been correctly initialized before seGetBytesPer-
Scanline() is called (i.e. after initializing the HAL, setting the Display mode and
adjusting the bits per pixel or other values).
The number of bytes per scanline will include non-displayed bytes if the screen
width is greater the display width, or in Default Portrait Mode.
Parameters: pBytes - pointer to an integer to receive the number of bytes per scan line
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Page 54 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
int seGetScreenSize(int * Width, int * Height)
Description: Retrieves the width and height in pixels of the display surface. The width and height
are derived by reading the horizontal and vertical size registers and calculating the
dimensions. Virtual dimensions are not taken into account for this calculation.
When the display is in portrait mode the dimensions will be swapped. (i.e. a 640x480
display in portrait mode will return a width of 480 and height of 640).
Parameters: Width - pointer to an integer to receive the display width
Height - pointer to an integer to receive the display height
Return value: ERR_OK - the operation completed successfully
int seDelay(int MilliSeconds)
Description: This function will delay for the length of time specified in “MilliSeconds” before
returning to the caller.
This function was originally intended for non-PC platforms. Information about how
to access the timers was not always available however we do know frame rate and
can use that for timing calculations.
The S1D13705 registers must be initialized for this function to work correctly. On
the PC platform this is simply a call to the C timing functions and is therefore
independent of the register settings.
Parameters: MilliSeconds- time to delay in seconds
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_FAILED- returned on non-PC platforms when the S1D13705 registers have
not bee initialized
int seGetLastUsableByte(long * plLastByte)
Description: This functions returns a pointer, as a long integer, to the last byte of usable display
memory.
The returned value never changes for the S1D13705.
Parameters: plLastByte - pointer to a long integer to receive the offset to the last byte of
display memory
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Epson Research and Development Page 55
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
int seSetHighPerformance(BOOL OnOff)
Description: This function call enables or disable the high performance bit of the S1D13705.
When high performance is enabled then MClk equals PClk for all video display
resolutions. In the high performance state CPU to video memory performance is
improved at the cost of higher power consumption.
When high performance is disabled then MClk ranges from PClk/1 at 8 bit-per-pixel
to PClk/8 at 1 bit-per-pixel. Without high performance CPU to video memory
speeds are slower and the S1D13705 uses less power.
Parameters: OnOff - a boolean value (defined in HAL.H) to indicate whether to
enable of disable high performance.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
9.4.3 Advanced HAL Functions
Advanced HAL functions include the functions to support split, virtual and rotated
displays. While the concept for using these features is advanced the HAL makes actually
using them easy.
int seSetPortraitMethod( int Style )
Description: This selects the portrait mode method to be used when seSetHWRotate() is called to
put the S1D13705 into portrait mode.
Parameters: Style - call with style set to DEFAULT (-1) to select Default Portrait Mode
- call with style set to any other value to select Alternate Portrait Mode.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_FAILED - the operation failed.
int seSetHWRotate(int Rotate)
Description: This function sets the rotation scheme according to the value of 'Rotate'. When
portrait mode is selected as the display rotation the scheme selected is the 'non-X2'
scheme.
Parameters: Rotate - the direction to rotate the display
- Valid arguments for Rotate are: LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_FAILED - the operation failed to complete.
The most likely reason for failing to set a rotate mode is an inability to set the desired
frame rate when setting portrait mode. Other factors which can cause a failure
include having a 0 Hz frame rate or specifying a value other than LANDSCAPE or
PORTRAIT for the rotation scheme.
Page 56 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
int seSplitInit(WORD Scrn1Addr, WORD Scrn2Addr)
Description: This function prepares the system for split screen operation. In order for split screen
to function the starting address in the display buffer for the upper portion(screen 1)
and the lower portion (screen 2) must be specified. Screen 1 is always displayed
above screen 2 on the display regardless of the location of their start addresses.
Parameters: Scrn1Addr - offset, in bytes, to the start of screen 1
Scrn2Addr - offset, in bytes, to the start of screen 2
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Note
It is assumed that the system has been initialized prior to calling seSplitInit().
int seSplitScreen(int Screen, int VisibleScanlines)
Description: Changes the relevant registers to adjust the split screen according to the number of
visible lines requested. 'WhichScreen' determines which screen, 1 or 2, to base the
changes on.
The smallest surface screen 1 can display is one line. This is due to the way the
S1D13705 operates. Setting Screen 1 Vertical Size to zero results in one line of
screen 1 being displayed. The remainder of the display will be screen 2 image.
Parameters: Screen - must be set to 1 or 2 (or use the constants SCREEN1 or SCREEN2)
VisibleScanlines- number of lines to display for the selected screen
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG- argument VisibleScanlines is negative or is greater than
vertical panel size or WhichScreen is not SCREEN1 or SCREEN 2.
Note
Changing the number of lines for one screen will also change the number of lines for the
other screen.
seSplitInit() must be called before calling seSplitScreen().
Epson Research and Development Page 57
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
int seVirtInit(DWORD VirtX, DWORD * VirtY)
Description: This function prepares the system for virtual screen operation. The programmer
passes the desired virtual width in pixels. When the routine returns VirtY will contain
the maximum number of line that can be displayed at the requested virtual width.
Parameter: VirtX - horizontal size of virtual display in pixels.
(Must be greater or equal to physical size of display)
VirtY - pointer to an integer to receive the maximum number of displayable
lines of 'VirtX' width.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - returned in three situations:
1) the virtual width (VirtX) is greater than the largest possible width
(VirtX varies with color depth and ranges from 4096 pixels wider
than the panel at 1 bit-per-pixel down to 512 pixels wider than the
panel at 8 bit-per-pixel)
2) the virtual width is less than the physical width or
3) the maximum number of lines becomes less than the physical
number of lines
Note
The system must have been initialized prior to calling seVirtInit()
int seVirtMove(int Screen, int x, int y)
Description: This routine pans and scrolls the display. In the case where split screen operation is
being used, the Screen argument specifies which screen to move. The x and y param-
eters specify, in pixels, the starting location in the virtual image for the top left
corner of the applicable display.
Parameter: Screen - must be set to 1 or 2, or use the constants SCREEN1 or SCREEN2,
to identify which screen to base calculations on
x - new starting X position in pixels
y - new starting Y position in pixels
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG- there are several reasons for this return value:
1) WhichScreen is not SCREEN1 or SCREEN2.
2) the y argument is greater than the last available line less the screen height.
Note
seVirtInit() must be been called before calling seVirtMove().
Page 58 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
9.4.4 Register / Memory Access
The Register/Memory Access functions provide access to the S1D13705 registers and
display buffer through the HAL.
int seGetReg(int Index, BYTE * pValue)
Description: Reads the value in the register specified by index.
Parameters: Index - register index to read
pValue - pointer to a BYTE to receive the register value.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
int seSetReg(int Index, BYTE Value)
Description: Writes value specified in Value to the register specified by Index.
Parameters: Index - register index to set
Value - value to write to the register
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
int seReadDisplayByte(DWORD Offset, BYTE *pByte)
Description: Reads a byte from the display buffer at the specified offset and returns the value in
pByte.
Parameters: Offset - offset, in bytes from start of the display buffer, to read from
pByte - pointer to a BYTE to return the value in
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr is greater 80 kb
int seReadDisplayWord(DWORD Offset, WORD *pWord)
Description: Reads a word from the display buffer at the specified offset and returns the value in
pWord.
Parameters: Offset - offset, in bytes from start of the display buffer, to read from
pWord - pointer to a WORD to return the value in
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems.
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr is greater than 80 kb.
Epson Research and Development Page 59
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
int seReadDisplayDword(DWORD Offset, DWORD *pDword)
Description: Reads a dword from the display buffer at the specified offset and returns the value
in pDword.
Parameters: Offset - offset from start of the display buffer to read from
pDword - pointer to a DWORD to return the value in
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems.
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr is greater than 80 kb.
int seWriteDisplayBytes(DWORD Offset, BYTE Value, DWORD Count)
Description: This routine writes one or more bytes to the display buffer at the offset specified by
Offset. If a count greater than one is specified all bytes will have the same value.
Parameters: Offset - offset from start of the display buffer to start writing at
Value - BYTE value to write
Count - number of bytes to write
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr or the value of Addr plus Count is
greater than 80 kb.
Note
There are slight functionality differences between the S1D1370x and the S1D1350x
HAL.
int seWriteDisplayWords(DWORD Offset, WORD Value, DWORD Count)
Description: Writes one or more WORDS to the display buffer at the offset specified by Addr. If
a count greater than one is specified all WORDS will have the same value.
Parameters: Offset - offset from start of the display buffer
Value - WORD value to write
Count - number of words to write
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr or if Addr plus Count is greater than
80 kb.
Note
There are slight functionality differences between the S1D1370x and the S1D1350x
HAL.
Page 60 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
int seWriteDisplayDwords(DWORD Offset, DWORD Value, DWORD Count)
Description: Writes one or more DWORDS to the display buffer at the offset specified by Addr.
If a count greater than one is specified all DWORDSs will have the same value.
Parameters: Offset - offset from start of the display buffer
Value - DWORD value to write
Count - number of dwords to write
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG - if the value for Addr or if Addr plus Count is greater than
80 kb.
Note
There are slight functionality differences between the S1D1370x and the S1D1350x
HAL.
9.4.5 Power Save
This section covers the HAL functions dealing with the Power Save features of the
S1D13705.
int seSetPowerSaveMode(int PwrSaveMode)
Description: This function sets on the S1D13705’s software selectable power save modes.
Parameters: PwrSaveMode - integer value specifying the desired power save mode.
Acceptable values for PwrSaveMode are:
0 - (software power save mode) in this mode registers and memory are
read/writable. LCD output is forced low.
3 - (normal operation) all outputs function normally.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Epson Research and Development Page 61
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
9.4.6 Drawing
The Drawing routines cover HAL functions that deal with displaying pixels, lines and
shapes.
int seSetPixel(long x, long y, DWORD Color)
Description: Draws a pixel at coordinates (x,y) in the requested color. This routine can be used
for any color depth.
Parameters: x - horizontal coordinate of the pixel (starting from 0)
y - vertical coordinate of the pixel (starting from 0)
Color - at 1, 2, 4, and 8 bpp Color is an index into the LUT.
At 15 and 16 bpp Color defines the color directly
(i.e. rrrrrggggggbbbbb for 16 bpp)
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems.
int seGetPixel(long x, long y, DWORD *pColor)
Description: Reads the pixel color at coordinates (x,y). This routine can be used for any color
depth.
Parameters: x - horizontal coordinate of the pixel (starting from 0)
y - vertical coordinate of the pixel (starting from 0)
pColor - at 1, 2, 4, and 8 bpp pColor points to an index into the LUT.
At 15 and 16 bpp pColor points to the color directly
(i.e. rrrrrggggggbbbbb for 16 bpp)
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems.
int seDrawLine(int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, DWORD Color)
Description: This routine draws a line on the display from the endpoints defined by x1,y1 to the
endpoint x2,y2 in the requested 'Color'.
Currently seDrawLine() only draws horizontal and vertical lines.
Parameters: (x1, y1) - first endpoint of the line in pixels
(x2, y2) - second endpoint of the line in pixels (see note below)
Color - color to draw with. 'Color' is an index into the LUT.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Note
Functionality differs from the 135x HAL.
Page 62 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
int seDrawRect(long x1, long y1, long x2, long y2, DWORD Color,
BOOL SolidFill)
Description: This routine draws and optionally fills a rectangular area of display buffer. The
upper right corner is defined by x1,y1 and the lower right corner is defined by x2,y2.
The color, defined by Color, applies both to the border and to the optional fill.
Parameters: x1, y1 - top left corner of the rectangle (in pixels)
x2, y2 - bottom right corner of the rectangle (in pixels)
Color - The color to draw the rectangle outline and fill with
- Color is an index into the Look-Up Table.
SolidFill - Flag whether to fill the rectangle or simply draw the border.
- Set to 0 for no fill, set to non-0 to fill the inside of the rectangle
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems.
9.4.7 LUT Manipulation
These functions deal with altering the color values in the Look-Up Table.
int seSetLut(BYTE *pLut, int Count)
Description: This routine writes one or more LUT entries. The writes always start with Look-Up
Table index 0 and continue for 'Count' entries.
A Look-Up Table entry consists of three bytes, one each for Red, Green, and Blue.
The color information is stored in the four most significant bits of each byte.
Parameters: pLut - pointer to an array of BYTE lut[16][3]
lut[x][0] == RED component
lut[x][1] == GREEN component
lut[x][2] == BLUE component
Count - the number of LUT entries to write.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
int seGetLut(BYTE *pLUT, int Count)
Description: This routine reads one or more LUT entries and puts the result in the byte array
pointed to by pLUT.
A Look-Up Table entry consists of three bytes, one each for Red, Green, and Blue.
The color information is stored in the four most significant bits of each byte.
Parameters: pLUT - pointer to an array of BYTE lut[16][3]
- pLUT must point to enough memory to hold 'Count' x 3 bytes of data.
Count - the number of LUT elements to read.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Epson Research and Development Page 63
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
int seSetLutEntry(int Index, BYTE *pEntry)
Description: This routine writes one LUT entry. Unlike seSetLut, the LUT entry indicated by
'Index' can be any value from 0 to 255.
A Look-Up Table entry consists of three bytes, one each for Red, Green, and Blue. The color infor-
mation is stored in the four most significant bits of each byte.
Parameters: Index - index to LUT entry (0 to 255)
pLUT - pointer to an array of three bytes.
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
int seGetLutEntry(int index, BYTE *pEntry)
Description: This routine reads one LUT entry from any index.
A Look-Up Table entry consists of three bytes, one each for Red, Green, and Blue.
The color information is stored in the four most significant bits of each byte.
Parameters: Index - index to LUT entry (0 to 255)
pEntry - pointer to an array of three bytes
Return Value: ERR_OK - operation completed with no problems
Page 64 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
9.5 Porting LIBSE to a new target platform
Building Epson Research and Development applications like a simple HelloApp for a new
target platform requires 3 things, the HelloApp code, the 13705HAL library, and a some
standard C functions (portable ones are encapsulated in our mini C library LIBSE).
Components needed to build 13705 HAL application
For example, when building HELLOAPP.EXE for the Intel 16-bit platform, you need the
HELLOAPP source files, the 13705HAL library and its include files, and some Standard C
library functions (which in this case would be supplied by the compiler as part of its run-
time library). As this is a DOS .EXE application, you do not need to supply start-up code
that sets up the chip selects or interrupts, etc... What if you wanted to build the application
for an SH-3 target, one not running DOS?
Before you can build that application to load onto the target, you need to build a C library
for the target that contains enough of the Standard C functions (like sprintf and strcpy) to
let you build the application. Epson Research and Development supplies the LIBSE for this
purpose, but your compiler may come with one included. You also need to build the
13705HAL library for the target. This library is the graphics chip dependent portion of the
code. Finally, you need to build the final application, linked together with the libraries
described earlier. The following examples assume that you have a copy of the complete
source code for the S1D13705 utilities, including the nmake makefiles, as well as a copy of
the GNU Compiler v2.7-96q3a for Hitachi SH3. These are available on the World Wide
Web at http://www.erd.epson.com.
HelloApp Source code
13705HAL Library
HelloApp C Library Functions (LIBSE for embedded platforms)
Epson Research and Development Page 65
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
9.5.1 Building the LIBSE library for SH3 target example
In the LIBSE files, there are three main types of files:
• C files that contain the library functions.
• assembler files that contain the target specific code.
• makefiles that describe the build process to construct the library.
The C files are generic to all platforms, although there are some customizations for targets
in the form of #ifdef LCEVBSH3 code (the ifdef used for the example SH3 target Low Cost
Eval Board SH3). The majority of this code remains constant whichever target you build
for.
The assembler files contain some platform setup code (stacks, chip selects) and jumps into
the main entry point of the C code that is contained in the C file entry.c. For our example,
the assembler file is STARTSH3.S and it performs only some stack setup and a jump into
the code at _mainEntry (entry.c).
In the embedded targets, printf (in file rprintf.c), putchar (putchar.c) and getch (kb.c)
resolve to serial character input/output. For SH3, much of the detail of handling serial IO
is hidden in the monitor of the evaluation board, but in general the primitives are fairly
straight forward, providing the ability to get characters to/from the serial port.
For our target example, the nmake makefile is makesh3.mk. This makefile calls the Gnu
compiler at a specific location (TOOLDIR), enumerates the list of files that go into the
target and builds a .a library file as the output of the build process.
With nmake.exe in your path run:
nmake -fmakesh3.mk
9.5.2 Building the HAL library for the target example
Building the HAL for the target example is less complex because the code is written in C
and requires little platform specific adjustment. The nmake makefile for our example is
makesh3.mk.This makefile contains the rules for building sh3 objects, the files list for the
library and the library creation rules. The Gnu compiler tools are pointed to by TOOLDIR.
With nmake in your path run:
nmake -fmakesh3.mk
Page 66 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
10 Sample Code
Included in the sample code section are two examples of programing the S1D13705. The
first sample uses the HAL to draw a red square, wait for user input then rotates to portrait
mode and draws a blue square. The second sample code performs the same procedures but
directly accesses the registers of the S1D13705. These code samples are for example
purposes only.
10.1 Sample code using the S1D13705 HAL API
/*
**===========================================================================
** SAMPLE1.C - Sample code demonstrating a program using the S1D13705 HAL.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Created 1998, Vancouver Design Centre
** Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Epson Research and Development, Inc.
** All Rights Reserved.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** The HAL API code is configured for the following:
**
** 320x240 Single Color 4-bit STN
** 8 bpp - 70 Hz Frame Rate (6 MHz CLKi)
** High Performance enabled
**
**===========================================================================
*/
#include <conio.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include "hal.h" /* Structures, constants and prototypes. */
#include "appcfg.h" /* HAL configuration information. */
/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
void main(void)
{
int ChipId;
/*
** Initialize the HAL.
** The call to seRegisterDevice() actually prepares the HAL library
** for use. The S1D13705 is not accessed, except to read the revision
** code register.
*/
if (ERR_OK != seRegisterDevice(&HalInfo))
{
printf("\nERROR: Could not register S1D13705 device.");
exit(1);
}
Epson Research and Development Page 67
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
/*
** Get the product code to verify this is an S1D13705.
*/
seGetId(&ChipId);
if (ID_S1D13705_Rev1 != ChipId)
{
printf("\nERROR: Did not detect an S1D13705.");
exit(1);
}
/*
** Initialize the S1D13705.
** This step programs the registers with values taken from
** the HalInfo struct in appcfg.h.
*/
if (ERR_OK != seSetInit())
{
printf("\nERROR: Could not initialize device.");
exit(1);
}
/*
** The default initialization cleared the display.
** Draw a 100x100 red (color 1) rectangle in the upper
** left corner (0,0) of the display.
*/
seDrawRect(0, 0, 100, 100, 1, TRUE);
/*
** Pause here.
*/
getch();
/*
** Clear the display. Do this by writing 81920 bytes
*/
seWriteDisplayBytes(0, 0, EIGHTY_K);
/*
** Setup portrait mode.
*/
seSetHWRotate(PORTRAIT);
/*
** Draw a solid blue 100x100 rectangle in center of the display.
** This starting co-ordinates, assuming a 320x240 display is
** (320-100)/2 , (240-100)/2 = 110,70.
*/
seDrawRect(110, 70, 210, 170, 2, TRUE);
/*
** Done!
*/
exit(0);
}
Page 68 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
10.2 Sample code without using the S1D13705 HAL API
This second sample demonstrates exactly the same sequence as the first however the HAL
is not used, all manipulation is done by directly accessing the registers.
/*
**===========================================================================
** SAMPLE2.C - Sample code demonstrating a direct access of the S1D13705.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Created 1998, Vancouver Design Centre
** Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Epson Research and Development, Inc.
** All Rights Reserved.
**-------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** The sample code using direct S1D13705 access
** will configure for the following:
**
** 320x240 Single Color 4-bit STN
** 8 bpp color depth - 70 Hz Frame Rate (6 MHz CLKi)
**
** Notes:
** 1) This code is written to be compiled for use under 32-bit
** Windows. In order to function the vxd file S1D13X0X.VXD must
** be in the \WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory.
** 2) Register setup is done with discreet writes rather than being table
** driven. This allows for clear commenting. It is more efficient to
** loop through the array writing each element to a control register.
** 3) The array of register values as produced by 13705CFG.EXE is included
** here. I write the registers directly rather than refer to the register
** array in the sample code.
**
**===========================================================================
*/
#include <conio.h>
#include <windows.h>
#include <winioctl.h>
#include "ioctl.h"
/*
** Look-Up Table - 16 of 256 elements.
** For this sample only the first sixteen LUT elements are set.
*/
unsigned char LUT[16*3] =
{
0x00, 0x00, 0x00,/* BLACK */
0x00, 0x00, 0xA0,/* BLUE */
0x00, 0xA0, 0x00,/* GREEN */
0x00, 0xA0, 0xA0,/* CYAN */
0xA0, 0x00, 0x00,/* RED */
0xA0, 0x00, 0xA0,/* PURPLE */
Epson Research and Development Page 69
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
0xA0, 0xA0, 0x00,/* YELLOW */
0xA0, 0xA0, 0xA0,/* WHITE */
0x00, 0x00, 0x00,/* BLACK */
0x00, 0x00, 0xF0,/* LT BLUE */
0x00, 0xF0, 0x00,/* LT GREEN */
0x00, 0xF0, 0xF0,/* LT CYAN */
0xF0, 0x00, 0x00,/* LT RED */
0xF0, 0x00, 0xF0,/* LT PURPLE */
0xF0, 0xF0, 0x00,/* LT YELLOW */
0xF0, 0xF0, 0xF0/* LT WHITE */
};
/*
** Register data.
** These values were generated using 13705CFG.EXE.
** The sample code uses these values but does not refer to this array.
** In a typical application these values would be written to the registers
** using a loop.
*/
unsigned char Reg[0x20] =
{
0x00, 0x23, 0xC0, 0x03, 0x27, 0xEF, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0xFF, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00
};
#define MEM_SIZE 0x14000 /* 80 kb display buffer. */
typedef unsigned short WORD;/* Some useful types */
typedef unsigned long DWORD;
typedef unsigned char BYTE;
typedef BYTE * PBYTE;
#define LOBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(w))
#define HIBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(((WORD)(w) >> 8) & 0xFF))
#define SET_REG(idx, val) (*(pRegs + idx)) = (val)
/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
void main(void)
{
PBYTE p13705;
PBYTE pRegs;
PBYTE pMem;
PBYTE pLUT;
int x, y, tmp;
int BitsPerPixel = 8;
int Width = 320;
int Height = 240;
int OffsetBytes;
int rc;
/*
** Get a linear address we can use in our code to access the S1D13705.
** This is only needed to access the S1D13705 on the ISA eval board.
Page 70 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
*/
DWORD dwLinearAddress;
rc = IntelGetLinAddressW32(0xF00000, &dwLinearAddress);
if (rc != 0)
{
printf("Error getting linear address");
return;
}
p13705 = (PBYTE)dwLinearAddress;
pRegs = p13705 + 0x1FFE0;
/*
** Check the revision code. Exit if we don't find an S1D13705.
*/
if (0x24 != *pRegs)
{
printf("Didn't find an S1D13705");
return;
}
/*
** Initialize the chip - after initialization the display will be
** setup for landscape use.
** Normally a loop would be used to write the register array near
** the top of this file to the registers.
** For purposes of documenting the sample code, each register write
** is performed individually.
*/
/*
** Register 01h: Mode Register 0 - Color, 8-bit format 2
*/
SET_REG(0x01, 0x20);
/*
** Register 02h: Mode Register 1 - 8BPP
*/
SET_REG(0x02, 0xC0);
/*
** Register 03h: Mode Register 2 - Normal power mode
*/
SET_REG(0x03, 0x03);
/*
** Register 04h: Horizontal Panel Size - 320 pixels - (320/8)-1 = 39 = 27h
*/
SET_REG(0x04, 0x27);
/*
** Register 05h: Vertical Panel Size LSB - 240 pixels
** Register 06h: Vertical Panel Size MSB - (240 - 1) = 239 = EFh
*/
SET_REG(0x05, 0xEF);
SET_REG(0x06, 0x00);
/*
Epson Research and Development Page 71
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
** Register 07h - FPLINE Start Position - not used by STN
*/
SET_REG(0x07, 0x00);
/*
** Register 08h - Horizontal Non-Display Period = (Reg[08] + 4) * 8
** = (0+4) * 8 = 32 pels
** - HNDP and VNDP are calculated to achieve the
** desired frame rate according to:
**
** PCLK
** Frame Rate = ---------------------------
** (HDP + HNDP) * (VDP + VNDP)
*/
SET_REG(0x08, 0x00);
/*
** Register 09h - FPFRAME Start Position - not used by STN
*/
SET_REG(0x09, 0x00);
/*
** Register 0Ah - Vertical Non-Display Register = 3 lines
** - Calculated in conjunction with register 08h (HNDP) to
** achieve the desired frame rate.
*/
SET_REG(0x0A, 0x03);
/*
** Register 0Bh - MOD Rate - not used by this panel
*/
SET_REG(0x0B, 0x00);
/*
** Register 0Ch - Screen 1 Start Word Address LSB
** Register 0Dh - Screen 1 Start Word Address MSB
** - Start address should be set to 0
*/
SET_REG(0x0C, 0x00);
SET_REG(0x0D, 0x00);
/*
** Register 0Eh - Screen 2 Start Word Address LSB
** Register 0Fh - Screen 2 Start Word Address MSB
** - Set this start address to 0 too
*/
SET_REG(0x0E, 0x00);
SET_REG(0x0F, 0x00);
SET_REG(0x10, 0x00); /* Screen1/Screen2 Start Address High bits. */
/*
** Register 11h - Memory Address Offset
** - Used for setting memory to a width greater than the
** display size. Usually set to 0 during initialization
** and programmed to desired value later.
*/
Page 72 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
SET_REG(0x11, 0x00);
/*
** Register 12h - Screen 1 Vertical Size LSB
** Register 13h - Screen 1 Vertical Size MSB
** - Set to maximum (i.e. 0x3FF). This register is used
** for split screen operation. Normally it is set to
** maximum value.
*/
SET_REG(0x12, 0xFF);
SET_REG(0x13, 0x03);
/*
** Look-Up Table registers
** The LUT is programmed at the end of the initialization sequence.
*/
/*
** Register 18h - GPIO Configuration - set to 0
** - '0' configures the GPIO pins for input (power on default)
*/
SET_REG(0x18, 0x00);
/*
** Register 19h - GPIO Status - set to 0
** - This step has no real purpose. It sets the GPIO
** pins low should GPIO be set as outputs.
*/
SET_REG(0x19, 0x00);
/*
** Register 1Ah - Scratch Pad - set to 0
** - Use this register to store whatever state data your
** system may require.
*/
SET_REG(0x1A, 0x00);
/*
** Register 1Bh - Portrait Mode - set to 0 - disable portrait mode
*/
SET_REG(0x1B, 0x00);
/*
** Register 1Ch - Line Byte Count - set to 0 - used only by portrait mode.
*/
SET_REG(0x0C, 0x00);
/*
** Look-Up Table
** In this example we only set the first sixteen LUT entries.
** In typical use all 256 entries would be setup.
*/
/*
** Register 15h - Look-Up Table Address
** - Set to 0 to start RGB sequencing at the first LUT entry.
*/
SET_REG(0x15, 0x00);
Epson Research and Development Page 73
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
/*
** Register 17h - Look-Up Table Data
** - Write 16 RGB triplets to the LUT.
*/
pLUT = LUT;
for (tmp = 0; tmp < 16; tmp++)
{
SET_REG(0x17, *pLUT);// Set Red
pLUT++;
SET_REG(0x17, *pLUT);// Set Green
pLUT++;
SET_REG(0x17, *pLUT);// Set Blue
pLUT++;
}
/*
** Clear all of video memory by writing 81920 bytes of 0.
*/
pMem = p13705;
for (tmp = 0; tmp < MEM_SIZE; tmp++)
{
*pMem = 0;
pMem++;
};
/*
** Draw a 100x100 red rectangle in the upper left corner (0,0)
** of the display.
*/
for (y = 0; y < 100; y++)
{
/*
** Set the memory pointer at the start of each line.
** Pointer = MEM_OFFSET + (Y * Line_Width * BPP / 8) + (X * BPP / 8)
*/
pMem = p13705 + (y * 320 * BitsPerPixel / 8) + 0;
for (x = 0; x < 100; x++)
{
*pMem = 0x4;/* Draw a pixel with LUT color 4 */
pMem++;
}
}
/*
** Wait for the user to press a key before continuing.
*/
printf("Press any key to continue");
getch();
/*
** Set and use PORTRAIT mode.
*/
/*
Page 74 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
** Clear the display, and all of video memory, by writing 81920 bytes
** of 0. This is done because an image in display memory is not rotated
** when the switch to portrait display mode occurs.
*/
pMem = p13705;
for (tmp = 0; tmp < MEM_SIZE; tmp++)
{
*pMem = 0;
pMem++;
};
/*
** We will use the default portrait mode scheme so we have to adjust
** the ROTATED width to be a power of 2.
** (NOTE: current height will become the rotated width)
*/
tmp = 1;
while (Height > (1 << tmp))
tmp++;
Height = (1 << tmp);
OffsetBytes = Height * BitsPerPixel / 8;
/*
** Set:
** 1) Line Byte Count to size of the ROTATED width (i.e. current height)
** 2) Start Address to the offset of the width of the ROTATED display.
** (in portrait mode the start address registers point to bytes)
*/
SET_REG(0x1C, (BYTE)OffsetBytes);
OffsetBytes--;
SET_REG(0x0C, LOBYTE(OffsetBytes));
SET_REG(0x0D, HIBYTE(OffsetBytes));
/*
** Set Portrait mode.
** Use the non-X2 (default) scheme so we don't have to re-calc the frame
** rate. MCLK will be <= 25 MHz so we can leave auto-switch enabled.
*/
SET_REG(0x1B, 0x80);
/*
** Draw a solid blue 100x100 rectangle centered on the display.
** Starting co-ordinates, assuming a 320x240 display are:
** (320-100)/2 , (240-100)/2 = 110,70.
*/
for (y = 70; y < 180; y++)
{
/*
** Set the memory pointer at the start of each line.
** Pointer = MEM_OFFSET + (Y * Line_Width * BPP / 8) + (X * BPP / 8)
** NOTICE: as this is default portrait mode, the width is a power
** of two. In this case, we use a value of 256 pixels for
** our calculations instead of the panel dimension of 240.
Epson Research and Development Page 75
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
*/
x = 110;
pMem = p13705 + (y * 256 * BitsPerPixel / 8) + (x * BitsPerPixel / 8);
for (x = 110; x < 210; x++)
{
*pMem = 0x01; /* Draw a pixel in LUT color 1 */
pMem++;
}
}
}
/*
**===========================================================================
**
** IntelGetLinAddressW32(DWORD physaddr,DWORD *linaddr)
**
** return value:
**
** 0 : No error
** -1 : Error
*/
int IntelGetLinAddressW32(DWORD physaddr, DWORD *linaddr)
{
HANDLE hDriver;
DWORD cbReturned;
int rc, retVal;
unsigned Arr[2];
// First see if we are running under WinNT
DWORD dwVersion = GetVersion();
if (dwVersion < 0x80000000)
{
hDriver = CreateFile("\\\\.\\S1D13x0x", GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE,
0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING,FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL,
NULL);
}
else // Win95/98
{
// Dynamically load and prepare to call S1D13x0x.
// The FILE_FLAG_DELETE_ON_CLOSE flag is used so that CloseHandle can
// be used to dynamically unload the VxD.
// The CREATE_NEW flag is not necessary
hDriver = CreateFile("\\\\.\\S1D13x0x.VXD", 0,0,0,
CREATE_NEW, FILE_FLAG_DELETE_ON_CLOSE, 0);
}
if (hDriver == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
return -1;
/*
** From now on, the code is common for Win95 & WinNT
*/
if (physaddr == 0)
Page 76 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
return -1;
Arr[0] = physaddr;
Arr[1] = 4 * 1024 * 1024;
rc = DeviceIoControl(hDriver, IOCTL_SED_MAP_PHYSICAL_MEMORY,
&Arr[0], 2 * sizeof(ULONG), &retVal, sizeof(ULONG),
&cbReturned, NULL);
if (rc)
*linaddr = retVal;
/*
** Close the handle.
** This will dynamically UNLOAD the Virtual Device for Win95.
*/
CloseHandle(hDriver);
if (rc)
return 0;
return -1;
}
Epson Research and Development Page 77
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
10.3 Header Files
The header files included here are the required for the HAL sample to compile correctly.
/*
**===========================================================================
** HAL.H - Header file for use with programs written to use the S1D13705 HAL.
**---------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Created 1998, Vancouver Design Centre
** Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Epson Research and Development, Inc.
** All Rights Reserved.
**===========================================================================
*/
#ifndef _HAL_H_
#define _HAL_H_
#include "hal_regs.h"
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
typedef unsigned char BYTE;
typedef unsigned short WORD;
typedef unsigned long DWORD;
typedef unsigned int UINT;
typedef int BOOL;
#ifdef INTEL
typedef BYTE far *LPBYTE;
typedef WORD far *LPWORD;
typedef UINT far *LPUINT;
typedef DWORD far *LPDWORD;
#else
typedef BYTE *LPBYTE;
typedef WORD *LPWORD;
typedef UINT *LPUINT;
typedef DWORD *LPDWORD;
#endif
#ifndef LOBYTE
#define LOBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(w))
#endif
#ifndef HIBYTE
#define HIBYTE(w) ((BYTE)(((UINT)(w) >> 8) & 0xFF))
#endif
#ifndef LOWORD
#define LOWORD(l) ((WORD)(DWORD)(l))
#endif
#ifndef HIWORD
#define HIWORD(l) ((WORD)((((DWORD)(l)) >> 16) & 0xFFFF))
#endif
#ifndef MAKEWORD
#define MAKEWORD(lo, hi) ((WORD)(((WORD)(lo)) | (((WORD)(hi)) << 8)) )
#endif
#ifndef MAKELONG
Page 78 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
#define MAKELONG(lo, hi) ((long)(((WORD)(lo)) | (((DWORD)((WORD)(hi))) << 16)))
#endif
#ifndef TRUE
#define TRUE 1
#endif
#ifndef FALSE
#define FALSE 0
#endif
#define OFF 0
#define ON 1
#define SCREEN1 1
#define SCREEN22
/*
** Constants for HW rotate support
*/
#define DEFAULT0
#define LANDSCAPE 1
#define PORTRAIT2
#ifndef NULL
#ifdef __cplusplus
#define NULL 0
#else
#define NULL ((void *)0)
#endif
#endif
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
/*
** SIZE_VERSION is the size of the version string (eg. "1.00")
** SIZE_STATUS is the size of the status string (eg. "b" for beta)
** SIZE_REVISION is the size of the status revision string (eg. "00")
*/
#define SIZE_VERSION5
#define SIZE_STATUS 2
#define SIZE_REVISION3
#ifdef ENABLE_DPF /* Debug_printf() */
#define DPF(exp) printf(#exp "\n")
#define DPF1(exp) printf(#exp " = %d\n", exp)
#define DPF2(exp1, exp2) printf(#exp1 "=%d " #exp2 "=%d\n", exp1, exp2)
#define DPFL(exp) printf(#exp " = %x\n", exp)
#else
#define DPF(exp) ((void)0)
#define DPF1(exp) ((void)0)
#define DPFL(exp) ((void)0)
#endif
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
enum
{
ERR_OK = 0, /* No error, call was successful.
*/
Epson Research and Development Page 79
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
ERR_FAILED, /* General purpose failure.
*/
ERR_UNKNOWN_DEVICE, /* */
ERR_INVALID_PARAMETER,/* Function was called with invalid parameter. */
ERR_HAL_BAD_ARG,
ERR_TOOMANY_DEVS
};
/*******************************************
* Definitions for seGetId()
*******************************************/
#define PRODUCT_ID 0x24
enum
{
ID_UNKNOWN,
ID_S1D13705_Rev1
};
#define MAX_MEM_ADDR81920 - 1
#define EIGHTY_K81920
#define MAX_DEVICE 10
#define SE_RSVD 0
/*******************************************
* Definitions for Internal calculations.
*******************************************/
#define MIN_NON_DISP_X 32
#define MAX_NON_DISP_X 256
#define MIN_NON_DISP_Y 2
#define MAX_NON_DISP_Y 64
enum
{
RED,
GREEN,
BLUE
};
/*************************************************************************/
typedef struct tagHalStruct
{
char szIdString[16];
WORD wDetectEndian;
WORD wSize;
BYTE Reg[MAX_REG + 1];
DWORD dwClkI; /* Input Clock Frequency (in kHz) */
DWORD dwDispMem;/* */
WORD wFrameRate;/* */
} HAL_STRUCT;
typedef HAL_STRUCT * PHAL_STRUCT;
#ifdef INTEL_16BIT
typedef HAL_STRUCT far * LPHAL_STRUCT;
#else
typedef HAL_STRUCT * LPHAL_STRUCT;
Page 80 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
#endif
/*=========================================================================*/
/* FUNCTION PROTO-TYPES */
/*=========================================================================*/
/*---------------------------- Initialization -----------------------------*/
int seRegisterDevice( const LPHAL_STRUCT lpHalInfo );
int seSetInit( void );
int seInitHal( void );
/*----------------------------- Miscellaneous -----------------------------*/
int seGetId( int *pId );
void seGetHalVersion( const char **pVersion, const char **pStatus,
const char **pStatusRevision );
int seSetBitsPerPixel( int nBitsPerPixel );
int seGetBitsPerPixel( int *pBitsPerPixel );
int seGetBytesPerScanline( int *pBytes );
int seGetScreenSize( int *width, int *height );
void seDelay( int nMilliSeconds );
int seGetLastUsableByte( long *LastByte );
int seSetHighPerformance( BOOL OnOff );
/*------------------------------- Advanced --------------------------------*/
int seSetHWRotate( int nMode );
int seSplitInit( WORD Scrn1Addr, WORD Scrn2Addr );
int seSplitScreen( int WhichScreen, int VisibleScanlines );
int seVirtInit( int xVirt, long *yVirt );
int seVirtMove( int nWhichScreen, int x, int y );
/*------------------------ Register/Memory Access -------------------------*/
int seGetReg( int index, BYTE *pValue );
int seSetReg( int index, BYTE value );
int seReadDisplayByte( DWORD offset, BYTE *pByte );
int seReadDisplayWord( DWORD offset, WORD *pWord );
int seReadDisplayDword( DWORD offset, DWORD *pDword );
int seWriteDisplayBytes( DWORD addr, BYTE val, DWORD count );
int seWriteDisplayWords( DWORD addr, WORD val, DWORD count );
int seWriteDisplayDwords( DWORD addr, DWORD val, DWORD count );
/*---------------------------------- Power Save ---------------------------*/
int seHWSuspend( int nDevID, BOOL val );
int seSetPowerSaveMode( int nDevID, int PowerSaveMode );
/*----------------------------------- Drawing -----------------------------*/
int seDrawLine( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, DWORD color );
int seDrawRect( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, DWORD color, BOOL Solidfill );
/*------------------------------ Color ------------------------------------*/
int seSetLut( BYTE *pLut );
int seGetLut( BYTE *pLut );
int seSetLutEntry( int index, BYTE *pEntry );
int seGetLutEntry( int index, BYTE *pEntry );
#endif /* _HAL_H_ */
Epson Research and Development Page 81
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
/*
**===========================================================================
** APPCFG.H - Application configuration information.
**---------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Created 1998 - Vancouver Design Centre
** Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Epson Research and Development, Inc.
** All Rights Reserved.
**---------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** The data in this file was generated using 13705CFG.EXE.
**
** The configureation parameters chosen were:
** 320x240 Single Color 4-bit STN
** 4 bpp - 100 Hz Frame Rate (12 MHz CLKi)
** High Performance enabled
**
**===========================================================================
*/
/************************************************************/
/* 13705 HAL HDR (do not remove) */
/* HAL_STRUCT Information generated by 13705CFG.EXE */
/* Copyright (c) 1998 Epson Research and Development, Inc. */
/* All rights reserved. */
/* */
/* Include this file ONCE in your primary source file */
/************************************************************/
HAL_STRUCT HalInfo =
{
"13705 HAL EXE", /* ID string */
0x1234, /* Detect Endian */
sizeof(HAL_STRUCT), /* Size */
0x00, 0x20, 0xC0, 0x03, 0x27, 0xEF, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0xFF, 0x03, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00,
6000, /* ClkI (kHz) */
0xF00000, /* Display Address */
70, /* Panel Frame Rate (Hz) */
};
Page 82 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
/*
**===========================================================================
** HAL_REGS.H
**---------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Created 1998, Epson Research & Development
** Vancouver Design Center.
** Copyright(c) Seiko Epson Corp. 1998. All rights reserved.
**===========================================================================
*/
#ifndef __HAL_REGS_H__
#define __HAL_REGS_H__
/*
** 13705 register names
*/
#define REG_REVISION_CODE 0x00
#define REG_MODE_REGISTER_0 0x01
#define REG_MODE_REGISTER_1 0x02
#define REG_MODE_REGISTER_2 0x03
#define REG_HORZ_PANEL_SIZE 0x04
#define REG_VERT_PANEL_SIZE_LSB 0x05
#define REG_VERT_PANEL_SIZE_MSB 0x06
#define REG_FPLINE_START_POS 0x07
#define REG_HORZ_NONDISP_PERIOD 0x08
#define REG_FPFRAME_START_POS 0x09
#define REG_VERT_NONDISP_PERIOD 0x0A
#define REG_MOD_RATE 0x0B
#define REG_SCRN1_START_ADDR_LSB 0x0C
#define REG_SCRN1_START_ADDR_MSB 0x0D
#define REG_SCRN2_START_ADDR_LSB 0x0E
#define REG_SCRN2_START_ADDR_MSB 0x0F
#define REG_SCRN_START_ADDR_OVERFLOW 0x10
#define REG_MEMORY_ADDR_OFFSET 0x11
#define REG_SCRN1_VERT_SIZE_LSB 0x12
#define REG_SCRN1_VERT_SIZE_MSB 0x13
#define REG_LUT_ADDR 0x15
#define REG_LUT_BANK_SELECT 0x16
#define REG_LUT_DATA 0x17
#define REG_GPIO_CONFIG 0x18
#define REG_GPIO_STATUS 0x19
#define REG_SCRATCHPAD 0x1A
#define REG_PORTRAIT_MODE 0x1B
#define REG_LINE_BYTE_COUNT 0x1C
#define REG_NOT_PRESENT_1 0x1D
/*
** WARNING!!! MAX_REG must be the last available register!!!
*/
#define MAX_REG 0x1D
#endif /* __HAL_REGS_H__ */
Epson Research and Development Page 83
Vancouver Design Center
Programming Notes and Examples S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/01/22 X27A-G-002-03
/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Epson Research and Development, Inc.
** All Rights Reserved.
**
** Module Name:
**
** ioctl.h
**
**
** Abstract:
**
** Include file for S1D13x0x PCI Board Driver.
** Define the IOCTL codes we will use. The IOCTL code contains a command
** identifier, plus other information about the device, the type of access
** with which the file must have been opened, and the type of buffering.
**
**----------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define SED_TYPE FILE_DEVICE_CONTROLLER
// The IOCTL function codes from 0x800 to 0xFFF are for customer use.
#define IOCTL_SED_QUERY_NUMBER_OF_PCI_BOARDS \
CTL_CODE( SED_TYPE, 0x900, METHOD_BUFFERED, FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_SED_MAP_PCI_BOARD \
CTL_CODE( SED_TYPE, 0x901, METHOD_BUFFERED, FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_SED_MAP_PHYSICAL_MEMORY \
CTL_CODE( SED_TYPE, 0x902, METHOD_BUFFERED, FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
#define IOCTL_SED_UNMAP_LINEAR_MEMORY \
CTL_CODE( SED_TYPE, 0x903, METHOD_BUFFERED, FILE_ANY_ACCESS)
Page 84 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples
X27A-G-002-03 Issue Date: 02/01/22
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Register Summary X27A-R-001-03
Page 1 01/02/13
Notes
1These bits are used to identify the S1D13705 at power on / reset.
2IO addresses are relative to the beginning of display memory.
3Gray Shade/Color Mode Selection
4Panel Data Format
5High Performance Selection
6Power Save Mode Selection
REG[00h] REVISION CODE REGISTER 1 IO address = 1FFE0h 2, RO
Product Code = 001001 Revision Code = 00
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[01h] MODE REGISTER 0 IO address = 1FFE1h, RW
TFT/STN Dual/Single Color/Mono3FPLine
Polarity FPFrame
Polarity Mask
FPSHIFT
Data Width 4
Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[02h] MODE REGISTER 1 IO address = 1FFE2h, RW
Bit-Per-Pixel 3High 5
Performance Input Clock
Div (CLKI/2) Display
Blank Frame
Repeat
Hw Video
Invert
Enable
Software
Video Invert
Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[03h] MODE REGISTER 2 IO address = 1FFE3h, RW
n/a n/a n/a n/a LCDPWR
Override Hardware
PS Enable
Sw Power Save 6
Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[04h] HORIZONTAL PANEL SIZE REGISTER IO address = 1FFE4h, RW
n/a Horizontal Panel Size = 8(REG + 1)
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[05h] VERTICAL PANEL SIZE REGISTER (LSB) IO address = 1FFE5h, RW
Vertical Panel Size = (REG[05h], REG[06h]) + 1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[06h] VERTICAL PANEL SIZE REGISTER (MSB) IO address = 1FFE6h, RW
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Vertical Panel Size
Bit 9 Bit 8
REG[07h] FPLINE START POSITION IO address = 1FFE7h, RW
n/a n/a n/a FPLine Start Position = 8(REG[07h] + 2)
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[08h] HORIZONTAL NON-DISPLAY PERIOD IO address = 1FFE8h, RW
n/a n/a n/a Horizontal Non-Display Period = 8(REG + 4)
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[09h] FPFRAME START POSITION IO address = 1FFE9h, RW
n/a n/a FPFrame Start Position
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[0Ah] VERTICAL NON-DISPLAY PERIOD REGISTER IO address = 1FFEAh, RW
Vert Non-
Disp Status n/a Vertical Non-Display Period
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[0Bh] MOD RATE REGISTER IO address = 1FFEBh, RW
n/a n/a MOD Rate
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[0Ch] SCREEN 1 START WORD ADDRESS REGISTER (LSB) IO address = 1FFECh, RW
Screen 1 Start Word Address = (REG[0Ch], REG[0Dh], REG[10] bit 1)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[0Dh] SCREEN 1 START WORD ADDRESS REGISTER (MSB) IO address = 1FFEDh, RW
Screen 1 Start Word Address
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
REG[0Eh] SCREEN 2 START WORD ADDRESS REGISTER (LSB) IO address = 1FFEEh, RW
Screen 2 Start Word Address = (REG[0E], REG[0Fh], REG[10] bit 4)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[0Fh] SCREEN 2 START WORD ADDRESS REGISTER (MSB) IO address = 1FFEFh, RW
Screen 2 Start Word Address
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
REG[10h] SCREEN START ADDRESS OVERFLOW REGISTER) IO address = 1FFF0h, RW
Screen 2
Start Add
Bit 16
Screen 1
Start Add
Bit 16
REG[11h] MEMORY ADDRESS OFFSET REGISTER IO address = 1FFF1h, RW
Memory Address Offset
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[12h] SCREEN 1 VERTICAL SIZE REGISTER (LSB) IO address = 1FFF2h, RW
Screen 1 Vertical Size = (REG[12h], REG[13h])
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[13h] SCREEN 1 VERTICAL SIZE REGISTER (MSB) IO address = 1FFF3h, RW
n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a Screen 1 Vertical Size
Bit 9 Bit 8
REG[15h] LOOK-UP TABLE ADDRESS REGISTER IO address = 1FFF5h, RW
Look-Up Table Address
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[17h] LOOK-UP TABLE DATA REGISTER IO address = 1FFF7h, RW
Look-Up Table Data n/a n/a n/a n/a
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[18h] GPIO CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER IO address = 1FFF8h, RW
n/a n/a n/a GPIO4 Pin
IO Config GPIO3 Pin
IO Config GPIO2 Pin
IO Config GPIO1 Pin
IO Config GPIO0 Pin
IO Config
REG[19h] GPIO STATUS / CONTROL REGISTER IO address = 1FFF9h, RW
n/a n/a n/a GPIO4 Pin
IO Status GPIO3 Pin
IO Status GPIO2 Pin
IO Status GPIO1 Pin
IO Status GPIO0 Pin
IO Status
REG[1Ah] SCRATCH PAD REGISTER IO address = 1FFFAh, RW
Scratch Pad Register
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[1Bh] SWIVELVIEW MODE REGISTER IO address = 1FFFBh, RW
SwivelView
Mode En. SwivelView
Mode Sel. n/a n/a n/a reserved SwivelView PCLK Select
Bit 1 Bit 0
REG[1Ch] LINE BYTE COUNT REGISTER IO address = 1FFFCh, RW
Line Byte Count
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Color/Mono
REG[01] bit 5 Bit-Per-Pixel Bit 1
REG[02] bit 7 Bit-Per-Pixel Bit 0
REG[02] bit 6 Display Mode
1
00 2 Colors 1 Bit-Per-Pixel
1 4 Colors 2 Bit-Per-Pixel
10 16 Colors 4 Bit-Per-Pixel
1 256 Colors 8 Bit-Per-Pixel
0
00 2 Gray Shade 1 Bit-Per-Pixel
1 4 Gray Shade 2 Bit-Per-Pixel
10 16 Gray Shade 4 Bit-Per-Pixel
1 reserved
TFT/STN
REG[01]
bit 7
Color/
Mono
REG[01]
bit 5
Dual/
Single
REG[01]
bit 6
Data
Width
Bit 1
REG[01]
bit 1
Data
Width
Bit 0
REG[01]
bit 0
Function
0
0
0
00 Mono Single 4-bit LCD
1 Mono Single 8-bit LCD
10reserved
1reserved
1
00reserved
1 Mono Dual 8-bit LCD
10reserved
1reserved
1
0
00 Color Single 4-bit LCD
1 Color Single 8-bit LCD Format 1
10reserved
1 Color Single 8-bit LCD Format 2
1
00reserved
1 Color Dual 8-bit LCD
10reserved
1reserved
1 don’t care 0 9 bit TFT Panel
1 12 bit TFT Panel
High Performance Bit-Per-Pixel
Bit 1
REG[02] bit 7
Bit-Per-Pixel
Bit 0
REG[02] bit 6 Display Modes
0
00 MClk = PClk/8 1 bit-per-pixel
1 MClk = PClk/4 2 bit-per-pixel
10 MClk = PClk/2 4 bit-per-pixel
1 MClk = PClk 8 bit-per-pixel
1XX MClk = PClk
Power Save Bit 1 Power Save Bit 0 Mode
0 0 Power Save Mode 1
0 1 reserved
1 0 reserved
1 1 Normal Operation
S1D13705 Register Summary X27A-R-001-03
S1D13705 Register Summary X27A-R-001-03
Page 2 01/02/13
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705CFG Configuration Program
Document Number: X27A-B-001-03
Copyright © 1999, 2002 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Table of Contents
13705CFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
13705CFG Configuration Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
General Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preferences Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Clocks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Panel Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Panel Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Registers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
13705CFG Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Open... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Save As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configure Multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Enable Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
ERD on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About 13705CFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
13705CFG
13705CFG is an interactive Windows® program that calculates register values for a user-
defined S1D13705 configuration. The configuration information can be used to directly
alter the operating characteristics of the S1D13705 utilities or any program built with the
Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) library. Alternatively, the configuration information
can be saved in a variety of text file formats for use in other applications.
Note
This program is a Windows desktop application suitable for configuring software for a
given implementation of an Epson LCD controller. However, it is not a display driver
for any Windows desktop operating system. Epson does not provide display drivers for
any of the Windows desktop operating systems.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705CFG runs on PC system running Windows 9x/ME/XP/NT/2000 and can modify
Win32 .exe files.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Installation
Create a directory for 13705cfg.exe and the S1D13705 utilities. Copy the files
13705cfg.exe and panels.def to that directory. Panels.def contains configuration infor-
mation for a number of panels and must reside in the same directory as 13705cfg.exe.
Usage
To start 13705CFG from the Windows desktop, double-click on the My Computer icon and
run the program 13705cfg.exe from the installed directory.
To start 13705CFG from a Windows command prompt, change to the directory
13705cfg.exe was installed to and type the command 13705cfg.
The basic procedure for using 13705CFG is:
1. Start 13705CFG as described above.
2. Open an existing file to serve as a starting reference point (this step is optional).
3. Modify the configuration. For specific information on editing the configuration, see
“13705CFG Configuration Tabs” on page 7.
4. Save the new configuration. The configuration information can be saved in two ways;
as an ASCII text file or by modifying an executable image on disk.
Several ASCII text file formats are supported. Most are formatted C header files used
to build display drivers or standalone applications.
Utility files based on the Hardware Abstraction Layer (HAL) can be modified directly
by 13705CFG.
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
13705CFG Configuration Tabs
13705CFG provides a series of tabs which can be selected at the top of the main window.
Each tab allows the configuration of a specific aspect of S1D13705 operation.
The tabs are labeled “General”, “Preference”, “Clocks”, “Panel”, “Panel Power”, and
“Registers”. The following sections describe the purpose and use of each of the tabs.
General Tab
The General tab contains S1D13705 evaluation board specific information. The values
presented are used for configuring HAL based executable utilities. The settings on this tab
specify where in CPU address space the registers and display buffer are located.
Decode Addresses
Register Address
Display Buffer Address
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Decode Addresses Selecting one of the listed evaluation platforms changes
the values for the “Register address” and “Display
buffer address” fields. The values used for each evalu-
ation platform are examples of possible implementa-
tions as used by the Epson S1D13705 evaluation board.
If your hardware implementation differs from the
addresses used, select the User-Defined option and
enter the correct addresses for “Register address” and
“Display buffer address”.
Register Address The physical address of the start of register decode
space (in hexadecimal).
This field is automatically set according to the Decode
Address unless the “User-Defined” decode address is
selected.
Display Buffer Address The physical address of the start of display buffer
decode space (in hexadecimal).
This field is automatically set according to the Decode
Address unless the “User-Defined” decode address is
selected.
Note
When “Epson S5U13705B00C Rev. 2 Evaluation Board” is selected, the register and
display buffer addresses are blanked because the evaluation board uses the PCI interface
and the decode addresses are determined by the system BIOS during boot-up.
If using the S1D13705 Evaluation Board on a PCI based platform, both Windows and
the S1D13XXX device driver must be installed. For further information on the
S1D13XXX device driver, see the S1D13XXX Windows 32-bit Windows Device Driver
Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-xx.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Preferences Tab
The Preference tab contains settings pertaining to the initial display state. During runtime
these settings may be changed.
Color Depth Sets the initial color depth on the LCD panel.
Panel SwivelView The S1D13705 SwivelView feature is capable of
rotating the image displayed on an LCD panel 90° in a
counter-clockwise direction. This sets the initial orien-
tation of the panel. The SwivelView feature can be run
in two different modes. Default mode requires a virtual
display which requires more memory but uses less
power.
Enable When this box is checked SwivelView is enabled and
the LCD display is rotated 90° in a counter-clockwise
direction.
Color Depth
SwivelView Enable
Alternative Mode
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Alternative Mode When alternate mode is selected, SwivelView requires
no virtual display but consumes more power.
For details see the S1D13705 Hardware Functional
Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Clocks Tab
The Clocks tab is intended to simplify the selection of input clock frequencies and the
source of internal clocking signals. For further information regarding clocking and clock
sources, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number
X27A-A-001-xx.
Note
Options for LCD frame rates are limited to ranges determined by the clock values.
Changing clock values may modify or invalidate Panel settings. Confirm all settings on
the Panel tab after modifying any clock settings.
CLKI
PCLK Source
PCLK Divide
MCLK Source
MCLK Divide
CLKI/2
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
The S1D13705 uses one clock input known as CLKI. The pixel clock (PCLK) and the
memory clock (MCLK) are both derived from CLKI.
CLKI This setting determines the frequency of CLKI. CLKI is
the source for both PCLK and MCLK.
The CLKI frequency must be selected from the drop
down list or by entering the desired frequency in MHz.
The actual CLKI frequency used for configuration is
displayed in blue in the Actual section.
CLKI/2 Selecting this box divides the input clock, CLKI, in half
for internal S1D13705 operations.
PCLK These settings confirm the signal source and input clock
divisor for the pixel clock (PCLK).
Source The PCLK source is CLKI.
Divide The divide ratio for the clock source signal is 1:1.
Timing This field shows the actual PCLK used by the configu-
ration process.
MCLK These settings confirm the signal source and input clock
divisor for the memory clock (MCLK).
Source The MCLK source is CLKI.
Divide The divide ratio for the clock source signal is 1:1.
Timing This field shows the actual MCLK frequency used by
the configuration process.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Panel Tab
The S1D13705 supports many panel types. This tab allows configuration of most panel
settings such as panel dimensions, type and timings.
Panel Type Selects between passive (STN) and active (TFT/D-
TFD) panel types. The Epson D-TFD panels are
supported only in TFT compatible mode.
Several options may change or become unavailable
when the STN/TFT setting is switched. Therefore,
confirm all settings on this tab after the Panel Type is
changed.
Panel Type
TFT/FPLINE
TFT/FPFRAME
Panel Data Width FPLINE FPFRAME
Frame Rate
Pixel Clock
Predefined
Panels
Polarity
Polarity
Panel Color
Format 2
Panel Dimensions
Non-display Periods
Dual Panel
Frame Repeat
Mask FPSHIFT
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Format 2 Selects color STN panel format 2. This option is specif-
ically for configuring 8-bit color STN panels.
See the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx, for description of
format 1 / format 2 data formats. Most new panels use
the format 2 data format.
Frame Repeat Selects Frame Repeat feature for use with EL panels.
See the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx, for description of
Frame Repeat.
Data Width Selects the panel data width. Panel data width is the
number of bits of data transferred to the LCD panel on
each clock cycle and shouldn’t be confused with color
depth which determines the number of displayed colors.
When the panel type is STN, the available options are 4
and 8 bit. When an active panel type is selected the
available options are 9 and 12 bit.
Panel Color Selects between a monochrome or color panel.
Mask FPSHIFT When selected causes the signal FPSHIFT to be
masked. When color or TFT panel is selected this
option is disabled.
Dual Panel Selects between single or dual panel.
When the panel type is TFT, “Single” is automatically
selected and the “Dual” option is greyed out.
Polarity These settings define the polarity of the FPLINE and
FPFRAME pulses.
FPLINE Polarity Selects the polarity of the FPLINE pulse. Refer to the
panel specification for the correct polarity of the
FPLINE pulse.
FPFRAME Polarity Selects the polarity of the FPFRAME pulse. Refer to the
panel specification for the correct polarity of the
FPFRAME pulse.
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Panel Dimensions These fields specify the panel width and height. A
number of common widths and height are available in
the selection boxes. If the width/height of your panel is
not listed, enter the actual panel dimensions into the edit
field.
Manually entered pixel widths must be multiples of 8.
If a value is entered that does not match these require-
ments, a notification box appears and 13705CFG
rounds up the value to the next allowable width.
Non-Display Periods It is recommended that these automatically generated
non-display values be used without adjustment.
However, manual adjustment may be useful in fine
tuning the non-display width and non-display height.
Timings These settings show the Frame Rate and Pixel Clock
timings.
Frame Rate This field displays the effective frame rate of the LCD
panel. Panel dimensions are fixed therefore frame rate
can only be adjusted by changing either PCLK or non-
display period values. Higher frame rates correspond to
smaller horizontal and vertical non-display values, or
higher PCLK frequencies.
Pixel Clock The pixel clock used for the LCD panel is displayed in
this field. The pixel clock is dependent on the CLKI
frequency.
TFT/FPLINE
Start Pos Specifies the delay (in pixels) from the start of the
horizontal non-display period to the leading edge of the
FPLINE pulse. This setting is only available when the
selected panel type is TFT.
Refer to S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specifi-
cation, document number X27A-A-001-xx for a
complete description of the FPLINE pulse settings.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
TFT/FPFRAME
Start Pos Specifies the delay (in lines) from the start of the
vertical non-display period to the leading edge of the
FPFRAME pulse. This settings is only available when
the selected panel type is TFT.
Refer to S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specifi-
cation, document number X27A-A-001-xx, for a
complete description of the FPFRAME pulse settings.
Predefined Panels 13705CFG uses a file (panels.def) which lists various
panel manufacturers recommended settings. If the file
panels.def is present in the same directory as
13705cfg.exe, the settings for a number of predefined
panels are available in the drop-down list. If a panel is
selected from the list, 13705CFG loads the predefined
settings contained in the file.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Panel Power Tab
The S5U13705B00C evaluation board is designed to use the GPIO0 signal to control the
LCD bias power. The following settings allow configuration of the necessary delays.
Hardware Power Save Enable When this box is checked, Hardware Power Save using
GPIO0 is enabled. When this box is unchecked, the
Hardware Power Save function is not available.
Power Down Time Delay This setting controls the time delay between when the
LCD panel is powered-off and when the S1D13705
control signals are turned off. This setting must be
configured according to the specification for the panel
being used.
This value is only used by Epson evaluation software
designed for the S5U13705B00C evaluation board.
Power Down
Time Delay
Power Up
Time Delay
Hardware Power
Save Enable
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Power Up Time Delay This setting controls the time delay between when the
S1D13705 control signals are turned on and the LCD
panel is powered-on. This setting must be configured
according to the specification for the panel being used.
This value is only used by Epson evaluation software
designed for the S5U13705B00C evaluation board.
Registers Tab
The Registers tab allows viewing and direct editing the S1D13705 register values.
Scroll up and down the list of registers and view their configured values based on the
settings in the previous tabs. Individual register settings may be changed by double-
clicking on the register in the listing. Manual changes to the registers are not checked
for errors, so caution is warranted when directly editing these values. It is strongly
recommended that the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number
X27A-A-001-xx be referred to before making a manual register settings.
Manually entered values may be changed by 13705CFG if further configuration changes
are made on the other tabs. In this case, the user is notified.
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Note
Manual changes to the registers may have unpredictable results if incorrect values are
entered.
13705CFG Menus
The following sections describe each of the options in the File and Help menus.
Open...
From the Menu Bar, select “File”, then “Open...” to display the Open File Dialog Box.
The Open option allows 13705CFG to open files containing HAL configuration infor-
mation. When 13705CFG opens a file it scans the file for an identification string, and if
found, reads the configuration information. This may be used to quickly arrive at a starting
point for register configuration. The only requirement is that the file being opened must
contain a valid S1D13705 HAL library information block.
13705CFG supports a variety of executable file formats. Select the file type(s) 13705CFG
should display in the Files of Type drop-down list and then select the filename from the list
and click on the Open button.
Note
13705CFG is designed to work with utilities programmed using a given version of the
HAL. If the configuration structure contained in the executable file differs from the ver-
sion 13705CFG expects the Open will fail and an error message is displayed. This may
happen if the version of 13705CFG is substantially older, or newer, than the file being
opened.
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Save
From the Menu Bar, select “File”, then “Save” to initiate the save action. The Save menu
option allows a fast save of the configuration information to a file that was opened with the
Open menu option.
Note
This option is only available once a file has been opened.
Note
13705cfg.exe can be configured by making a copy of the file 13705cfg.exe and config-
uring the copy. It is not possible to configure the original while it is running.
Save As...
From the Menu Bar, select “File”, then “Save As...” to display the Save As Dialog Box.
“Save as” is very similar to Save except a dialog box is displayed allowing the user to name
the file before saving.
Using this technique a tester can configure a number of files differing only in configuration
information and name (e.g. BMP60Hz.EXE, BMP72Hz.EXE, BMP75Hz.EXE where only
the frame rate changes in each of these files).
Note
When “Save As” is selected then an exact duplicate of the file as opened by the “Open”
option is created containing the new configuration information.
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Configure Multiple
After determining the desired configuration, “Configure Multiple” allows the information
to be saved into one or more executable files built with the HAL library.
From the Menu Bar, select “File”, then “Configure Multiple” to display the Configure
Multiple Dialog Box.This dialog box is also displayed when a file(s) is dragged onto the
13705CFG window.
The left pane lists files available for configuration; the right pane lists files that have been
selected for configuration. Files can be selected by clicking the “Add” or “Add All”
buttons, double clicking any file in the left pane, or by dragging the file(s) from Windows
Explorer.
Selecting “Show all files” displays all files in the selected directory, whereas selecting
“Show conf. files only” will display only files that can be configured using 13705CFG.
The configuration values can be saved only to specific files. The file must have been
compiled using the 13705 HAL library.
Checking “Preserve Physical Addresses” instructs 13705CFG to use the register and
display buffer address values the files were previously configured with. Addresses
specified in the General Tab are discarded. This is useful when configuring several
programs for various hardware platforms at the same time. For example, if configuring PCI,
MPC and IDP based programs at the same time for a new panel type, the physical addresses
for each are retained. This feature is primarily intended for the test lab where multiple
hardware configurations exist and are being tested.
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
13705CFG Configuration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 02/03/11 X27A-B-001-03
Export
After determining the desired configuration, “Export” permits the user to save the register
information as a variety of ASCII text file formats. The following is a list and description
of the currently supported output formats:
• a C header file for use in writing HAL library based applications.
• a C header file which lists each register and the value it should be set to.
• a C header file for use in developing Window CE display drivers.
• a C header file for use in developing display drivers for other operating systems such as
Linux, QNX, and VxWorks UGL or WindML.
• a comma delimited text file containing an offset, a value, and a description for each
S1D13705 register.
After selecting the file format, click the “Export As...” button to display the file dialog box
which allows the user to enter a filename before saving. Before saving the configuration
file, clicking the “Preview” button starts Notepad with a copy of the configuration file about
to be saved.
When the C Header File for S1D13705 WinCE Drivers option is selected as the export
type, additional options are available and can be selected by clicking on the Options button.
The options dialog appears as:
Mode Number
selects the mode number for
use in the header file
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705CFG Configuration Program
X27A-B-001-03 Issue Date: 02/03/11
Enable Tooltips
Tooltips provide useful information about many of the items on the configuration tabs.
Placing the mouse pointer over nearly any item on any tab generates a popup window
containing helpful advice and hints.
To enable/disable tooltips check/uncheck the “Tooltips” option form the “Help” menu.
Note
Tooltips are enabled by default.
ERD on the Web
This “Help” menu item is actually a hotlink to the Epson Research and Development
website. Selecting “Help” then “ERD on the Web” starts the default web browser and
points it to the ERD product web site.
The latest software, drivers, and documentation for the S1D13705 is available at this
website.
About 13705CFG
Selecting the “About 13705CFG” option from the “Help” menu displays the about dialog
box for 13705CFG. The about dialog box contains version information and the copyright
notice for 13705CFG.
Comments
• On any tab particular options may be grayed out if selecting them would violate the
operational specification of the S1D13705 (i.e. Selecting TFT or STN on the Panel tab
enables/disables options specific to the panel type).
• The file panels.def is a text file containing operational specifications for several
supported, and tested, panels. This file can be edited with any text editor.
• 13705CFG allows manually altering register values. The manual changes may violate
memory and LCD timings as specified in the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specifi-
cation, document number X27A-A-001-xx. If this is done, unpredictable results may
occur. Epson Research and Development, Inc. does not assume liability for any damage
done to the display device as a result of configuration errors.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705SHOW Demonstration Program
Document No. X27A-B-002-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SHOW Demonstration Program
X27A-B-002-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705SHOW Demonstration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-002-02
13705SHOW
13705SHOW is a program designed to demonstrate rudimentary display capabilities of the
S1D13705. The display abilities are shown by drawing a pattern image to the video display
at all supported color depths (1, 2, 4 and 8 bits-per-pixel)
The 13705SHOW display utility must be configured and/or compiled to work with your
hardware platform. The program 13705CFG.EXE can be used to configure 13705SHOW.
Consult the 13705CFG users guide, document number X27A-B-001-xx, for more infor-
mation on configuring S1D13705 utilities.
This software is designed to work in both embedded and personal computer (PC) environ-
ments. For the embedded environment, it is assumed that the system has a means of
downloading software from the PC to the target platform. Typically, this is done by serial
communications. The PC uses a terminal program to send control commands and infor-
mation to the target processor. Alternatively, the PC can program an EPROM, which is then
placed in the target platform. Some target platforms can also communicate with the PC via
a parallel port connection, or an Ethernet connection.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705SHOW has been tested with the following S1D13705 supported evaluation
platforms:
• PC system with an x86 processor. Both 16-bit and 32-bit code is supported.
• M68EC000IDP (Integrated Development Platform) board, revision 3.0, with a Motorola
M68EC000 processor.
• SH3-LCEVB board, revision B, with an Hitachi SH-3 HD6417780 processor.
If the platform you are using is different from the above, please see the S1D13705
Programming Notes and Examples manual, document number X26A-G-002-xx.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SHOW Demonstration Program
X27A-B-002-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
Installation
PC Intel Platform
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705SHOW.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13X0X.VXD
as described in the S1D13X0X 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705SHOW.EXE to a directory that is
in the DOS path on your hard drive.
Embedded Platform
Download the program 13705SHOW to the system.
Usage
PC platform: at the prompt, type:
13705show [/a][b=n][/l][/p [/alt]][/vertical][/noinit][/?]
Embedded platform: execute 13705show and at the prompt, type the command line
argument(s).
Where: /a automatically cycle through all video modes.
b=? starts 13705SHOW at a user specified
bit-per-pixel (bpp) level, where ? can be:
1, 2, 4, or 8.
/l set landscape mode.
/p set portrait mode.
/alt use alternate portrait mode
/vertical displays vertical line pattern.
/update continuously update display memory.
/noinit bypass register initialization and use
values which are currently in the registers.
/? displays the help screen.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705SHOW Demonstration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-002-02
Comments
• The /alt command line switch can only be used with the /p (portrait) mode switch. This
switch will have no effect in landscape display modes.
• The Intel 32-bit version of 13705SHOW is designed to work under either Windows 9x
or Windows NT. To install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13X0X.vxd see the
S1D13X0X 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number
X00A-E-003-xx.
The 16-bit version of the program runs under DOS with no DOS extenders. The lack of
a DOS extender means that the 16-bit program can only be used on a hardware platform
where the S1D13705 is addressed below 1MB.
Program Messages
ERROR: Did not find a 13705 device.
The HAL was unable to read the revision code register on the S1D13705. Ensure that the S1D13705
hardware is installed and that the hardware platform has been configured correctly. Also check that
the display memory address has been configured correctly.
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
13705PLAY was unable to load a required driver. The file S1D13XXX.VXD should be located in
x:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or in x:\WINNT\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in
the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-
xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred
This message indicates an error at the IO control layer occurred. The usual cause for this is an
incorrect hardware configuration.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error
This message should never be displayed, it indicates that 13705SHOW is unable to determine the
cause of an error returned from the HAL.
ERROR: Could not initialize device
The call to initialize the S1D13705 registers failed.
Not enough memory for www x hhh x bpp!!
This message is printed if there is insufficient display memory to show a complete image with a
width of www pixels, a height of hhh pixels and a color depth of bpp bit-per-pixel. In this case the
mode is skipped and the next display mode is attempted.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SHOW Demonstration Program
X27A-B-002-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705SPLT Display Utility
Document No. X27A-B-003-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SPLT Display Utility
X27A-B-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705SPLT Display Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-003-02
13705SPLT
13705SPLT demonstrates S1D13705 split screen capability by showing two different areas
of display memory on the screen simultaneously.
Screen 1 memory is located at the start of the display buffer and is filled with horizontal
bars. Screen 2 memory is located immediately after Screen 1 in the display buffer and is
filled with vertical bars. On either user input or elapsed time, the line compare register value
is changed to adjust the amount of display area taken up by each screen.
The 13705SPLT display utility must be configured and/or compiled to work with your
hardware platform. The program 13705CFG.EXE can be used to configure 13705SPLT.
Consult the 13705CFG users guide, document number X27A-B-001-xx, for more infor-
mation on configuring S1D13705 utilities.
This software is designed to work in both embedded and personal computer (PC) environ-
ments. For the embedded environment, it is assumed that the system has a means of
downloading software from the PC to the target platform. Typically, this is done by serial
communications. The PC uses a terminal program to send control commands and infor-
mation to the target processor. Alternatively, the PC can program an EPROM, which is then
placed in the target platform. Some target platforms can also communicate with the PC via
a parallel port connection, or an Ethernet connection.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705SPLT has been tested with the following S1D13705 supported evaluation platforms:
• PC system with an x86 processor. Both 16-bit and 32-bit code is supported.
• M68EC000IDP (Integrated Development Platform) board, revision 3.0, with a Motorola
M68EC000 processor.
• SH3-LCEVB board, revision B, with an Hitachi SH-3 HD6417780 processor.
If the platform you are using is different from the above, please see the S1D13705
Programming Notes and Examples manual, document number X26A-G-002-xx.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SPLT Display Utility
X27A-B-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
Installation
PC Intel Platform
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705SPLT.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13X0X.VXD
as described in the S1D13X0X 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705SPLT.EXE to a directory that is in
the DOS path on your hard drive.
Embedded Platform
Download the program 13705SPLT to the system.
Usage
PC platform: at the prompt, type 13705SPLT [/a] [/?]
Embedded platform: execute 13705splt and at the prompt, type the command line
argument.
Where: no argument enables manual split screen operation
/a enables automatic split screen operation
(a timer is used to move screen 2)
/? display the help screen
After starting 13705SPLT the following keyboard commands are available.
Manual mode: ↑, u move Screen 2 up
↓, d move Screen 2 down
HOME covers Screen 1 with Screen 2
END displays only Screen 1
Automatic mode: any key change the direction of split screen movement
(for PC only)
Both modes: bchanges the color depth (bits-per-pixel)
ESC exits 13705SPLT
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705SPLT Display Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-003-02
13705SPLT Example
1. Type “13705splt /a” to automatically move the split screen.
2. Press “b” to change the color depth from 1 bit-per-pixel to 2 bit-per-pixel.
3. Repeat step 2 for the remaining color depths (4 and 8 bit-per-pixel).
4. Press <ESC> to exit the program.
Program Messages
ERROR: Did not find a 13705 device.
The HAL was unable to read the revision code register on the S1D13705. Ensure that the S1D13705
hardware is installed and that the hardware platform has been configured correctly. Also check that
the display memory address has been configured correctly.
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
13705PLAY was unable to load a required driver. The file S1D13XXX.VXD should be located in
x:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or in x:\WINNT\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in
the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-
xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred
This message indicates an error at the IO control layer occurred. The usual cause for this is an
incorrect hardware configuration.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error
This message should never be displayed, it indicates that 13705SOLT is unable to determine the
cause of an error returned from the HAL.
Not enough memory for www x hhh x bpp!!
This message is displayed if there is insufficient display memory to contain two complete images
with a width of www pixels, a height of hhh pixels, and a color depth of bpp bit-per-pixel. In this
case the mode is skipped and the next display mode is attempted.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705SPLT Display Utility
X27A-B-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705VIRT Display Utility
Document No. X27A-B-004-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705VIRT Display Utility
X27A-B-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705VIRT Display Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-004-02
13705VIRT
13705VIRT demonstrates the virtual display capability of the S1D13705. A virtual display
is where the image to be displayed is larger than the physical display device. The display
surface is used a viewing window. The entire image can be seen only by panning and
scrolling.
The 13705VIRT display utility must be configured and/or compiled to work with your
hardware platform. The program 13705CFG.EXE can be used to configure 13705VIRT.
Consult the 13705CFG users guide, document number X27A-B-001-xx, for more infor-
mation on configuring S1D13705 utilities.
This software is designed to work in both embedded and personal computer (PC) environ-
ments. For the embedded environment, it is assumed that the system has a means of
downloading software from the PC to the target platform. Typically, this is done by serial
communications. The PC uses a terminal program to send control commands and infor-
mation to the target processor. Alternatively, the PC can program an EPROM, which is then
placed in the target platform. Some target platforms can also communicate with the PC via
a parallel port connection, or an Ethernet connection.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705VIRT has been tested with the following S1D13705 supported evaluation platforms:
• PC system with an x86 processor.
• M68EC000IDP (Integrated Development Platform) board, revision 3.0, with a Motorola
M68EC000 processor.
• SH3-LCEVB board, revision B, with an Hitachi SH-3 HD6417780 processor.
If the platform you are using is different from the above, please see the S1D13705
Programming Notes and Examples manual, document number X26A-G-002-xx.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705VIRT Display Utility
X27A-B-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
Installation
PC Intel Platform
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705VIRT.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13X0X.VXD
as described in the S1D13X0X 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705VIRT.EXE to a directory that is in
the DOS path on your hard drive.
Embedded Platform
Download the program 13705VIRT to the system.
Usage
PC platform: at the prompt, type 13705virt [/a] [/l] [/p] [/alt]
[/w=???].
Embedded platform: execute 13705virt and at the prompt, type the command line
argument.
Where: no argument panning and scrolling is performed manually
(defaults to virtual width = = physical width x 2
and maximum virtual height)
/a panning and scrolling is performed automatically
/l Force landscape display mode to be set
/p Force portrait display mode to be set
/alt Enable alternate portrait mode. Selecting this
option implies /p
/w=??? specifies the virtual display width which includes
both on-screen and off-screen size
the maximum virtual width, not including display
area, for each display mode is:
1 bpp – 4096 pixels
2 bpp – 2048 pixels
4 bpp – 1024 pixels
8 bpp – 512 pixels
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705VIRT Display Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-004-02
The following keyboard commands are for navigation within the program.
Manual mode: ↑scrolls up
↓scrolls down
←pans to the left
→pans to the right
HOME moves the display screen so that the upper right of
the virtual screen shows in the upper right of the
display
END moves the display screen so that the lower left of
the virtual screen shows in the lower left of the
display
Automatic mode: any key changes the direction of screen
Both modes: bchanges the color depth (bits-per-pixel)
ESC exits 13705VIRT
13705VIRT Example
1. Type “13705virt /a” to automatically pan and scroll.
2. Press "b" to change the bits-per-pixel from 1 bit-per-pixel to 2 bits-per-pixel.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining color depths (4 and 8 bit-per-pixel).
4. Press <ESC> to exit the program.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705VIRT Display Utility
X27A-B-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/12
Program Messages
ERROR: Did not find a 13705 device.
The HAL was unable to read the revision code register on the S1D13705. Ensure that the S1D13705
hardware is installed and that the hardware platform has been configured correctly. Also check that
the display memory address has been configured correctly.
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
13705PLAY was unable to load a required driver. The file S1D13XXX.VXD should be located in
x:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or in x:\WINNT\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in
the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-
xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred
This message indicates an error at the IO control layer occurred. The usual cause for this is an
incorrect hardware configuration.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error
This message should never be displayed, it indicates that 13705VIRT is unable to determine the
cause of an error returned from the HAL.
Unable to use virtual mode at xx BPP
This message is displayed if there is insufficient display memory to show a complete virtual image.
Specifically, the maximum number of lines for the image is calculated using the current virtual
width. If the number of possible lines is less than the physical display size this message is displayed.
Try restarting the program and manually specify a smaller virtual width.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility
Document No. X27A-B-005-04
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility
X27A-B-005-04 Issue Date: 01/07/04
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/07/04 X27A-B-005-04
13705PLAY
13705PLAY is a utility which allows the user to easily read/write the S1D13705 registers,
Look-Up Table and display memory.
The user interface for 13705PLAY is similar to the DOS DEBUG program; commands are
received from the standard input device, and output is sent to the standard output device
(console for Intel and terminal for embedded platforms). This utility requires the target
platform to support standard IO.
13705PLAY commands can be entered interactively using a keyboard/monitor or they can
be executed from a script file. Scripting is a powerful feature which allows command
sequences played back from a file thus avoiding having to retype lengthy sequences.
The 13705PLAY display utility must be configured and/or compiled to work with your
hardware platform. The program 13705CFG.EXE can be used to configure 13705PLAY.
Consult the 13705CFG users guide, document number X27A-B-001-xx, for more infor-
mation on configuring S1D13705 utilities.
This software is designed to work in both embedded and personal computer (PC) environ-
ments. For the embedded environment, it is assumed that the system has a means of
downloading software from the PC to the target platform. Typically, this is done by serial
communications. The PC uses a terminal program to send control commands and infor-
mation to the target processor. Alternatively, the PC can program an EPROM, which is then
placed in the target platform. Some target platforms can also communicate with the PC via
a parallel port connection, or an Ethernet connection.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705PLAY has been tested with the following S1D13705 supported evaluation platforms:
• PC system with an x86 processor. Both 16-bit and 32-bit code is supported.
• M68EC000IDP (Integrated Development Platform) board, revision 3.0, with a Motorola
M68EC000 processor.
• SH3-LCEVB board, revision B, with an Hitachi SH-3 HD6417780 processor.
If the platform you are using is different from the above, please see the S1D13705
Programming Notes and Examples manual, document number X26A-G-002-xx.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility
X27A-B-005-04 Issue Date: 01/07/04
Installation
PC Intel Platform
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705PLAY.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13XXX.VXD
as described in the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705PLAY.EXE to a directory that is
in the DOS path on your hard drive.
Embedded Platform
Download the program 13705PLAY to the system.
Usage
PC platform: at the prompt, type 13705play [/?].
Embedded platform: execute 13705play and at the prompt, type the command line
argument.
Where: /? displays program revision information.
The following commands are valid within the 13705PLAY program.
X index [data] Reads/writes the registers.
Writes data to the register specified by the index
when “data” is specified; otherwise the register is
read.
XA Reads all registers.
L index [data1 data2 data3] Reads/writes Look-Up Table (LUT) values.
Writes data to the LUT index when “data” is
specified; otherwise the LUT index is read.
Data must consist of 3 bytes: 1 red, 1 green, 1
blue. and range in value from 0x00 to 0x0F.
LA Reads all LUT values.
F[W] addr1 addr2 data . . . Fills bytes or words from address 1 to address 2
with data. Data can be multiple values
(e.g. F 0 20 1 2 3 4 fills address 0 to 0x20
with a repeating pattern of 1 2 3 4).
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/07/04 X27A-B-005-04
R[W] addr [count] Reads “count” of bytes or words from the address
specified by “addr”. If “count” is not specified,
then 16 bytes/words are read.
W[W] addr data . . . Writes bytes or words of data to address specified
by “addr”. Data can be multiple values
e.g. W 0 1 2 3 4 writes the byte values
1 2 3 4 starting at address 0).
IInitializes the chip with user specified
configuration.
M [bpp] Returns information about the current mode.
If “bpp” is specified then set the requested
color depth.
P 0|1|2 Sets software power save mode 0-2.
Power save mode 0 is normal operation.
H [lines] Halts after specified lines of display.
This feature halts the display during long
read operations to prevent
data from scrolling off the display.
Set 0 to disable.
QQuits this utility.
?Displays Help information.
13705PLAY Example
1. Type “13705PLAY” to start the program.
2. Type "?" for help.
3. Type "i" to initialize the registers.
4. Type "xa" to display the contents of the registers.
5. Type "x 5" to read register 5.
6. Type "x 3 10" to write 10 hex to register 3.
7. Type "f 0 400 aa" to fill the first 400 hex bytes of display memory with AA hex.
8. Type "f 0 14000 aa" to fill 80k bytes of display memory with AA hex.
9. Type "r 0 ff" to read the first 100 hex bytes of display memory.
10. Type "q" to exit the program.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility
X27A-B-005-04 Issue Date: 01/07/04
Scripting
13705PLAY can be driven by a script file. This is useful when:
• there is no standard display output to monitor command entry and results.
• various registers must be quickly changed faster than can achieved by typing.
• The same series of keystrokes is being entered time and again.
A script file is an ASCII text file with one 13705PLAY command per line. All scripts must
end with a “q” (quit) command in order to return control to the operating system. The semi-
colon is used as a comment delimitor. Everything on a line after the semi-colon will be
ignored.
On a PC platform, a typical script command line is: “13705PLAY < dumpregs.scr >
results”.
This causes the script file “dumpregs.scr” to be interpreted and the results to be sent to the
file “results.”
Example 1: The script file “dumpregs.scr” can be created with and text editor and will look
like the following:
; This file initializes the S1D13705 and reads the registers
i ; Initialize the registers.
xa ; Dump all the registers
la ; And the LUT
q ; Exit
Comments
• All numeric values are considered to be hexadecimal unless identified otherwise. For
example, 10 = 10h = 16 decimal; 10t = 10 decimal; 010b = 2 decimal.
• Redirecting commands from a script file (PC platform) allows those commands to be
executed as though they were typed.
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/07/04 X27A-B-005-04
Program Messages
>>> WARNING: DID NOT DETECT S1D13705 <<<
The HAL was unable to read the revision code register on the S1D13705. Ensure that the S1D13705
hardware is installed and that the hardware platform has been configured correctly. Also check that
the display memory address has been configured correctly.
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
13705PLAY was unable to load a required driver. The file S1D13XXX.VXD should be located in
x:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or in x:\WINNT\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in
the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-
xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred
This message indicates an error at the IO control layer occurred. The usual cause for this is an
incorrect hardware configuration.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error
This message should never be displayed, it indicates that 13705SHOW is unable to determine the
cause of an error returned from the HAL.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PLAY Diagnostic Utility
X27A-B-005-04 Issue Date: 01/07/04
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705BMP Demonstration Program
Document No. X27A-B-006-03
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705BMP Demonstration Program
X27A-B-006-03 Issue Date: 01/02/12
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705BMP Demonstration Program S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/12 X27A-B-006-03
13705BMP
13705BMP is a demonstration program for the S1D13705 which can read and display
.BMP format (Windows bitmap) files.
The 13705BMP display utility is designed to operate on an x86 based personal computer.
There are both 16-bit and 32-bit versions of 13705BMP. The 16-bit version is for use under
DOS when the S1D13705 evaluation board has been configured for D0000. The 32-bit
version is intended for use under Win32. Before use 13705BMP must be configured for the
display system. Consult documentation for the program 13705CFG.EXE which can be
used to configure 13705BMP.
13705BMP is not supported on non-PC platforms.
Installation
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705BMP.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13X0X.VXD
as described in the S1D13X0X 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705BMP.EXE to a directory that is in
the DOS path on your hard drive.
Usage
At the prompt, type:
13705bmp bmp_file [/a[time]] [/l] [/p] [/noinit] [/?].
Where: bmp_file the name of the file to display
/a[time] automatic mode returns to the operating system after “time” seconds. If time
is not specified the default is 5 seconds. This option is intended for use with
batch files to automate displaying a series of images.
/l override default configuration settings and set landscape display mode.
/p override default configuration settings and set portrait display mode.
/noinit bypass the register initialization and use the current setup
use this option to override changes that take place to the timing registers
/? displays the Help screen
Comments
• 13705BMP currently views only Windows BMP format images.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705BMP Demonstration Program
X27A-B-006-03 Issue Date: 01/02/12
Program Messages
ERROR: Did not find an S1D13705 device.
The HAL was unable to locate an S1D13705 at the configured address. Check that the correct
physical address was configured into 13705BMP.EXE
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
The file S1D13XXX.VXD is required by the 32-bit version of the 13705BMP. Check that the .VXD
file is in c:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in the S1D13XXX
32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred.
The device driver S1D13XXX.VXD was unable to assign memory. Check that the PC hardware is
configured correctly and that 13705BMP has been configured with the correct memory location.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error.
This error message should never bee seen. Contact ERD.
ERROR: Could not initialize device.
The HAL failed to initialize the S1D13705.
Failed to open .BMP file '?.....?'
13705BMP was unable to open the .BMP file ?.....? specified on the command line.
?.....? is not a valid bitmap file.
While performing validity checks it was determined that the file ?.....? is either not a valid .BMP file
or is of an unsupported format.
ERROR: Unable to set a suitable display mode.
13705BMP was unable to set a display mode to view the image with.
ERROR: Currently unable to process images greater than 8 bpp.
13705BMP can decode images of 8BPP or less color depth. Try reducing the color depth of your
image.
ERROR: Image larger than display memory size.
The amount of memory required by this image is more than the amount of memory available to the
S1D13705. Try choosing a smaller image.
ERROR: Unable to allocate enough memory to decode the image.
In order to decode a .BMP image 13705BMP needs to allocate some additional system memory.
This message is seen if the call to allocate additional memory fails.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
13705PWR Power Save Utility
Document No. X27A-B-007-03
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PWR Power Save Utility
X27A-B-007-03 Issue Date: 01/07/04
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
13705PWR Power Save Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/07/04 X27A-B-007-03
13705PWR
The 13705PWR Power Save Utility is a tool to assist in the testing of the software and
hardware power save modes.
Refer to the section titled “Power Save Modes” in the S1D13705 Programming Notes and
Examples manual, document number X27A-G-002-xx, and the S1D13705 Functional
Hardware Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for further information.
The 13705PWR utility must be configured and/or compiled to work with your hardware
platform. Consult documentation for the program 13705CFG.EXE which can be used to
configure 13705PWR.
This software is designed to work in both embedded and personal computer (PC) environ-
ments. For the embedded environment, it is assumed that the system has a means of
downloading software from the PC to the target platform. Typically this is done by serial
communications, where the PC uses a terminal program to send control commands and
information to the target processor. Alternatively, the PC can program an EPROM, which
is then placed in the target platform. Some target platforms can also communicate with the
PC via a parallel port connection, or an Ethernet connection.
S1D13705 Supported Evaluation Platforms
13705PWR has been designed to work with the following S1D13705 supported evaluation
platforms:
• PC system with an x86 processor. Both 16-bit and 32-bit code is supported.
• M68EC000IDP (Integrated Development Platform) board, revision 3.0, with a Motorola
M68EC000 processor.
• SH3-LCEVB board, revision B, with an Hitachi SH-3 HD6417780 processor.
If the platform you are using is different from the above, please see the S1D13705
“Programming Notes and Examples” manual, document number X27A-G-002-xx.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PWR Power Save Utility
X27A-B-007-03 Issue Date: 01/07/04
Installation
PC Platform
For 16-Bit Program Version: copy the file 13705PWR.EXE to a directory that is in the
DOS path on your hard drive.
For 32-Bit Program Version: install the 32-bit Windows device driver S1D13XXX.VXD
as described in the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide,
document number X00A-E-003-xx. Copy the file 13705PWR.EXE to a directory that is in
the DOS path on your hard drive.
Embedded Platform
Download the program 13705PWR to the system.
Usage
PC platform: at the prompt, type 13705pwr [s0] [s1] [h0] [h1].
Embedded platform: execute 13705pwr and at the prompt, type the command line
argument.
Where: s0 resets software power save mode
s1 sets software power save mode
h0 resets (disables) hardware power save mode (REG[03h] bit 2)
h1 sets (enables) hardware power save mode (REG[03h] bit 2)
/? displays this usage message
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
13705PWR Power Save Utility S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/07/04 X27A-B-007-03
Program Messages
ERROR: Did not find a 13705 device.
The HAL was unable to read the revision code register on the S1D13705. Ensure that the S1D13705
hardware is installed and that the hardware platform has been configured correctly. Also check that
the display memory address has been configured correctly.
ERROR: Unable to locate/load S1D13XXX.VXD
13705PLAY was unable to load a required driver. The file S1D13XXX.VXD should be located in
x:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM or in x:\WINNT\SYSTEM. If the file is not there, install it as described in
the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-
xx.
ERROR: An IOCTL error occurred
This message indicates an error at the IO control layer occurred. The usual cause for this is an
incorrect hardware configuration.
ERROR: The HAL returned an unknown error
This message should never be displayed, it indicates that 13705SHOW is unable to determine the
cause of an error returned from the HAL.
Software Power Save Mode set.
This message is a confirmation that the register setting to enable software power save mode has been
set.
Software Power Save Mode reset.
This message is a confirmation that the register setting to disable software power save mode has been
set.
Hardware Power Save Mode is now Enabled.
This message confirms that hardware initiated power save mode has been enabled. The S1D13705
will enter a hardware power save mode upon application of the appropriate logic level to the
hardware power save mode input pin.
Hardware Power Save Mode is now Disabled.
This message confirms that the register setting to disable hardware initiated power save mode has
been set. In this state the S1D13705 should ignore the state of the hardware power save mode input
pin.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 13705PWR Power Save Utility
X27A-B-007-03 Issue Date: 01/07/04
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
Document Number: X27A-E-001-03
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
WINDOWS® CE 2.x DISPLAY DRIVERS
The Windows CE display driver is designed to support the S1D13705 Embedded Memory
LCD Controller running under the Microsoft Windows CE 2.x operating system. The driver
is capable of: 4 and 8 bit-per-pixel landscape modes (no rotation), and 4 and 8 bit-per-pixel
SwivelView™ 270 degree mode.
This document and the source code for the Windows CE drivers are updated as appropriate.
Before beginning any development, please check the Epson Electronics America Website
at www.eea.epson.com or the Epson Research and Development Website at
www.erd.epson.com for the latest revisions.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
Example Driver Builds
The following sections describe how to build the Windows CE display driver for:
1. Windows CE 2.0 using a command-line interface.
2. Windows CE Platform Builder 2.1x using a command-line interface.
In all examples “x:” refers to the drive letter where Platform Builder is installed.
Build for CEPC (X86) on Windows CE 2.0 using a Command-Line Interface
To build a Windows CE v2.0 display driver for the CEPC (X86) platform using a
S5U13705B00C evaluation board, follow the instructions below:
1. Install Microsoft Windows NT v4.0 or 2000.
2. Install Microsoft Visual C/C++ version 5.0 or 6.0.
3. Install the Microsoft Windows CE Embedded Toolkit (ETK) by running SETUP.EXE
from the ETK compact disc #1.
4. Create a new project by following the procedure documented in “Creating a New
Project Directory” from the Windows CE ETK V2.0. Alternately, use the current
“DEMO7” project included with the ETK v2.0. Follow the steps below to create a
“X86 DEMO7” shortcut on the Windows NT v4.0 desktop which uses the current
“DEMO7” project:
a. Right click on the “Start” menu on the taskbar.
b. Click on the item “Open All Users” and the “Start Menu” window will come up.
c. Click on the icon “Programs”.
d. Click on the icon “Windows CE Embedded Development Kit”.
e. Drag the icon “X86 DEMO1” onto the desktop using the right mouse button.
f. Click on “Copy Here”.
g. Rename the icon “X86 DEMO1” on the desktop to “X86 DEMO7” by right click-
ing on the icon and choosing “rename”.
h. Right click on the icon “X86 DEMO7” and click on “Properties” to bring up the
“X86 DEMO7 Properties” window.
i. Click on “Shortcut” and replace the string “DEMO1” under the entry “Target”
with “DEMO7”.
j. Click on “OK” to finish.
5. Create a sub-directory named S1D13705 under x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\dis-
play.
6. Copy the source code to the S1D13705 subdirectory.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
7. Edit the file x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\dirs and add S1D13705 into the
list of directories.
8. Edit the file PLATFORM.BIB (located in x:\wince\platform\cepc\files) to set the de-
fault display driver to the file EPSON.DLL (EPSON.DLL will be created during the
build in step 13).
Replace or comment out the following lines in PLATFORM.BIB:
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA2BPP
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_vga2.dll NK SH
ENDIF
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA8BPP
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_vga8.dll NK SH
ENDIF
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA2BPP !
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA8BPP !
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_s364.dll NK SH
ENDIF
ENDIF
with this line:
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\EPSON.dll NK SH
9. The file MODE0.H (located in x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705)
contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, color depth (bpp),
display type, active display (LCD/CRT/TV), display rotation, etc.
Before building the display driver, refer to the descriptions in the file MODE0.H for
the default settings of the driver. If the default does not match the configuration you
are building for then MODE0.H will have to be regenerated with the correct informa-
tion.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the header file. For information on how to use
13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, document
number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, export the file as a “C Header File for
S1D13705 WinCE Drivers”. Save the new configuration as MODE0.H in
x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705, replacing the original configura-
tion file.
10. Edit the file PLATFORM.REG to match the screen resolution, color depth (bpp), ac-
tive display (LCD/CRT/TV) and rotation information in MODE.H. PLAT-
FORM.REG is
located in x:\wince\platform\cepc\files.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
For example, the display driver section of PLATFORM.REG should be as follows
when using a 320x240 LCD panel with a color depth of 8 bpp in SwivelView 0°
(landscape) mode:
; Default for EPSON Display Driver
; 320x240 at 8 bits/pixel, LCD display, no rotation
; Useful Hex Values
; 1024=0x400, 768=0x300 640=0x280 480=0x1E0 320=140 240=0xF0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
"Width"=dword:140
"Height"=dword:F0
"Bpp"=dword:8
“ActiveDisp”=dword:1
“Rotation”=dword:0
11. Delete all the files in the x:\wince\release directory, and delete x:\wince\plat-
form\cepc\*.bif
12. Generate the proper building environment by double-clicking on the sample project
icon (i.e. X86 DEMO7).
13. Type BLDDEMO <ENTER> at the command prompt of the X86 DEMO7 window to
generate a Windows CE image file (NK.BIN).
Build for CEPC (X86) on Windows CE Platform Builder 2.1x using a Command-Line Interface
Throughout this section 2.1x refers to either 2.11 or 2.12 as appropriate.
1. Install Microsoft Windows NT v4.0 or 2000.
2. Install Microsoft Visual C/C++ version 5.0 or 6.0.
3. Install Platform Builder 2.1x by running SETUP.EXE from compact disk #1.
4. Follow the steps below to create a “Build Epson for x86” shortcut which uses the
current “Minshell” project icon/shortcut on the Windows desktop.
a. Right click on the “Start” menu on the taskbar.
b. Click on the item “Explore”, and “Exploring -- Start Menu” window will come
up.
c. Under “x:\winnt\profiles\all users\start menu\programs\microsoft windows ce
platform builder\x86 tools”, find the icon “Build Minshell for x86”.
d. Drag the icon “Build Minshell for x86” onto the desktop using the right mouse
button.
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
e. Choose “Copy Here”.
f. Rename the icon “Build Minshell for x86” to “Build Epson for x86” by right
clicking on the icon and choosing “rename”.
g. Right click on the icon “Build Epson for x86” and click on “Properties” to bring
up the “Build Epson for x86 Properties” window.
h. Click on “Shortcut” and replace the string “Minshell” under the entry “Target”
with “Epson”.
i. Click on “OK” to finish.
5. Create an EPSON project.
a. Make an Epson directory under x:\wince\public.
b. Copy MAXALL and its sub-directories (x:\wince\public\maxall) to the Epson di-
rectory.
xcopy /s /e x:\wince\public\maxall\*.* \wince\public\epson
c. Rename x:\wince\public\epson\maxall.bat to epson.bat.
d. Edit EPSON.BAT to add the following lines to the end of the file:
@echo on
set CEPC_DDI_S1D13705=1
@echo off
6. Make an S1D13705 directory under x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display, and copy
the S1D13705 driver source code into x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\dis-
play\S1D13705.
7. Edit the file x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\dirs and add S1D13705 into the
list of directories.
8. Edit the file x:\wince\platform\cepc\files\platform.bib and make the following two
changes:
a. Insert the following text after the line “IF ODO_NODISPLAY !”:
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13705
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\epson.dll NK SH
ENDIF
b. Find the section shown below, and insert the lines as marked:
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13705 ! Insert this line
IF CEPC_DDI_S3VIRGE !
IF CEPC_DDI_CT655X !
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA8BPP !
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_s364.dll NK SH
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF Insert this line
9. The file MODE0.H (located in x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705)
contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, color depth (bpp),
display type, active display (LCD/CRT/TV), display rotation, etc.
Before building the display driver, refer to the descriptions in the file MODE0.H for
the default settings of the driver. If the default does not match the configuration you
are building for then MODE0.H will have to be regenerated with the correct informa-
tion.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the header file. For information on how to use
13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, document
number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, export the file as a “C Header File for
S1D13705 WinCE Drivers”. Save the new configuration as MODE0.H in
x:\wince\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705, replacing the original configura-
tion file.
10. Edit the file PLATFORM.REG to match the screen resolution, color depth (bpp), ac-
tive display (LCD/CRT/TV) and rotation information in MODE.H. PLAT-
FORM.REG is located in x:\wince\platform\cepc\files.
For example, the display driver section of PLATFORM.REG should be as follows
when using a 320x240 LCD panel with a color depth of 8 bpp in SwivelView 0°
(landscape) mode:
; Default for EPSON Display Driver
; 320x240 at 8 bits/pixel, LCD display, no rotation
; Useful Hex Values
; 1024=0x400, 768=0x300 640=0x280 480=0x1E0 320=140 240=0xF0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
"Width"=dword:140
"Height"=dword:F0
"Bpp"=dword:8
“ActiveDisp”=dword:1
“Rotation”=dword:0
11. Delete all the files in \wince\release directory and delete x:\wince\platform\cepc\*.bif
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
12. Generate the proper building environment by double-clicking on the Epson project
icon --”Build Epson for x86”.
13. Type BLDDEMO <ENTER> at the command prompt of the “Build Epson for x86”
window to generate a Windows CE image file (NK.BIN).
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
Installation for CEPC Environment
Once the NK.BIN file is built, the CEPC environment can be started by booting either from a
floppy or hard drive configured with a Windows 9x operating system. The two methods are
described below.
1. To start CEPC after booting from a floppy drive:
a. Create a bootable floppy disk.
b. Edit CONFIG.SYS on the floppy disk to contain only the following line:
device=a:\himem.sys
c. Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT on the floppy disk to contain the following lines:
mode com1:9600,n,8,1
loadcepc /B:9600 /C:1 c:\nk.bin
d. Copy LOADCEPC.EXE and HIMEM.SYS to the bootable floppy disk. Search for
the loadCEPC utility in your Windows CE directories.
e. Copy NK.BIN to c:\.
f. Boot the system from the bootable floppy disk.
2. To start CEPC after booting from a hard drive:
a. Copy LOADCEPC.EXE to C:\. Search for the loadCEPC utility in your Windows
CE directories.
b. Edit CONFIG.SYS on the hard drive to contain only the following line:
device=c:\himem.sys
c. Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT on the hard drive to contain the following lines:
mode com1:9600,n,8,1
loadcepc /B:9600 /C:1 c:\nk.bin
d. Copy NK.BIN and HIMEM.SYS to c:\.
e. Boot the system.
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
Configuration
There are several issues to consider when configuring the display driver. The issues cover
debugging support, register initialization values and memory allocation. Each of these
issues is discussed in the following sections.
Compile Switches
There are several switches, specific to the S1D13705 display driver, which affect the
display driver.
The switches are added or removed from the compile options in the file SOURCES.
WINCEVER
This option is automatically set to the numerical version of WinCE for version 2.12 or later.
If the environment variable, _WINCEOSVER is not defined, then WINCEVER will
default 2.11. The display driver may test against this option to support different WinCE
version-specific features.
DEBUG_MONITOR
This option enables the use of the debug monitor. The debug monitor can be invoked when
the display driver is first loaded and can be used to view registers, and perform a few
debugging tasks. The debug monitor is still under development and is untested.
This option should remain disabled unless you are performing specific debugging tasks that
require the debug monitor.
TEST_BITMAP
This option allows the debug monitor to display a test bitmap. This bitmap is big and will
make the display driver considerably larger. The flag DEBUG_MONITOR must also be
enabled for this option to work.
This option should be disabled unless the image is required for debugging.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
Mode File
A second variable which will affect the finished display driver is the register configurations
contained in the mode file.
The MODE tables (contained in files MODE0.H, MODE1.H, MODE2.H . . .) contain
register information to control the desired display mode. The MODE tables must be
generated by the configuration program 13705CFG.EXE. The display driver comes with
example MODE tables.
By default, only MODE0.H is used by the display driver. New mode tables can be created
using the 13705CFG program. Edit the #include section of MODE.H to add the new mode
table.
If you only support a single display mode, you do not need to add any information to the
WinCE registry. If, however, you support more that one display mode, you should create
registry values (see below) that will establish the initial display mode. If your display driver
contains multiple mode tables, and if you do not add any registry values, the display driver
will default to the first mode table in your list.
To select which display mode the display driver should use upon boot, add the following
lines to your PLATFORM.REG file:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
“Width”=dword:140
“Height”=dword:F0
“Bpp”=dword:8
“Rotation”=dword:0
“RefreshRate”=dword:3C
“Flags”=dword:1
Note that all dword values are in hexadecimal, therefore 140h = 320, F0h = 240, and 3Ch
= 60. The value for “Flags” should be 1 (LCD). When the display driver starts, it will read
these values in the registry and attempt to match a mode table against them. All values must
be present and valid for a match to occur, otherwise the display driver will default to the
FIRST mode table in your list.
A WinCE desktop application (or control panel applet) can change these registry values,
and the display driver will select a different mode upon warmboot. This allows the display
driver to support different display configurations and/or orientations. An example appli-
cation that controls these registry values will be made available upon the next release of the
display driver; preliminary alpha code is available by special request.
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/06/07 X27A-E-001-03
Comments
• The display driver is CPU independent, allowing use of the driver for several Windows
CE Platform Builder supported platforms.
• When using 13705CFG.EXE to produce multiple MODE tables, make sure you change
the Mode Number in the WinCE tab for each mode table you generate. The display
driver supports multiple mode tables, but only if each mode table has a unique mode
number.
• At this time, the drivers have been tested on the x86 CPUs and have been run with
version 2.0 of the ETK, Platform Builder v2.1x.
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 2.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-001-03 Issue Date: 01/06/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Wind River WindML v2.0 Display
Drivers
Document Number: X27A-E-002-03
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River WindML v2.0 Display Drivers
X27A-E-002-03 Issue Date: 01/04/06
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Wind River WindML v2.0 Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/04/06 X27A-E-002-03
Wind River WindML v2.0 DISPLAY DRIVERS
The Wind River WindML v2.0 display drivers for the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD
Controller are intended as “reference” source code for OEMs developing for Wind River’s
WindML v2.0. The driver package provides support for 8 bit-per-pixel color depth. The
source code is written for portability and contains functionality for most features of the
S1D13705. Source code modification is required to provide a smaller, more efficient driver
for mass production (e.g. SwivelView™ support may be removed for products not
requiring display rotation).
The WindML display drivers are designed around a common configuration include file
called mode0.h which is generated by the configuration utility 13705CFG. This design
allows for easy customization of clocks, decode addresses, rotation, etc. by OEMs. For
further information on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User
Manual, document number X27A-B-001-xx.
Note
The WindML display drivers are provided as “reference” source code only. They are in-
tended to provide a basis for OEMs to develop their own drivers for WindML v2.0.
These drivers are not backwards compatible with UGL v1.2. For information on the
UGL v1.2 display drivers, see Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers, document number
X27A-E-003-xx.
This document and the source code for the WindML display drivers is updated as appro-
priate. Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com
or the Epson Research and Development website at http://www.erd.epson.com for the latest
revisions before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River WindML v2.0 Display Drivers
X27A-E-002-03 Issue Date: 01/04/06
Building a WindML v2.0 Display Driver
The following instructions produce a bootable disk that automatically starts the UGL demo
program. These instructions assume that Wind River’s Tornado platform is already
installed.
Note
For the example steps where the drive letter is given as “x:”. Substitute “x” with the
drive letter that your development environment is on.
1. Create a working directory and unzip the WindML display driver into it.
From a command prompt or GUI interface create a new directory (e.g. x:\13705).
Unzip the file 13705windml.zip to the newly created working directory. The files will
be unzipped to the directory “x:\13705\8bpp”.
2. Configure for the target execution model.
This example build creates a VxWorks image that fits onto and boots from a single
floppy diskette. In order for the VxWorks image to fit on the disk certain modifica-
tions are required.
Replace the file “x:\Tornado\target\config\pcPentium\config.h” with the file
“x:\13705\8bpp\File\config.h”. The new config.h file removes networking compo-
nents and configures the build image for booting from a floppy disk.
Note
Rather than simply replacing the original config.h file, rename it so the file can be kept
for reference purposes.
3. Build a boot ROM image.
From the Tornado tool bar, select Build -> Build Boot ROM. Select “pcPentium” as
the BSP and “bootrom_uncmp” as the image.
4. Create a bootable disk (in drive A:).
From a command prompt change to the directory “x:\Tornado\host\x86-win32\bin”
and run the batch file torvars.bat. Next, change to the directory “x:\Tornado\tar-
get\config\pcPentium” and type:
mkboot a: bootrom_uncmp
5. If necessary, generate a new mode0.h configuration file.
The file mode0.h contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, col-
or depth (bpp), display type (passive or active matrix), rotation, etc. The mode0.h file
included with the drivers, may not contain applicable values and must be regenerated.
The configuration program 13705CFG can be used to build a new mode0.h file. If
building for 8 bpp, place the new mode0.h file in the directory “x:\13705\8bpp\File”.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Wind River WindML v2.0 Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/04/06 X27A-E-002-03
Note
Mode0.h should be created using the configuration utility 13705CFG. For more infor-
mation on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, docu-
ment number X27A-B-001-xx available at www.erd.epson.com.
6. Build the WindML v2.0 library.
From a command prompt change to the directory “x:\Tornado\host\x86-win32\bin”
and run the batch file torvars.bat. Next, change to the directory “x:\Tornado\tar-
get\src\ugl” and type the command:
make CPU=PENTIUM ugl
7. Open the S1D13705 workspace.
From the Tornado tool bar, select File->Open Workspace...->Existing->Browse... and
select the file “x:\13705\8bpp\13705.wsp”.
8. Add support for single line comments.
The WindML v2.0 display driver source code uses single line comment notation, “//”,
rather than the ANSI conventional comments, “/*...*/”.
To add support for single line comments follow these steps:
a. In the Tornado “Workspace Views” window, click on the “Builds” tab.
b. Expand the “8bpp Builds” view by clicking on the “+” next to it. The ex-
panded view will contain the item “default”. Right-click on “default” and
select “Properties...”. A “Properties:” window will appear.
c. Select the “C/C++ compiler” tab to display the command switches used in
the build. Remove the “-ansi” switch from the line that contains “-g -mpen-
tium -ansi -nostdinc -DRW_MULTI_THREAD”.
(Refer to GNU ToolKit user's guide for details)
9. Compile the VxWorks image.
Select the “Builds” tab in the Tornado “Workspace Views” window.
Right-click on “8bpp files” and select “Dependencies...”. Click on “OK” to regenerate
project file dependencies for “All Project files”.
Right-click on “8bpp files” and select “ReBuild All(vxWorks)” to build VxWorks.
10. Copy the VxWorks file to the diskette.
From a command prompt or through the Windows interface, copy the file
“x:\13705\8bpp\default\vxWorks” to the bootable disk created in step 4.
11. Start the VxWorks demo.
Boot the target PC with the VxWorks bootable diskette to run the UGLDEMO auto-
matically.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River WindML v2.0 Display Drivers
X27A-E-002-03 Issue Date: 01/04/06
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers
Document Number: X27A-E-003-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers
X27A-E-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-E-003-02
Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers
The Wind River UGL v1.2 display drivers for the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD
Controller are intended as “reference” source code for OEMs developing for Wind River’s
UGL v1.2. The drivers provide support for 8 bit-per-pixel color depth. The source code is
written for portability and contains functionality for most features of the S1D13705. Source
code modification is required to provide a smaller, more efficient driver for mass
production.
The UGL display drivers are designed around a common configuration include file called
mode0.h which is generated by the configuration utility 13705CFG. This design allows for
easy customization of display type, clocks, addresses, rotation, etc. by OEMs. For further
information on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual,
document number X27A-B-001-xx.
This document and the source code for the UGL display drivers are updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com or the
Epson Research and Development website at http://www.erd.epson.com for the latest
revisions before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via e-mail at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers
X27A-E-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
Building a UGL v1.2 Display Driver
The following instructions produce a bootable disk that automatically starts the UGL demo
software. These instructions assume that the Wind River Tornado platform is correctly
installed.
Note
For the example steps where the drive letter is given as “x:”. Substitute “x” with the
drive letter that your development environment is on.
1. Create a working directory and unzip the UGL display driver into it.
Using a command prompt or GUI interface create a new directory (e.g. x:\13705).
Unzip the file 13705ugl.zip to the newly created working directory. The files will be
unzipped to the directory “x:\13705\8bpp”.
2. Configure for the target execution model.
This example build creates a VxWorks image that fits onto and boots from a single
floppy diskette. In order for the VxWorks image to fit on the disk certain modifica-
tions are required.
Replace the file “x:\Tornado\target\config\pcPentium\config.h” with the file
“x:\13705\8bpp\File\config.h”. The new config.h file removes networking compo-
nents and configures the build image for booting from a floppy disk.
Note
Rather than simply replacing the original config.h file, rename it so the file can be kept
for reference purposes.
3. Build a boot ROM image.
From the Tornado tool bar, select Build -> Build Boot ROM. Select “pcPentium” as
the BSP and “bootrom_uncmp” as the image.
4. Create a bootable disk (in drive A:).
From a command prompt in the directory “x:\Tornado\target\config\pcPentium” type
mkboot a: bootrom_uncmp
5. If necessary, generate a new mode0.h configuration file.
The file mode0.h contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, col-
or depth (bpp), display type, rotation, etc. The mode0.h, included with the drivers,
sets the display for 256x64 190 Hz output to an LCD display.
If this setting is inappropriate then mode0.h must be regenerated. The configuration
program 13705CFG can be used to build a new mode0.h file. Place the new mode0.h
file in “x:\13705\8bpp\File”.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-E-003-02
Note
Mode0.h should be created using the configuration utility 13705CFG. For more infor-
mation on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, docu-
ment number X27A-B-001-xx available at www.erd.epson.com.
6. Open the S1D13705 workspace.
From the Tornado tool bar, select File->Open Workspace...->Existing->Browse... and
select the file “x:\13705\8bpp\13705.wsp”.
7. Add support for single line comments.
The UGL v1.2 display driver source code uses single line comment notation, “//”,
rather than the ANSI conventional comments, “/* . . . */”.
To add support for single line comments follow these steps:
a. In the Tornado “Workspace” window, click on the “Builds” tab.
b. Expand the “8bpp Builds” view by clicking on the “+” next to it. The
expanded view will contain the item “default”. Right-click on “de-
fault” and select “Properties...”. A properties window will appear.
c. Select the “C/C++ compiler” tab to display the command switches
used in the build. Remove the “-ansi” switch from the line that con-
tains “-g -mpentium -ansi -nostdinc -DRW_MULTI_THREAD”.
(Refer to GNU ToolKit user's guide for details)
8. Compile the VxWorks image.
Select the “Files” tab in the Tornado “Workspace” window.
Right-click on “8bpp files” and select “Dependencies...”. Click on “OK” to regenerate
project file dependencies for “All Project files”.
Right-click on “8bpp files” and select “ReBuild All(vxWorks)” to build VxWorks.
9. Copy the VxWorks file to the diskette.
From a command prompt or through the Windows interface, copy the file
“x:\13705\8bpp\default\vxWorks” to the bootable disk created in step 4.
10. Start the VxWorks demo.
Boot the target PC with the VxWorks bootable diskette to run the UGLDEMO auto-
matically.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Wind River UGL v1.2 Display Drivers
X27A-E-003-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Linux Console Driver
Document Number: X27A-E-004-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Linux Console Driver
X27A-E-004-02 Issue Date: 01/09/19
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Linux Console Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/19 X27A-E-004-02
Linux Console Driver
The Linux console driver for the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller is
intended as “reference” source code for OEMs developing for Linux, and supports 4 and 8
bit-per-pixel color depths.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) such as Gnome can obtain the frame buffer address from
this driver allowing the Linux GUI the ability to update the display.
The console driver is designed around a common configuration include file called
s1d13705.h, which is generated by the configuration utility 13705CFG. This design allows
for easy customization of display type, clocks, decode addresses, rotation, etc. by OEMs.
For further information on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User
Manual, document number X27A-B-001-xx.
Note
The Linux console driver is provided as “reference” source code only. The driver is in-
tended to provide a basis for OEMs to develop their own drivers for Linux.
This document and the source code for the Linux console drivers are updated as appro-
priate. Please check the Epson Research and Development website at
http://www.erd.epson.com for the latest revisions or before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via e-mail at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Linux Console Driver
X27A-E-004-02 Issue Date: 01/09/19
Building the Console Driver for Linux Kernel 2.2.x
Follow the steps below to construct a copy of the Linux operating system using the
S1D13705 as the console display device. These instructions assume that the GNU devel-
opment environment is installed and the user is familiar with GNU and the Linux operating
system.
1. Acquire the Linux kernel source code.
You can obtain the Linux kernel source code from your Linux supplier or download
the source from: ftp://ftp.kernel.org.
The S1D13705 reference driver requires Linux kernel 2.2.x or greater. The example
S1D13705 reference driver available on www.erd.epson.com was built using Red Hat
Linux 6.1, kernel version 2.2.17.
For information on building the kernel refer to the readme file at:
ftp://ftp.linuxberg.com/pub/linux/kernel/README
Note
Before continuing with modifications for the S1D13705, you should ensure that you can
build and start the Linux operating system.
2. Unzip the console driver files.
Using a zip file utility, unzip the S1D13705 archive to a temporary directory. (e.g.
/tmp)
When completed the files:
s1d13xxxfb.c
s1d13705.h
Config.in
fbmem.c
fbcon-cfb4.c, and
Makefile
should be located in the temporary directory.
3. Copy the console driver files to the build directory.
Copy the files
/tmp/s1d13xxxfb.c and
/tmp/s1d13705.h
to the directory /usr/src/linux/drivers/video.
Copy the remaining source files
/tmp/Config.in
/tmp/fbmem.c
/tmp/fbcon-cfb4.c, and
/tmp/Makefile
into the directory /usr/src/linux/drivers/video replacing the files of the same name.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Linux Console Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/19 X27A-E-004-02
If your kernel version is not 2.2.17 or you want to retain greater control of the build
process then use a text editor and cut and paste the sections dealing with the Epson
driver in the corresponding files of the same names.
4. Modify s1d13705.h
The file s1d13705.h contains the register values required to set the screen resolution,
color depth (bpp), display type, display rotation, etc.
Before building the console driver, refer to the descriptions in the file s1d13705.h for
the default settings of the console driver. If the default does not match the configura-
tion you are building for then s1d13705.h will have to be regenerated with the correct
information.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the required header file. For information on
how to use 13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual,
document number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, choose “File->Export” and select the “C
Header File for S1D13705 Generic Drivers” option. Save the new configuration as
s1d13705.h in the /usr/src/linux/drivers/video, replacing the original configuration
file.
5. Configure the video options.
From the command prompt in the directory /usr/src/linux run the command:
make menuconfig
This command will start a text based interface which allows the selection of build time
parameters. From the text interface under “Console drivers” options, select:
“Support for frame buffer devices”
“Epson LCD/CRT controllers support”
“S1D13705 support”
“Advanced low level driver options”
“xBpp packed pixels support” *
* where x is the color depth being compile for.
Once you have configured the kernel options, save and exit the configuration utility.
6. Compile and install the kernel
Build the kernel with the following sequence of commands:
make dep
make clean
make bzImage
/sbin/lilo (if running lilo)
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Linux Console Driver
X27A-E-004-02 Issue Date: 01/09/19
7. Boot to the Linux operating system
If you are using lilo (Linux Loader), modify the lilo configuration file as discussed in
the kernel build README file. If there were no errors during the build, from the com-
mand prompt run:
lilo
and reboot your system.
Note
In order to use the S1D13705 console driver with X server, you need to configure the X
server to use the FBDEV device. A good place to look for the necessary files and in-
structions on this process is on the Internet at www.xfree86.org
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Linux Console Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/19 X27A-E-004-02
Building the Console Driver for Linux Kernel 2.4.x
Follow the steps below to construct a copy of the Linux operating system using the
S1D13705 as the console display device. These instructions assume that the GNU devel-
opment environment is installed and the user is familiar with GNU and the Linux operating
system.
1. Acquire the Linux kernel source code.
You can obtain the Linux kernel source code from your Linux supplier or download
the source from: ftp://ftp.kernel.org.
The S1D13705 reference driver requires Linux kernel 2.4.x or greater. The example
S1D13705 reference driver available on www.erd.epson.com was built using Red Hat
Linux 6.1, kernel version 2.4.5.
For information on building the kernel refer to the readme file at:
ftp://ftp.linuxberg.com/pub/linux/kernel/README
Note
Before continuing with modifications for the S1D13705, you should ensure that you can
build and start the Linux operating system.
2. Unzip the console driver files.
Using a zip file utility, unzip the S1D13705 archive to a temporary directory. (e.g.
/tmp)
When completed the files:
Config.in
fbmem.c
fbcon-cfb4.c
Makefile
should be located in the temporary directory (/tmp), and the files:
Makefile
s1d13xxxfb.c
s1d13705.h
should be located in a sub-directory called epson within the temporary directory
(/tmp/epson).
3. Copy the console driver files to the build directory. Make the directory
/usr/src/linux/drivers/video/epson.
Copy the files
/tmp/epson/s1d13xxxfb.c
/tmp/epson/s1d13705.h
/tmp/epson/Makefile
to the directory /usr/src/linux/drivers/video/epson.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Linux Console Driver
X27A-E-004-02 Issue Date: 01/09/19
Copy the remaining source files
/tmp/Config.in
/tmp/fbmem.c
/tmp/fbcon-cfb4.c
/tmp/Makefile
into the directory /usr/src/linux/drivers/video replacing the files of the same name.
If your kernel version is not 2.4.5 or you want to retain greater control of the build
process then use a text editor and cut and paste the sections dealing with the Epson
driver in the corresponding files of the same names.
4. Modify s1d13705.h
The file s1d13705.h contains the register values required to set the screen resolution,
color depth (bpp), display type, display rotation, etc.
Before building the console driver, refer to the descriptions in the file s1d13705.h for
the default settings of the console driver. If the default does not match the configura-
tion you are building for then s1d13705.h will have to be regenerated with the correct
information.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the required header file. For information on
how to use 13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual,
document number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, choose “File->Export” and select the “C
Header File for S1D13705 Generic Drivers” option. Save the new configuration as
s1d13705.h in the /usr/src/linux/drivers/video, replacing the original configuration
file.
5. Configure the video options.
From the command prompt in the directory /usr/src/linux run the command:
make menuconfig
This command will start a text based interface which allows the selection of build time
parameters. From the options presented select:
“Code maturity level” options
“Prompt for development and/or incomplete drivers”
“Console drivers” options
“Frame-buffer support”
“Support for frame buffer devices (EXPERIMENTAL)”
“EPSON LCD/CRT/TV controller support”
“EPSON S1D13705 Support”
“Advanced low-level driver options”
“xbpp packed pixels support” *
* where x is the color depth being compile for.
Once you have configured the kernel options, save and exit the configuration utility.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Linux Console Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/19 X27A-E-004-02
6. Compile and install the kernel
Build the kernel with the following sequence of commands:
make dep
make clean
make bzImage
/sbin/lilo (if running lilo)
7. Boot to the Linux operating system
If you are using lilo (Linux Loader), modify the lilo configuration file as discussed in
the kernel build README file. If there were no errors during the build, from the com-
mand prompt run:
lilo
and reboot your system.
Note
In order to use the S1D13705 console driver with X server, you need to configure the X
server to use the FBDEV device. A good place to look for the necessary files and in-
structions on this process is on the Internet at www.xfree86.org
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Linux Console Driver
X27A-E-004-02 Issue Date: 01/09/19
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver
Document Number: X27A-E-005-01
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver
X27A-E-005-01 Issue Date: 01/09/10
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/10 X27A-E-005-01
QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver
The Photon v2.0 display drivers for the S1D13705 Color LCD Controller are intended as
“reference” source code for OEMs developing for QNX platforms. The driver package
provides support for 8 bit-per-pixel color depths. The source code is written for portability
and contains functionality for most features of the S1D13705. Source code modification is
required to provide a smaller driver for mass production.
The current revision of the driver is designed for use with either QNX RTP or QNX4 from
the latest product CD (Dec. 99).
The Photon v2.0 display driver is designed around a common configuration include file
called S1D13705.h, which is generated by the configuration utility 13705CFG. This design
allows for easy customization of display type, clocks, decode addresses, etc. by OEMs. For
further information on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User
Manual, document number X27A-B-001-xx.
Note
The QNX display drivers are provided as “reference” source code only. They are intend-
ed to provide a basis for OEMs to develop their own drivers for QNX Photon v2.0.
This document and the source code for the QNX display drivers are updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com or the
Epson Research and Development website at http://www.erd.epson.com for the latest
revisions before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via e-mail at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver
X27A-E-005-01 Issue Date: 01/09/10
Building the Photon v2.0 Display Driver
The following steps build the Photon v2.0 display driver and integrate it into the QNX
operating system. These instructions assume the QNX developer environment is correctly
installed and the developer is familiar with building for the QNX operating system.
Unpack the Graphics Driver Development Kit Archive
1. Install the QNX ddk package using the Package Manager utility.
For information about the Drivers Development Kit contact QNX directly.
2. Once the ddk package is installed, copy the directory tree /usr/src/gddk_v1.0 into the
Project directory.
3. Change directory to Project/gddk_1.0/devg.
4. Unpack the display driver files using the commands:
#gunzip S1D13705.tar.gz
#tar –xvf S1D13705.tar
This unpacks the files into the directory Project/gddk_1.0/devg/S1D13705.
Configure the Driver
The file s1d13705_8.h contains register values required to set the screen resolution, color
depth (bpp), display type, etc. The s1d13705.h file included with the drivers may not
contain applicable values and must be regenerated. The configuration program 13705CFG
can be used to build new s1d13705_8.h files.
Note
S1d13705.h should be created using the configuration utility 13705CFG. For more in-
formation on 13705CFG, see the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual,
document number X27A-B-001-xx available at www.erd.epson.com.
Build the Driver
The first time the driver is built, the following command ensures that all drivers and
required libraries are built. At the root of the Project source tree, type make.
Note
To build drivers for X86 NTO type ‘OSLIST=nto CPULIST=x86 make’.
Further builds do not require all libraries to be re-built. To build only the S1D13705 display
driver, change to the directory gddk_1.0/devg/S1D13705 and type make.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/09/10 X27A-E-005-01
Installing the Driver
The build step produces two library images:
• lib/disputil/nto/x86/so/libdisputil.so
• lib/ffb/nto/x86/so/libffb.so
For the loader to locate them, the files need to be renamed and copied to the lib directory.
1. Rename libdisputil.so to libdisputil.so.1 and libffb.so to libffb.so.1.
2. Copy the files new files libdisputil.so.1 and libffb.so.1 to the directory /usr/lib.
3. Copy the file devg-S1D13705.so to the /lib/dll directory.
Note
To locate the file devg-S1D13705.so, watch the output of the ‘true’ command during the
makefile build.
4. Modify the trap file graphics-modes in the /etc/system/config directory by inserting
the following lines at the top of the file.
io-graphics -dldevg-S1D13705.so -g320x240x8 -I0 -d0x0,0x0;#320,240,8 Epson
Run the Driver
Note
For the remaining steps the S5U13705B00C evaluation board must be installed on the
test platform.
Note
Because this is an ISA board, a memory hole must be created in the 15 megabyte range.
This is done in the BIOS settings.
It is recommended that the driver be verified before starting QNX with the S1D13705 as
the primary display. To verify the driver:
1. Copy the data file from the services/graphics/tests/bench directory to the current di-
rectory. Use test8.raw for 8-bpp.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 QNX Photon v2.0 Display Driver
X27A-E-005-01 Issue Date: 01/09/10
2. Type the following command at the root of the Project source tree (gddk_v1.00 direc-
tory):
services/graphics/tests/bench/nto/x86/o/bench -dlhardware/devg/S1D13705/
nto/x86/dll/devg-S1D13705.so -mW,H,C,F -d0x0,0x0
Where:
W is the configured width of the display
H is the configured height of the display
C is the color depth in bpp (i.e. 8)
F is the configured frame rate
This command starts the bench utility which will initialize the driver as the secondary
display and exercise the drivers main functions. If the display appears satisfactory, restart
QNX Photon and the restart will result in the S1D13705 display driver becoming the
primary display device.
Comments
• To restore the display driver to the default, comment out changes made to the trap file
graphics-trapfile.
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver
Installation Guide
Document No. X00A-E-003-04
Copyright © 1999, 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
X00A-E-003-04 Issue Date: 01/04/17
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
Issue Date: 01/04/17 X00A-E-003-04
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver
Installation Guide
This manual describes the installation of the Windows 9x/ME/NT 4.0/2000 device drivers
for the S5U13xxxB00x series of Epson Evaluation Boards.
The file S1D13XXX.VXD is required for using the Epson supplied Intel32 evaluation and
test programs for the S1D13xxx family of LCD controllers with Windows 9x/ME.
The file S1D13XXX.SYS is required for using the Epson supplied Intel32 evaluation and
test programs for the S1D13xxx family of LCD controllers with Windows NT 4.0/2000.
The file S1D13XXX.INF is the install script.
For updated drivers, ask your Sales Representative or visit Epson Electronics America on
the World Wide Web at www.eea.epson.com.
Driver Requirements
Installation
Windows NT Version 4.0
All evaluation boards require the driver to be installed as follows.
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Copy the files S1D13XXX.INF and S1D13XXX.SYS to a directory on a local hard
drive.
3. Right click your mouse on the file S1D13XXX.INF and select INSTALL from the
menu.
4. Windows will install the device driver and ask you to restart.
Video Controller : S1D13xxx
Display Type : N/A
BIOS : N/A
DOS Program : No
Dos Version : N/A
Windows Program : Yes, Windows 9x/ME/NT 4.0/2000 device driver
Windows DOS Box : N/A
Windows Full Screen : N/A
OS/2 : N/A
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
X00A-E-003-04 Issue Date: 01/04/17
Windows 2000
All PCI Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Windows will detect the new hardware as a new PCI Device and bring up the FOUND
NEW HARDWARE dialog box.
3. Click NEXT.
4. The New Hardware Wizard will bring up the dialog box to search for a suitable driver.
5. Click NEXT.
6. When Windows does not find the driver it will allow you to specify the location of it.
Type the driver location or select BROWSE to find it.
7. Click NEXT.
8. Windows 2000 will open the installation file and show the option EPSON PCI Bridge
Card. Select this file and click OPEN.
9. Windows then shows the path to the file. Click OK.
10. Click NEXT.
11. Click FINISH.
All ISA Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Go to the CONTROL PANEL and select ADD/REMOVE HARDWARE, click
NEXT.
3. Select ADD/TROUBLESHOOT A DEVICE, and click NEXT. Windows 2000 will
attempt to detect any new plug and play device and fail.
4. The CHOOSE HARDWARE DEVICE dialog box appears. Select ADD NEW
HARDWARE and click NEXT.
5. Select NO I WANT TO SELECT FROM A LIST and click NEXT.
6. Select OTHER DEVICE from the list and click NEXT.
7. Click HAVE DISK.
8. Specify the location of the driver files, select the S1D13XXX INF file and click
OPEN.
9. Click OK.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
Issue Date: 01/04/17 X00A-E-003-04
Windows 98/ME
All PCI Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Windows will detect the new hardware as a new PCI Device and bring up the ADD
NEW HARDWARE dialog box.
3. Click NEXT.
4. Windows will look for the driver. When Windows does not find the driver it will al-
low you to specify the location of it. Type the driver location or select BROWSE to
find it.
5. Click NEXT.
6. Windows will open the installation file and show the option EPSON PCI Bridge Card.
7. Click FINISH.
All ISA Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Go to the CONTROL PANEL and double-click on ADD NEW HARDWARE to
launch the ADD NEW HARDWARE WIZARD. Click NEXT.
3. Windows will attempt to detect any new plug and play device and fail. Click NEXT.
4. Windows will ask you to let it detect the hardware, or allow you to select from a list.
Select NO, I WANT TO SELECT THE HARDWARE FROM A LIST and click
NEXT.
5. From the list select OTHER DEVICES and click NEXT.
6. Click HAVE DISK and type the path to the driver files, or select browse to find the
driver.
7. Click OK.
8. The driver will be identified as EPSON PCI Bridge Card. Click NEXT.
9. Click FINISH.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
X00A-E-003-04 Issue Date: 01/04/17
Windows 95 OSR2
All PCI Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Windows will detect the card as a new PCI Device and launch the
UPDATE DEVICE DRIVER wizard.
If The Driver is on Floppy Disk
3. Place the disk into drive A: and click NEXT.
4. Windows will find the EPSON PCI Bridge Card.
5. Click FINISH to install the driver.
6. Windows will ask you to restart the system.
If The Driver is not on Floppy Disk
3. Click NEXT, Windows will search the floppy drive and fail.
4. Windows will attempt to load the new hardware as a Standard VGA Card.
5. Click CANCEL. The Driver must be loaded from the CONTROL PANEL under
ADD/NEW HARDWARE.
6. Select NO for Windows to DETECT NEW HARDWARE.
7. Click NEXT.
8. Select OTHER DEVICES from HARDWARE TYPE and Click NEXT.
9. Click HAVE DISK.
10. Specify the location of the driver and click OK.
11. Click OK.
12. EPSON PCI Bridge Card will appear in the list.
13. Click NEXT.
14. Windows will install the driver.
15. Click FINISH.
16. Windows will ask you to restart the system.
17. Windows will re-detect the card and ask you to restart the system.
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
Issue Date: 01/04/17 X00A-E-003-04
All ISA Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Go to the CONTROL PANEL and select ADD NEW HARDWARE.
3. Click NEXT.
4. Select NO and click NEXT.
5. Select OTHER DEVICES and click NEXT.
6. Click Have Disk.
7. Specify the location of the driver files and click OK.
8. Click Next.
9. Click Finish.
Previous Versions of Windows 95
All PCI Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Windows will detect the card.
3. Select DRIVER FROM DISK PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER.
4. Click OK.
5. Specify a path to the location of the driver files.
6. Click OK.
7. Windows will find the S1D13XXX.INF file.
8. Click OK.
9. Click OK and Windows will install the driver.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver Installation Guide
X00A-E-003-04 Issue Date: 01/04/17
All ISA Bus Evaluation Cards
1. Install the evaluation board in the computer and boot the computer.
2. Go to the CONTROL PANEL and select ADD NEW HARDWARE.
3. Click NEXT.
4. Select NO and click NEXT.
5. Select OTHER DEVICES from the HARDWARE TYPES list.
6. Click HAVE DISK.
7. Specify the location of the driver files and click OK.
8. Select the file S1D13XXX.INF and click OK.
9. Click OK.
10. The EPSON PCI Bridge Card should be selected in the list window.
11. Click NEXT.
12. Click NEXT.
13. Click Finish.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus
Evaluation Board User Manual
Document Number: X27A-G-005-03
Copyright © 1999, 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 LCD Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 CPU/Bus Interface Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5 Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.1 Embedded Memory Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.2 ISA Bus Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2.1 Display Adapter Card Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2.2 Expanded Memory Manager Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.3 Non-ISA Bus Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.4 Decoding Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.5 Clock Input Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.6 LCD Panel Voltage Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.7 Monochrome LCD Panel Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.8 Color Passive LCD Panel Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.9 Color TFT/D-TFD LCD Panel Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.10 Power Save Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.11 Adjustable LCD Panel Negative Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.12 Adjustable LCD Panel Positive Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.13 CPU/Bus Interface Header Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8 Schematic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
List of Tables
Table 2-1: Configuration DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table 2-2: Host Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table 2-3: Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 3-1: LCD Signal Connector (J5) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 4-1: CPU/BUS Connector (H1) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 4-2: CPU/BUS Connector (H2) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 5-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Figures
Figure 8-1: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Figure 8-2: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Figure 8-3: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Figure 8-4: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
1 Introduction
This manual describes the setup and operation of the S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 Evaluation
Board. Implemented using the S1D13705 Embedded Memory Color LCD Controller, the
S5U13705B00C board is designed for the 16-bit ISA bus environment. To accommodate
other bus architectures, the S5U13705B00C board also provides CPU/Bus interface
connectors.
For more information regarding the S1D13705, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
1.1 Features
• 80-pin QFP14 package.
• SMT technology for all appropriate devices.
• 4/8-bit monochrome and color passive LCD panel support.
• 9/12-bit LCD TFT/D-TFD panel support.
• Selectable 3.3V or 5V LCD panel support.
• Oscillator support for CLKI (up to 50MHz with internal clock divider or 25MHz with
no internal clock divider).
• Embedded 80K byte SRAM display buffer for 1/2/4 bit-per-pixel (bpp), 2/4/16-level
gray shade display and 1/2/4/8 bpp, 2/4/16/256 level color display.
• Support for software and hardware power save modes.
• On-board adjustable LCD bias positive power supply (+23V to +40V).
• On-board adjustable LCD bias negative power supply (-23V to -14V).
• 16-bit ISA bus support.
• CPU/Bus interface header strips for non-ISA bus support.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Installation and Configuration
The S1D13705 has four configuration inputs, CNF[3:0], which are read on the rising edge
of RESET# and are fully configurable on this evaluation board. One six-position DIP
switch is provided on the board to configure the four configuration inputs, select the
S5U13705B00C memory/register start address, and enable/disable hardware power save
mode.
The following settings are recommended when using the S5U13705B00C with the ISA
bus.
Table 2-1: Configuration DIP Switch Settings
Switch Signal Closed (0 or low) Open (1 or high)
S1-1 CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowS1-2 CNF1
S1-3 CNF2
S1-4 CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
S1-5 ADDR Memory/Register Start Address = C0000h Memory/Register Start Address = F00000h
S1-6 GPIO0 Hardware Suspend Disable Hardware Suspend Enable
= recommended settings (configured for ISA bus support)
Table 2-2: Host Bus Selection
S1-3 S1-2 S1-1 BS# Host Bus Interface
0 0 0 X SH-4 bus interface
0 0 1 X SH-3 bus interface
010Xreserved
0 1 1 X MC68K bus interface #1, 16-bit
100Xreserved
1 0 1 X MC68K bus interface #2, 16-bit
1100reserved
1101reserved
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= recommended settings (configured for ISA bus support)
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
Table 2-3: Jumper Settings
Description 1-2 2-3
JP1 IOVDD Selection 5.0V IOVDD 3.3V IOVDD
JP2 RD/WR# Signal Selection Pulled up to IOVDD No Connection
JP3 BS# Signal Selection Pulled up to IOVDD No Connection
JP4 LCD Panel Voltage Selection 5V LCD Panel 3.3V LCD Panel
JP6 LCDPWR polarity Active low (‘LCDPWR#’) Active high (‘LCDPWR’)
= recommended settings (JP1 through JP3 configured for ISA bus support)
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3 LCD Interface Pin Mapping
Note
1. Un-used GPIO pins must be connected to IO VDD.
2. Inverse Video is enabled on FPDAT11 by REG[02h] bit 1.
Table 3-1: LCD Signal Connector (J5) Pinout
Connector Single Passive Panel Dual Passive Panel Color TFT/D-TFD
Pin Name Pin #
Color Mono Color Mono
4-bit 8-bit
8-bit
Alternate
Format
4-bit 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit 9-bit 12-bit
BFPDAT0 1 driven 0 D0 LD0 driven 0 D0 D0 LD0 R2 R3
BFPDAT1 3 driven 0 D1 LD1 driven 0 D1 D1 LD1 R1 R2
BFPDAT2 5 driven 0 D2 LD2 driven 0 D2 D2 LD2 R0 R1
BFPDAT3 7 driven 0 D3 LD3 driven 0 D3 D3 LD3 G2 G3
BFPDAT4 9 D0 D4 UD0 D0 D4 D4 UD0 G1 G2
BFPDAT5 11 D1 D5 UD1 D1 D5 D5 UD1 G0 G1
BFPDAT6 13 D2 D6 UD2 D2 D6 D6 UD2 B2 B3
BFPDAT7 15 D3 D7 UD3 D3 D7 D7 UD3 B1 B2
BFPDAT8 17 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 GPIO1 B0 B1
BFPDAT9 19 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 GPIO2 R0
BFPDAT10 21 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 GPIO3 G0
BFPDAT11 23 GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video
GPIO4/
Inverse
Video GPIO4 B0
BFPSHIFT 33 FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT FPSHIFT
BFPSHIFT2 35 FPSHIFT2
BFPLINE 37 FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE FPLINE
BFPFRAME 39 FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME FPFRAME
GND 2-26
(Even
Pins) GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
N / C 28
VLCD 30 LCD panel negative bias voltage (-24V to -14V)
LCDVCC 32 +3.3V or +5V (selectable with JP4)
+12V 34 +12V +12V +12V +12V +12V +12V +12V +12V +12V
VDDH 36 LCD panel positive bias voltage (+23V to +40V)
BDRDY 38 MOD MOD MOD MOD MOD MOD DRDY DRDY
BLCDPWR 40 LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR LCDPWR
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
4 CPU/Bus Interface Connector Pinouts
Table 4-1: CPU/BUS Connector (H1) Pinout
Connector
Pin No.
CPU/BUS
Pin Name Comments
1 SD0 Connected to DB0 of the S1D13705
2 SD1 Connected to DB1 of the S1D13705
3 SD2 Connected to DB2 of the S1D13705
4 SD3 Connected to DB3 of the S1D13705
5 GND Ground
6 GND Ground
7 SD4 Connected to DB4 of the S1D13705
8 SD5 Connected to DB5 of the S1D13705
9 SD6 Connected to DB6 of the S1D13705
10 SD7 Connected to DB7 of the S1D13705
11 GND Ground
12 GND Ground
13 SD8 Connected to DB8 of the S1D13705
14 SD9 Connected to DB9 of the S1D13705
15 SD10 Connected to DB10 of the S1D13705
16 SD11 Connected to DB11 of the S1D13705
17 GND Ground
18 GND Ground
19 SD12 Connected to DB12 of the S1D13705
20 SD13 Connected to DB13 of the S1D13705
21 SD14 Connected to DB14 of the S1D13705
22 SD15 Connected to DB15 of the S1D13705
23 RESET# Connected to the RESET# signal of the S1D13705
24 GND Ground
25 GND Ground
26 GND Ground
27 +12V 12 volt supply
28 +12V 12 volt supply
29 WE0# Connected to the WE0# signal of the S1D13705
30 WAIT# Connected to the WAIT# signal of the S1D13705
31 CS# Connected to the CS# signal of the S1D13705
32 NC Not connected
33 WE1# Connected to the WE1# signal of the S1D13705
34 IOVDD Connected to the IOVDD supply of the S1D13705
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
Table 4-2: CPU/BUS Connector (H2) Pinout
Connector
Pin No.
CPU/BUS
Pin Name Comments
1 SA0 Connected to AB0 of the S1D13705
2 SA1 Connected to AB1 of the S1D13705
3 SA2 Connected to AB2 of the S1D13705
4 SA3 Connected to AB3 of the S1D13705
5 SA4 Connected to AB4 of the S1D13705
6 SA5 Connected to AB5 of the S1D13705
7 SA6 Connected to AB6 of the S1D13705
8 SA7 Connected to AB7 of the S1D13705
9 GND Ground
10 GND Ground
11 SA8 Connected to AB8 of the S1D13705
12 SA9 Connected to AB9 of the S1D13705
13 SA10 Connected to AB10 of the S1D13705
14 SA11 Connected to AB11 of the S1D13705
15 SA12 Connected to AB12 of the S1D13705
16 SA13 Connected to AB13 of the S1D13705
17 GND Ground
18 GND Ground
19 SA14 Connected to AB14 of the S1D13705
20 SA15 Connected to AB14 of the S1D13705
21 SA16 Connected to AB16 of the S1D13705
22 SA17 Connected to SA17 of the ISA bus connector
23 SA18 Connected to SA18 of the ISA bus connector
24 SA19 Connected to SA19 of the ISA bus connector
25 GND Ground
26 GND Ground
27 VCC 5 volt supply
28 VCC 5 volt supply
29 RD/WR# Connected to the R/W# signal of the S1D13705
30 BS# Connected to the BS# signal of the S1D13705
31 BUSCLK Connected to the BCLK signal of the S1D13705
32 RD# Connected to the RD# signal of the S1D13705
33 NC Not connected
34 CLKI Connected to the CLKI signal of the S1D13705
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
5 Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
Table 5-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names SH-3 SH-4 MC68K #1 MC68K #2 Generic Bus #1 Generic Bus #2
AB[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1]
AB0 A0 A0LDS#A0 A0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1# WE1# UDS# DS# WE1# BHE#
CS# CSn# CSn# External Decode External Decode External Decode External Decode
BCLK CKIO CKIO BCLK BCLK BCLK BCLK
BS# BS# BS# AS# AS# Connect to VSS Connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# RD/WR# RD/WR# R/W# R/W# RD1# Connect to IO VDD
RD# RD# RD# Connect to IO VDD SIZ1 RD0# RD#
WE0# WE0# WE0# Connect to IO VDD SIZ0 WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT# RDY# DTACK# DSACK1# WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6 Technical Description
6.1 Embedded Memory Support
The S1D13705 contains 80K bytes of embedded, 16-bit, SRAM used for the display buffer
and a 32 byte internal register set.
Since the S1D13705 does not distinguish between memory and register accesses, both the
80K byte display buffer and the 32 byte register set must be memory mapped into the host’s
memory space.
When using the S5U13705B00C board on an ISA bus system, the board can be configured
to map the S1D13705 to one of two memory blocks.
The SRAM start address is determined by a DIP switch setting. See Table 2-1: “Configu-
ration DIP Switch Settings,” on page 8.
1. When switch S1-5 is in the closed position, the S1D13705 is mapped into segments
0C0000h and 0D0000h.
This memory space is in the first 1M byte of ISA bus memory and should be used if
these segments are not taken up by other devices such as network adapters, SCSI
cards, or other peripherals.
Note
Since VGA and VGA compatible video adapters use address 0C8000, these cards can-
not be used while using the S5U13705B00C board at this memory address. A mono-
chrome display adapter, a terminal, or a non-VGA compatible display adapter must be
used.
2. When switch S1-5 is in the open position, the S1D13705 is mapped into the upper
megabyte of ISA bus memory, starting address of F00000h. To use this memory on an
ISA bus system, the system BIOS has to be configured to set a memory ‘hole’ starting
at this address. Some systems allow the user to configure the size of this hole and the
starting address of where it begins while others just allow a 1M byte hole at the top of
the 16M byte memory space. This memory hole is configured by entering the system
CMOS Setup Utility. This memory space should be used if segments 0Dh and 0Eh are
being used by other devices or if a VGA display adapter is needed.
Starting at the SRAM start address, the board design decodes a 128K byte segment accom-
modating both the 80K byte display buffer and the S1D13705 internal register set. The
S1D13705 registers are mapped into the upper 32 bytes of the 128K byte segment (1FFE0h
to 1FFFFh).
When using the S5U13705B00C board on a non-ISA bus system, system or external
decode logic must map the S1D13705 into an appropriate memory space.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
6.2 ISA Bus Support
The S5U13705B00C board has been designed to directly support the 16-bit ISA bus
environment and can be used in conjunction with either a VGA or a monochrome display
adapter card.
There are 4 configuration inputs associated with the Host Interface (CNF[2:0] and BS#).
Refer to Table 2-3: “Jumper Settings,” on page 9 and Table 5-1: “Host Bus Interface Pin
Mapping,” on page 13 for complete details.
6.2.1 Display Adapter Card Support
When using the S5U13705B00C in conjunction with another primary Display Adapter
(VGA or Monochrome) the following applies:
VGA Display Adapter
All VGA display adapters can be used with the S5U13705B00C board if the S1D13705 is
mapped to the upper 1M Byte of ISA bus memory, address F00000-F1FFFF. If the
S1D13705 is mapped to the address range 0C0000-0D0000, then no VGA or VGA
compatible display adapters can be used with the S5U13705B00C board. See Embedded
Memory Support on page 14.
Monochrome Display Adapter
The S5U13705B00C board can be used with monochrome display adapters at both memory
addresses.
6.2.2 Expanded Memory Manager Support
If a memory manager is being used for system memory, the address range selected for the
SRAM start address must be excluded from use or memory conflicts will arise.
6.3 Non-ISA Bus Support
The S5U13705B00C board is specifically designed to support the standard 16-bit ISA bus.
However, the S1D13705 directly supports many other host bus interfaces. Header strips H1
and H2 are provided and contain all the necessary IO pins to interface to these host buses.
See CPU/Bus Interface Connector Pinouts on page 11; Table 2-1: “Configuration DIP
Switch Settings,” on page 8; and Table 2-3: “Jumper Settings,” on page 9 for details.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
When using the header strips to provide the bus interface observe the following:
• All signals on the ISA bus card edge must be isolated from the ISA bus (do not plug the
card into a computer). Power must be provided through the headers.
• U7, a PLD of type 22V10-15, is used to provide the S1D13705 CS# (pin 74) and other
decoding logic signals for ISA bus mode. For non-ISA applications, this functionality
must be provided externally. Remove the PAL from its socket to eliminate conflicts
driving S1D13705 control signals. Refer to Table 5-1: “Host Bus Interface Pin
Mapping” for connection details.
Note
When using a 3.3V host bus interface, IO VDD must be set to 3.3V by setting jumper
(JP1) to the 2-3 position. Refer to Table 2-3: “Jumper Settings,” on page 9.
6.4 Decoding Logic
All the required decode logic is provided through a PLD of type 22V10-15 (U7, socketed).
This PAL contains the following equations.
!CS = (Address >= ^hC0000) & (Address <= ^hDFFFF) & !ADDR & REFRESH & ENAB
# (Address1 >= ^hF00000) & (Address1 <= ^hF1FFFF) & ADDR & REFRESH & ENAB;
!MEMCS16 = (Address1 >= ^h0C0000) & (Address1 <= ^h0DFFFF) & !ADDR & !CS
# (Address1 >= ^hF00000) & (Address1 <= ^hF1FFFF) & ADDR & !CS;
!WE0 = (!CS & !ADDR & !SMEMW) # (!CS & ADDR & !MEMW);
!RD = (!CS & !ADDR & !SMEMR) # (!CS & ADDR & !MEMR);
Note
ADDR = Switch S1-5 (see Table 2-1:, “Configuration DIP Switch Settings,” on page 8).
6.5 Clock Input Support
The input clock (CLKI) frequency can be up to 50MHz for the S1D13705 if the internal
clock divide-by-2 mode is set. If the clock divider is not used, the maximum CLKI
frequency is 25MHz. There is no minimum input clock frequency.
A 25.0MHz oscillator (U2, socketed) is provided as the input clock source. However,
depending on the LCD resolution , desired frame rate, and power consumtion budget, a
lower frequency clock may be required.
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
6.6 LCD Panel Voltage Setting
The S5U13705B00C board supports both 3.3V and 5V LCD panels through the LCD
connector J5. The voltage level is selected by setting jumper J4 to the appropriate position.
Refer to Table 2-3: “Jumper Settings,” on page 9 for setting this jumper.
Although not necessary for signal buffering, buffers have been implemented in the board
design to provide flexibility in handling 3 and 5 volt panels.
6.7 Monochrome LCD Panel Support
The S1D13705 directly supports 4 and 8-bit, dual and single, monochrome passive LCD
panels. All necessary signals are provided on the 40-pin ribbon cable header J5. The
interface signals on the cable are alternated with grounds to reduce crosstalk and noise.
Refer to Table 3-1: “LCD Signal Connector (J5) Pinout,” on page 10 for specific
connection information.
6.8 Color Passive LCD Panel Support
The S1D13705 directly supports 4 and 8-bit, dual and single, color passive LCD panels. All
the necessary signals are provided on the 40-pin ribbon cable header J5. The interface
signals on the cable are alternated with grounds to reduce crosstalk and noise.
Refer to Table 3-1: “LCD Signal Connector (J5) Pinout,” on page 10 for specific
connection information.
6.9 Color TFT/D-TFD LCD Panel Support
The S1D13705 directly supports 9 and 12-bit active matrix color TFT/D-TFD panels. All
the necessary signals can also be found on the 40-pin LCD connector J5. The interface
signals on the cable are alternated with grounds to reduce crosstalk and noise.
Refer to Table 3-1: “LCD Signal Connector (J5) Pinout,” on page 10 for connection infor-
mation.
6.10 Power Save Modes
The S1D13705 supports hardware and software power save modes. These modes are
controlled by the utility 13705PWR. The hardware power save mode needs to be enabled
by 13705PWR and then activated by DIP switch S1-6. See Table 2-1: “Configuration DIP
Switch Settings,” on page 8 for details on setting this switch.
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6.11 Adjustable LCD Panel Negative Power Supply
For those LCD panels requiring a negative power supply to provide between -23V and -
14V (Iout=25mA) a power supply has been provided as an integral part of this design. The
VLCD power supply can be adjusted by R21 to give an output voltage from -23V to -14V,
and is enabled and disabled by the active high S1D13705 control signal LCDPWR, inverted
externally.
Determine the panel’s specific power requirements and set the potentiometer accordingly
before connecting the panel.
6.12 Adjustable LCD Panel Positive Power Supply
For those LCD panels requiring a positive power supply to provide between +23V and
+40V (Iout=45mA) a power supply has been provided as an integral part of this design. The
VDDH power supply can be adjusted by R15 to provide an output voltage from +23V to
+40V and is enabled and disabled by the active high S1D13705 control signal LCDPWR,
inverted externally.
Determine the panel’s specific power requirements and set the potentiometer accordingly
before connecting the panel.
6.13 CPU/Bus Interface Header Strips
All of the CPU/Bus interface pins of the S1D13705 are connected to the header strips H1
and H2 for easy interface to a CPU/Bus other than ISA.
Refer to Table 4-1: “CPU/BUS Connector (H1) Pinout,” on page 11 and Table 4-2:
“CPU/BUS Connector (H2) Pinout,” on page 12 for specific settings.
Note
These headers only provide the CPU/bus interface signals from the S1D13705. When
another host bus interface is selected by CNF[3:0] and BS#, appropriate external decod-
ing logic MUST be used to access the S1D13705. Refer to Table 5-1: “Host Bus Inter-
face Pin Mapping,” on page 13 for connection details.
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
7 Parts List
Item # Qty/board Designation Part Value Description
1 15 C1-C11, C15-17,C24 0.1uF, 20%, 50V 0805 ceramic capacitor
2 3 C12-14 10uF, 10%, 25V Tantalum capacitor size D
3 2 C18, C22 47uF, 10%, 16V Tantalum capacitor size D
4 3 C19-C21 4.7uF, 10%, 50V Tantalum capacitor size D
5 1 C23 56uF, 20%, 63V Electrolytic, radial, low ESR
6 2 H1,H2 CON34A Header 0.1” 17x2 header, PTH
7 5 JP1-JP4, JP6 HEADER 3 0.1” 1x3 header, PTH
8 1 J1 AT CON-A ISA Bus gold fingers
9 1 J2 AT CON-B ISA Bus gold fingers
10 1 J3 AT CON-C ISA Bus gold fingers
11 1 J4 AT CON-D ISA Bus gold fingers
12 1 J5 CON40A Shrouded header 2x20, PTH, center key
13 1 L1 1µH MCI-1812 inductor
14 2 L3, L4 Ferrite bead Philips BDS3/3/8.9-4S2
15 1 Q1 2N3906 PNP signal transistor, SOT23
16 1 Q2 2N3904 NPN signal transistor, SOT23
17 6 R1-R6 15K, 5% 0805 resistor
18 9 R7-R13, R17, R18 10K, 5% 0805 resistor
19 1 R14 475K, 1% 0805 resistor
20 1 R15 200K Pot. 200K Trim POT Spectrol 63S204T607 (or equivalent)
21 1 R16 14K, 1% 0805 resistor
22 3 R19, R20, R22 100K, 5% 0805 resistor
23 1 R21 100K Pot. 100K Trim POT Spectrol 63S104T607 (or equivalent)
24 1 S1 SW DIP-6 6 position DIP switch
25 1 U1 S1D13705F00A QFP14-80, 80 pin, SMT
26 1 U2 25.0 MHz oscillator FOX 25MHz oscillator or equiv., 14 pin DIP socketed
27 3 U3-U5 74AHC244 SO-22, TI74AHC244
28 1 U6 LT1117CM-3.3 Linear Technology 5V to 3.3V regulator, 800mA
29 1 U7 PLD22V10-15 PLD type 22V10-15, 20 Pin DIP, socketed
30 1 U8 74ALS125 SO-14, 74ALS125
31 1 U9 74HCT04 SO-14, 74HCT04
32 1 U10 RD-0412 Xentek RD-0412, positive PS
33 1 U11 EPN001 Xentek EPN001 negative PS
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
8 Schematic Diagrams
Figure 8-1: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (1 of 4)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
A A
B B
C C
D D
By-pass Capacitors (1 per power pin)
1 2 5.0V IOVDD
2 3 3.3V IOVDD 1.0
Epson Research & Development, Inc.
S5U13705B00C ISA-Bus Rev. 1.0 Evaluation Board : 13705F00A Chip
B
14Monday, January 04, 1999
Size Document Number Rev
Date: Sheet of
FPDAT2
SD2
FPDAT4SD11
SD4
SA3
SD13
SD5 FPDAT[0..7]
SD6
SA15
SD8
SA7
FPDAT0
SD10
SD7
SD1
SA[0..19]
SD[0..15]
SD12
SD3
SA2
SA5
SD14
SA13
SA1
FPDAT3
SA4
SA0
SD15
SA10
SA9
SA8
FPDAT1
SD9
SD0
SA14
SA12
SA11
SA6
FPDAT5
FPDAT6
FPDAT7
CNF2
CNF1
CNF2
CNF0
CNF3
CNF3
CNF[0..3]
CNF1
CNF0
SA16
3.3V
IOVDD
3.3V
IOVDD
IOVDD IOVDD
IOVDD
VCC
C1
0.1uF
C6
0.1uF C7
0.1uF
C5
0.1uF
JP3
HEADER 3
1
2
3
JP2
HEADER 3
1
2
3
R4
15K
R3
15K
R2
15K
R1
15K
R5
15K
C2
0.1uF C4
0.1uF
C3
0.1uF
JP1
HEADER 3
1
2
3
R6
15K
S1
SW DIP-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
9
8
7
U1
S1D13705F00A
AB0
70
AB1
69
AB2
68
AB3
67
AB4
66
AB5
65
AB6
64
AB7
63
AB8
62
AB9
59
AB10
58
AB11
57
AB12
56
AB13
55
AB14
54
AB15
53
FPDAT0 37
FPDAT1 36
FPDAT2 35
FPDAT3 34
FPDAT5 32
FPDAT6 31
FPDAT7 30
CS#
74
LCDPWR 43
COREVDD
61
VSS
20
VSS
40
VSS
72 VSS
60 VSS
50
VSS
27
VSS
80
DB0
19
DB1
18
DB2
17
DB3
16
DB4
15
DB5
14
DB6
13
DB7
12
DB8
11
DB9
9
DB10
8
DB11
7
DB12
6
DB13
5
DB14
4
DB15
3
FPDAT4 33
CNF0 49
CNF1 48
CNF2 47
CNF3 46
AB16
45
RD/WR#
79
WE1#
78
WE0#
77
RD#
76
BS#
75
RESET#
73
CLKI
51
BCLK
71
WAIT#
2
TESTEN
44
COREVDD
1
COREVDD
21
IOVDD
10
COREVDD
41
IOVDD
52 IOVDD
29
FPDAT8/GPIO1 26
FPDAT9GPIO2 25
FPDAT10/GPIO3 24
FPDAT11/GPIO4 23
FPFRAME 39
FPLINE 38
FPSHIFT 28
DRDY 42
GPIO0 22
SD[0..15] LCDPWR
DRDY
FPFRAME
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
FPDAT[0..7]
RD/WR#
WE1#
WE0#
CS#
BUSCLK
CLKI
RESET#
RD#
WAIT#
BS#
SA[0..19]
FPDAT8
FPDAT9
FPDAT10
FPDAT11
CNF[0..3]
SUSPEND
BS# RD/WR#
CNF[0..3]
SUSPEND
ADDR
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
Figure 8-2: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (2 of 4)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
A A
B B
C C
D D
MEMCS16
1.0
Epson Research & Development, Inc.
S5U13705B00C ISA-Bus Rev. 1.0 Evaluation Board : ISA-Bus and PAL Decode
B
24Monday, January 04, 1999
Size Document Number Rev
Date: Sheet of
SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
SD[0..15]
SA[0..19]
SA9
SA10
LA21
SA14
SA17
SA8
SA15
SA0
SA4
SA13
LA23
LA[17..23]
SA19
LA19
LA18
SA7
SA3
LA20
SA16
SA6
SA2
SA11
SA12
LA22
LA17
SA1
SA18
SA5
LA[17..23]
SA[0..19]
LA23
LA22
LA21
LA20
LA19
LA18
LA17
SA19
SA18
SA17
SA16
IOVDD
VCC
IOVDD
VCC
+12V
IOVDDIOVDD VCC
VCC
VCC
IOVDD
VCC
J1
AT CON-A
/IOCHCK
1
SD7
2
SD6
3
SD5
4
SD4
5
SD3
6
SD2
7
SD1
8
SD0
9
IOCHRDY
10
AEN
11
SA19
12
SA18
13
SA17
14
SA16
15
SA15
16
SA14
17
SA13
18
SA12
19
SA11
20
SA10
21
SA9
22
SA8
23
SA7
24
SA6
25
SA5
26
SA4
27
SA3
28
SA2
29
SA1
30
SA0
31
J2
AT CON-B
GND 1
RESET 2
+5V 3
IRQ9 4
-5V 5
DRQ2 6
-12V 7
OWS 8
+12V 9
GND 10
/SMEMW 11
/SMEMR 12
/IOW 13
/IOR 14
/DACK3 15
DRQ3 16
/DACK1 17
DRQ1 18
/REFRESH 19
CLK 20
IRQ7 21
IRQ6 22
IRQ5 23
IRQ4 24
IRQ3 25
/DACK2 26
T/C 27
BALE 28
+5V 29
OSC 30
GND 31
J4
AT CON-D
/MEMCS16 1
/IOCS16 2
IRQ10 3
IRQ11 4
IRQ12 5
IRQ15 6
IRQ14 7
/DACK0 8
DRQ0 9
/DACK5 10
DRQ5 11
/DACK6 12
DRQ6 13
/DACK7 14
DRQ7 15
+5V 16
MASTER 17
GND 18
+C14
10uF/25V
R7
10K
+C13
10uF/25V
J3
AT CON-C
/SBHE
1
LA23
2
LA22
3
LA21
4
LA20
5
LA19
6
LA18
7
LA17
8
/MEMR
9
/MEMW
10
SD8
11
SD9
12
SD10
13
SD11
14
SD12
15
SD13
16
SD14
17
SD15
18
R9
10K
R10
10K R12
10K
U8A
74LS125
2 3
14
1
7
C16
0.1uF
R8
10K
U7
TIBPAL22V10
CLK/IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
GND
12
I/O 23
I/O 22
I/O 21
I/O 20
I/O 19
I/O 18
I/O 17
I/O 16
I/O 15
I/O 14
IN 13
VCC 24
C15
0.1uF
R11
10K
R13
10K
C17
0.1uF
U9A
74HCT04
1 2
14
7
R22
100K
REFRESH#
RESET
MEMCS16#
WE1#
SD[0..15]
SA[0..19]
LA[17..23]
WAIT#
BUSCLK
SMEMW#
SMEMR#
CS#
RESET#
RESET
REFRESH# MEMCS16#
MEMW#
MEMR#
LA[17..23]
SA[0..19]
ADDR
MEMR#
MEMW#
SMEMR#
SMEMW#
RD#
WE0#
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
Figure 8-3: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (3 of 4)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
A A
B B
C C
D D
SELECTABLE 3.3V / 5.0V COLOR/MONO LCD CONNECTOR
1 2 5.0V LCD Panels
2 3 3.3V LCD Panels
1.0
Epson Research & Development, Inc.
S5U13705B00C ISA-Bus Rev. 1.0 Evaluation Card : LCD Connector & Headers
B
34Monday, January 04, 1999
Size Document Number Rev
Date: Sheet of
FPDAT[0..7]
BFPDAT0
BFPDAT1
BFPDAT2
BFPDAT3
BFPDAT4
BFPDAT5
BFPDAT6
BFPDAT7
BFPDAT8
BFPDAT9
BFPDAT10
BFPDAT11
FPDAT0
FPDAT1
FPDAT2
FPDAT3
FPDAT4
FPDAT5
FPDAT6
FPDAT7
FPDAT8
FPDAT9
FPDAT10
FPDAT11
SA[0..19]
SA1
SA3
SA9
SA11
SA13
SA15
SA17
SA19
SA0
SA2
SA4
SA6
SA8
SA10
SA12
SA14
SA16
SA18
SA5
SA7
SD14
SD9
SD13SD12
SD7
SD11SD10
SD8
SD5
SD3
SD6
SD4
SD1
SD[0..15]
SD2
SD0
SD15
FPSHIFT
LCDVCC
LCDVCC
FPFRAME
BLCDPWR
DRDY
BDRDY
FPLINE
BFPFRAME
BFPSHIFT
BFPLINE
LCDP
+12V
VDDH
VLCD
VCC
VCC
VCCVCC+12V+12V
3.3V
VCC
IOVDD
J5
CON40A
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
U3
74AHC244
1A1
21Y1 18
1A2
41Y2 16
1A3
61Y3 14
1A4
81Y4 12
2A1
11 2Y1 9
2A2
13 2Y2 7
2A3
15 2Y3 5
2A4
17 2Y4 3
1G
1
2G
19 VCC 20
GND 10
U4
74AHC244
1A1
21Y1 18
1A2
41Y2 16
1A3
61Y3 14
1A4
81Y4 12
2A1
11 2Y1 9
2A2
13 2Y2 7
2A3
15 2Y3 5
2A4
17 2Y4 3
1G
1
2G
19 VCC 20
GND 10
C8
0.1uF
C9
0.1uF
JP4
HEADER 3
1
2
3
+C12
10uF/25V
U6
LT1117CM-3.3
VIN
3
ADJ
1
VOUT 2
C11
0.1uF
H1
HEADER 17X2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
910
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
H2
HEADER 17X2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
910
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
C10
0.1uF
U5
74AHC244
1A1
21Y1 18
1A2
41Y2 16
1A3
61Y3 14
1A4
81Y4 12
2A1
11 2Y1 9
2A2
13 2Y2 7
2A3
15 2Y3 5
2A4
17 2Y4 3
1G
1
2G
19 VCC 20
GND 10
U2
25.0Mhz
NC
1
OUT
8GND 7
VCC 14
C24
0.1uF
JP6
HEADER 3
1
2
3
FPSHIFT
DRDY
FPLINE
FPFRAME
FPDAT[0..7]
FPDAT8
FPDAT9
FPDAT10
FPDAT11
BS#
RD#
WAIT#WE0#
CS#
RESET#
WE1#
SA[0..19]
SD[0..15]
RD/WR#
BUSCLK
CLKI
CLKI
LCDPWR LCDPWR#
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-005-03
Figure 8-4: S1D13705B00C Schematic Diagram (4 of 4)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
A A
B B
C C
D D
1.0
Epson Research & Development, Inc.
S5U13705B00C ISA-Bus Rev. 1.0 Evaluation Board : LCD Power Supply
B
44Monday, January 04, 1999
Size Document Number Rev
Date: Sheet of
LCDPWR#
PSVCC
PSVCC
VCC
PSVCC
PSVCC
IOVDD
VLCD
VDDH
VCC
VCC VCC VCC VCC
+C21
4.7uF/50V
R18
10K R19
100K
R20
100K
R14
475K
R15
200K Pot.
1 3
2
R16
14K
+C19
4.7uF/50V +C20
4.7uF/50V
+C22
47uF/16V
+
C23
56uF/35V Low ESR
+
C18
47uF/16V
R17
10K
R21
100K Pot.
1 3
2
U10
RD-0412
VOUT_ADJ
1
DC_IN
2
REMOTE
3
GND
4
GND
5
GND
6
GND
7
GND
8
NC
9
GND
10
GND
11
DC_OUT
12
U11
EPN001
DC_OUT
1
DC_OUT
2
NC
3
GND
4GND
5
VOUT_ADJ
6
NC
7NC
8NC
9
DC_IN
11
DC_IN
10
L1
1uH
2 5
L3
1 2
L4
1 2
U9B
74HCT04
3 4
14
7
Q2
MMBT3904
1
2 3
Q1
MMBT3906
1
23
U9C
74HCT04
5 6
14
7
U9D
74HCT04
9 8
14
7
U9E
74HCT04
11 10
14
7
U9F
74HCT04
13 12
14
7
PSGND
PSGND
PSGND
LCDPWR
LCDPWR#
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-005-03 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation
Board User Manual
Document Number: X27A-G-014-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Configuration DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
3.2 Configuration Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 CPU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 CPU Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 CPU Bus Connector Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5 LCD Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.1 PCI Bus Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.2 Direct Host Bus Interface Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.3 S1D13705 Embedded Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.4 Adjustable LCD Panel Positive Power Supply (VDDH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6.5 Adjustable LCD Panel Negative Power Supply (VLCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.6 Passive/Active LCD Panel Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.7 Power Save Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6.8 Clock Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
9 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10 Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
11 Board Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
12 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
12.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Configuration DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 3-2: Jumper Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 4-1: CPU Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 4-2: CPU Bus Connector (H1) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 4-3: CPU Bus Connector (H2) Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Table 5-1: LCD Signal Connector (J5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
List of Figures
Figure 3-1: Configuration DIP Switch (SW1) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 3-2: Configuration Jumper (JP1) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Figure 3-3: Configuration Jumper (JP2) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 3-4: Configuration Jumper (JP3) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 3-5: Configuration Jumper (JP4) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Figure 3-6: Configuration Jumper (JP5) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Figure 3-7: Configuration Jumper (JP6) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Figure 3-8: Configuration Jumper (JP7) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Figure 10-1: S1D13705B00C Schematics (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Figure 10-2: S1D13705B00C Schematics (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Figure 10-3: S1D13705B00C Schematics (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Figure 10-4: S1D13705B00C Schematics (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Figure 10-5: S1D13705B00C Schematics (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
1 Introduction
This manual describes the setup and operation of the S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation
Board. The board is designed as an evaluation platform for the S1D13705 Embedded
Memory LCD Controller.
This user manual is updated as appropriate. Please check the Epson Research and Devel-
opment Website at www.erd.epson.com for the latest revision of this document before
beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
2 Features
Following are some features of the S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board:
• 80-pin TQFP S1D13705F00A Embedded Memory LCD Controller with 80K bytes of
embedded SRAM.
• Headers for connecting to various Host Bus Interfaces.
• Configuration options.
• Adjustable positive LCD bias power supply from +23V to +40V.
• Adjustable negative LCD bias power supply from -23V to -14V.
• 4/8-bit 3.3V or 5V single monochrome or color passive LCD panel support.
• 9/12-bit 3.3V or 5V active matrix TFT LCD panel support.
• Software and hardware initiated power save mode.
• Selectable clock source for bus clock and CLKI.
• External oscillator for CLKI (up to 50MHz with internal clock divider or 25MHz with
no internal clock divider) and BUSCLK.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
3 Installation and Configuration
The S5U13705B00C is designed to support as many platforms as possible. The
S5U13705B00C incorporates a DIP switch and seven jumpers which allow both evaluation
board and S1D13705 LCD controller to be configured for a specified evaluation platform.
3.1 Configuration DIP Switches
The S1D13705 has configuration inputs (CNF[3:0]) and BS# input, which are read on the
rising edge of RESET#. In order to configure the S1D13705 for multiple Host Bus Inter-
faces a six-position DIP switch (SW1) is required. The following figure shows the location
of DIP switch SW1 on the S5U13705B00C.
Figure 3-1: Configuration DIP Switch (SW1) Location
DIP Switch - SW1
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
The S1D13705 has 4 configuration inputs (CONF[3:0]) and BS# input, which are read on
the rising edge of RESET#. All S1D13705 configuration inputs and BS# input are fully
configurable using a six position DIP switch as described below and a jumper for BS#.
Note
1 The selection between Generic #1 and Generic #2 is made with JP3.
Table 3-1: Configuration DIP Switch Settings
Switch S1D13705
Signal
Value on this pin at rising edge of RESET# is used to configure:
Open (Off/1) Closed (On/0)
SW1-[3:1] CNF[2:0]
Select host bus interface as follows:
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 Host Bus Interface
000 SH-4
001 SH-3
010 Reserved
0 1 1 MC68K #1
100 Reserved
1 0 1 MC68K #2
110 Reserved
1 1 1 Generic #1/Generic #21
Note: The host bus interface is 16-bit.
SW1-4 CNF3 Big Endian bus interface Little Endian bus interface
SW1-5 Not Used Not Used
SW1-6 GPIO0 Hardware Suspend Enable Hardware Suspend Disable
= Required settings when used with PCI Bridge FPGA
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
3.2 Configuration Jumpers
The S5U13705B00C has six jumper blocks which configure various setting on the board.
The jumper positions for each function are shown below.
JP1 - IOVDD Selection
JP1 selects the IOVDD voltage for S1D13705.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, IOVDD is 3.3V. This settings must be used for a 3.3V
host CPU system.
When the jumper is in position 2-3, IOVDD is 5.0V. This setting must be used for a 5.0V
host CPU system.
Note
For PCI host, JP1 can be set in either position.
Figure 3-2: Configuration Jumper (JP1) Location
Table 3-2: Jumper Summary
Jumper Function Position 1-2 Position 2-3 No Jumper
JP1 IOVDD Selection +3.3V IOVDD +5.0V IOVDD n/a
JP2 Bus Clock Selection External Oscillator (U7) From Host CPU n/a
JP3 BS# Signal Selection Pulled Down to GND (for
Generic #1 Interface) Pulled High to IOVDD (for
Generic #2 Interface) For SH-3, SH-4, MC68k #1
and MC68K #2 bus
JP4 LCD Panel Voltage Selection +3.3V LCDVCC +5.0V LCDVCC n/a
JP5 PCI Bridge FPGA Disabled for non-PCI host n/a Enabled for PCI host
JP6 LCDPWR Polarity Active Low Active High n/a
JP7 CLKI Selection External Oscillator (U2) BCLK n/a
= Required settings when used with PCI Bridge FPGA
JP1
3.3 Volt 5.0 Volt
IOVDD IOVDD
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
JP2 - Bus Clock Selection
JP2 selects the source for BCLK input on S1D13705.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, the BCLK source is the external oscillator U7. This
position must be used for PCI-host.
When the jumper is in position 2-3, the BCLK must be provided by the host CPU. This
setting may be used for non-PCI host.
Figure 3-3: Configuration Jumper (JP2) Location
JP3 - BS# Signal Selection
JP3 is used to pull up or down BS# input of S1D13705 for selection of Generic #1 or
Generic #2 interface.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, BS# is pulled down to select Generic #1 interface.
When the jumper is in position 2-3, BS# is pulled high to IOVDD, to select Generic #2
interface.
For SH-3, SH-4, MC68K #1 and MC68K #2 buses, which use BS# line, the jumper should
not be installed.
Figure 3-4: Configuration Jumper (JP3) Location
JP2
BCLK
External
Oscillator (U7) Provided
by Host
JP3
BS# BS#
Pulled Low Pulled High
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
JP4 - LCD Panel Voltage Selection
JP4 selects voltage level to the LCD panel.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, the voltage level is set to 3.3V.
When the jumper is in position 2-3, the voltage level is set to 5.0V.
Figure 3-5: Configuration Jumper (JP4) Location
JP5 - PCI Bridge FPGA
JP5 is used to enable or disable the PCI bridge FPGA.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, the PCI bridge FPGA is disabled. This position must
be used for non-PCI host.
When the jumper is off, the PCI bridge FPGA is enabled. The jumper must not be present
for PCI host.
Figure 3-6: Configuration Jumper (JP5) Location
JP4
5.0 Volt
3.3 Volt
LCD VDD LCD VDD
JP5
FPGA FPGA
Disabled Enabled
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
JP6 - LCDPWR Polarity
LCDPWR output from S1D13705 is only active high but some panels may require an active
low signal. To provide both active high and active low signals, the output from S1D13705
is inverted and the selection is made by the setting of JP6
When the jumper is in position 1-2, LCDPWR signal to the panel is active low
When the jumper is in position 2-3, LCDPWR signal to the panel is active high
Figure 3-7: Configuration Jumper (JP6) Location
JP7 - CLKI Selection
JP7 selects the source for CLKI input on S1D13705.
When the jumper is in position 1-2, CLKI signal is provided by external oscillator U2
When the jumper is in position 2-3, CLKI signal is the same as BCLK signal
Figure 3-8: Configuration Jumper (JP7) Location
JP6
LCDPWR LCDPWR
Active High
Active Low
JP7
CLKI
External
Oscillator (U2) Same as
BCLK
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
4 CPU Interface
4.1 CPU Interface Pin Mapping
Note
1 If the target MC68K bus is 32-bit, then these signals should be connected to D[31:16].
Table 4-1: CPU Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Name Generic #1 Generic #2 Hitachi SH-3 Hitachi SH-4 Motorola
MC68K #1
Motorola
MC68K #2
AB[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1] A[16:1]
AB0 A0 A0 A0 A0 LDS# A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]1
CS# External Decode CSn# CSn# External Decode
BCLK BCLK BCLK CKIO CKIO CLK CLK
BS# Connect to VSS Connect to IOVDD BS# BS# AS# AS#
RD/WR# RD1# Connect to IOVDD RD/WR# RD/WR# R/W# R/W#
RD# RD0# RD# RD# RD# Connect to IOVDD SIZ1
WE0# WE0# WE# WE0# WE0# Connect to IOVDD SIZ0
WE1# WE1# BHE# WE1# WE1# UDS# DS#
WAIT# WAIT# WAIT# WAIT# RDY# DTACK# DSACK1#
RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
4.2 CPU Bus Connector Pin Mapping
Table 4-2: CPU Bus Connector (H1) Pinout
Connector
Pin No. Comments
1Connected to DB0 of the S1D13705
2Connected to DB1 of the S1D13705
3Connected to DB2 of the S1D13705
4Connected to DB3 of the S1D13705
5Ground
6Ground
7Connected to DB4 of the S1D13705
8Connected to DB5 of the S1D13705
9Connected to DB6 of the S1D13705
10 Connected to DB7 of the S1D13705
11 Ground
12 Ground
13 Connected to DB8 of the S1D13705
14 Connected to DB9 of the S1D13705
15 Connected to DB10 of the S1D13705
16 Connected to DB11 of the S1D13705
17 Ground
18 Ground
19 Connected to DB12 of the S1D13705
20 Connected to DB13 of the S1D13705
21 Connected to DB14 of the S1D13705
22 Connected to DB15 of the S1D13705
23 Connected to RESET# of the S1D13705
24 Ground
25 Ground
26 Ground
27 +12 volt supply
28 +12 volt supply
29 Connected to WE0# of the S1D13705
30 Connected to WAIT# of the S1D13705
31 Connected to CS# of the S1D13705
32 Not connected
33 Connected to WE1# of the S1D13705
34 Connected to IOVDD
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
Table 4-3: CPU Bus Connector (H2) Pinout
Connector
Pin No. Comments
1Connected to AB0 of the S1D13705
2Connected to AB1 of the S1D13705
3Connected to AB2 of the S1D13705
4Connected to AB3 of the S1D13705
5Connected to AB4 of the S1D13705
6Connected to AB5 of the S1D13705
7Connected to AB6 of the S1D13705
8Connected to AB7 of the S1D13705
9Ground
10 Ground
11 Connected to AB8 of the S1D13705
12 Connected to AB9 of the S1D13705
13 Connected to AB10 of the S1D13705
14 Connected to AB11 of the S1D13705
15 Connected to AB12 of the S1D13705
16 Connected to AB13 of the S1D13705
17 Ground
18 Ground
19 Connected to AB14 of the S1D13705
20 Connected to AB15 of the S1D13705
21 Connected to AB16 of the S1D13705
22 Not connected
23 Not connected
24 Not connected
25 Ground
26 Ground
27 +5 volt supply
28 +5 volt supply
29 Connected to RD/WR# of the S1D13705
30 Connected to BS# of the S1D13705
31 Connected to BCLK of the S1D13705
32 Connected to RD# of the S1D13705
33 Not connected
34 Not connected
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
5 LCD Interface Pin Mapping
Note
1These pin mappings use signal names commonly used for each panel type, however
signal names may differ between panel manufacturers. The values shown in brackets
represent the color components as mapped to the corresponding FPDATxx signals at
the first valid edge of FPSHIFT. For further FPDATxx to LCD interface mapping, see
S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
2LCDPWR on J5 can be inverted by setting JP6 to 1-2.
Table 5-1: LCD Signal Connector (J5)
Pin Name Connector Pin
No.
Monochrome Passive Color Passive Panel
Color TFT Panel
Single Dual Single Dual
Format 1 Format 2
4-bit 8-bit 8-bit 4-bit 8-bit 8-bit 8-Bit 9-bit 12-bit
BFPDAT0 1 driven 0 D0 LD0 driven 0 D0 (B5)1D0 (G3)1LD0 (lR2)1R2 R3
BFPDAT1 3 driven 0 D1 LD1 driven 0 D1 (R5)1D1 (R3)1LD1 (lB1)1R1 R2
BFPDAT2 5 driven 0 D2 LD2 driven 0 D2 (G4)1D2 (B2)1LD2 (lG1)1R0 R1
BFPDAT3 7 driven 0 D3 LD3 driven 0 D3 (B3)1D3 (G2)1LD3 (lR1)1G2 G3
BFPDAT4 9 D0 D4 UD0 D0 (R2)1D4 (R3)1D4 (R2)1UD0 (uR2)1G1 G2
BFPDAT5 11 D1 D5 UD1 D1 (B1)1D5 (G2)1D5 (B1)1UD1 (uB1)1G0 G1
BFPDAT6 13 D2 D6 UD2 D2 (G1)1D6 (B1)1D6 (G1)1UD2 (uG1)1B2 B3
BFPDAT7 15 D3 D7 UD3 D3 (R1)1D7 (R1)1D7 (R1)1UD3 (uR1)1B1 B2
BFPDAT8 17 GPIO1 B0 B1
BFPDAT9 19 GPIO2 R0
BFPDAT10 21 GPIO3 G0
BFPDAT11 23 GPIO4 B0
BFPSHIFT 33 FPSHIFT
BDRDY 35 & 38 MOD FPSHIFT2 MOD DRDY
BFPLINE 37 FPLINE
BFPFRAME 39 FPFRAME
GND 2-26 (Even Pins) GND
VLCD 30 Adjustable -24V to -14V negative LCD bias
LCDVCC 32 LCDVCC (3.3V / 5.0V)
+12V 34 +12V
VDDH 36 Adjustable +23V to +40V positive LCD bias
BLCDPWR 40 LCDPWR2 (for controlling on-board LCD bias power supply on/off)
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
6 Technical Description
6.1 PCI Bus Support
The S1D13705 does not have on-chip PCI bus interface support. The S1D13705B00C uses
the PCI Bridge FPGA to support the PCI bus. When using the PCI Bridge FPGA, a
Windows device driver is required, see Section 7, “Software” on page 22 for further infor-
mation on available software and drivers.
6.2 Direct Host Bus Interface Support
The S5U13705B00C is specifically designed to work using the PCI Bridge FPGA in a
standard PCI bus environment. However, the S1D13705 directly supports many other host
bus interfaces. Connectors H1 and H2 provide the necessary IO pins to interface to these
host buses. For further information on the host bus interfaces supported, see “CPU
Interface” on page 15.
Note
The PCI Bridge FPGA must be disabled using JP5 in order for direct host bus interface
to operate properly.
6.3 S1D13705 Embedded Memory
The S1D13705 has 80K bytes of embedded SRAM. The 80K byte display buffer address
space is directly and contiguously available through the 17-bit address bus.
The S1D13705 registers are located in the upper 32 bytes of the 128K byte address range
of S1D13705.
6.4 Adjustable LCD Panel Positive Power Supply (VDDH)
For those LCD panels requiring a positive power supply to provide between +23V and
+40V (Iout = 45mA) a power supply has been provided as an integral part of this design.
The VDDH power supply can be adjusted by R15 to provide an output voltage from +23V
to +40V and is enabled and disabled by the active high LCDPWR control signal of
S1D13705 and inverted externally.
Determine the panel’s specific power requirements and set the potentiometer accordingly
before connecting the panel.
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
6.5 Adjustable LCD Panel Negative Power Supply (VLCD)
For those LCD panels requiring a negative power supply to provide between -23V and -
14V (Iout = 25mA) a power supply has been provided as an integral part of this design. The
VLCD power supply can be adjusted by R21 to give an output voltage from -23V to -14V
and is enabled and disabled by the active high LCDPWR control signal of S1D13705 and
inverted externally.
Determine the panel’s specific power requirements and set the potentiometer accordingly
before connecting the panel.
6.6 Passive/Active LCD Panel Support
The S1D13705 directly supports:
• 4/8-bit, single and dual, monochrome passive panels.
• 4/8-bit, single and dual, color passive panels.
• 9/12-bit, TFT active matrix panels.
All the necessary signals are provided on the 40-pin LCD connector J5. For connection
information, refer to Table 5-1: “LCD Signal Connector (J5)” on page 18.
The buffered LCD connector (J5) provides the same LCD panel signals as those directly
from S1D13705, but with voltage-adapting buffers selectable to 3.3V or 5.0V. Pin 32 on
this connector provides a voltage level of 3.3V or 5.0V to the LCD panel logic (see “JP6 -
LCDPWR Polarity” on page 14 for information on setting the panel voltage).
6.7 Power Save Modes
The S1D13705 supports one hardware and one software power save mode. The hardware
power save mode needs to be enabled by setting REG[02h] bit1 to 1 and then can be
activated by DIP switch SW1-6. See Table 3-1: “Configuration DIP Switch Settings” on
page 10.
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
6.8 Clock Options
The input clock (CLKI) frequency can be up to 50MHz for the S1D13705 if the internal
divide-by-2 mode is set. If the clock divider is not used, the maximum CLKI frequency is
25MHz. There is no minimum input clock frequency.
A 6.0MHz oscillator (U2, socketed) is provided as the input clock source. However,
depending on the LCD resolution, desired frame rate and power consumption budget,
another clock frequency may be required.
A jumper, JP7 is provided to allow CLKI input to be the same as BCLK input, for systems
in which is desired to use only one clock signal for both BCLK and CLKI.
The bus clock (BCLK) is selectable and can be provided by a 50MHz oscillator (U7,
socketed) or the host CPU (for non-PCI host).
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
7 Software
This evaluation board, when used with the PCI Bridge FPGA adapter, requires drivers to
work in the 32-bit Windows environment. See the S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device
Driver Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-xx for more information.
Test utilities and display drivers are also available for the S1D13705. Full source code is
available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The display drivers can be customized by
the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by modifying the
source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and drivers are available from your sales support contact or on
the internet at www.erd.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
8 References
8.1 Documents
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples,
document number X27A-G-002-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13XXX 32-Bit Windows Device Driver
Installation Guide, document number X00A-E-003-xx.
8.2 Document Sources
• Epson Research and Development Website: http://www.erd.epson.com.
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
9 Parts List
Item Quantity Reference Part Description
115
C1-C11, C16, C17, C24,
C25 0.1uF, 20%, 50V 1206 pckg., ceramic capacitor
2 1 C12 10uF, 10%, 25V Tantalum capacitor size D
3 2 C22,C18 47uF, 10%, 16V Tantalum capacitor size D
4 3 C19,C20,C21 4.7uF, 10%, 50V Tantalum capacitor size D
5 1 C23 56uF, 20%, 35V, Low ESR Electrolytic, radial, low ESR
6 2 C36,C33 33uF, 10%, 20V Tantalum capacitor size D
7 3 C34,C35,C37 68uF, 10%, 10V Tantalum capacitor size D
8 9 C38-C46 0.22uF, 5%, 50V X7R, 1206 pckg
9 2 H2,H1 HEADER 17X2 0.1", 17x2, unshrouded header
10 6 JP1,JP2,JP3,JP4,JP6,J
P7 HEADER 3 0.1", 3x1, unshrouded header
11 1 JP5 HEADER 2 0.1", 2x1, unshrouded header
12 1 J5 CON40A 0.1", 20x2, 0.025" sq. shrouded
header, center key, t/h
13 1 L1 1uH RCD MCI-1812 inductor 1uH MT or
MSI-1812 1uH MT
14 3 L2,L3,L4 Ferrite Bead Philips BDS3/3/8.9-4S2
15 1 Q1 MMBT3906 Generic MMBT3906
16 1 Q2 MMBT3904 Generic MMBT3904
17 13 R1-R6, R10, R11, R33,
R36-R39 15K, 5% 1206 resistor
18 1 R8 0R 1206 resistor, 0 ohms
19 1 R14 475K, 1% 1206 resistor
20 1 R15 200K Pot. 200K Trim POT Spectrol 63S204T607
or equiv.
21 1 R16 14K, 1% 1206 resistor
22 2 R18, R17 10K, 5% 1206 resistor
23 3 R19, R20, R32 100K, 5% 1206 resistor
24 1 R21 100K Pot. 100K Trim POT Spectrol 63S104T607
or equiv.
25 3 R34, R35, R40 1K, 5% 1206 resistor
26 1 SW1 SW DIP-6 6 position DIP switch
27 1 U1 S1D13705
28 1 U2 14-pin DIP socket Machined socket, 14-pin
29 1 U2 6MHz Fox 6.0MHz oscillator or equiv., 14-pin
DIP pckg, socketed
30 3 U3,U4,U5 74AHC244 SO-22, TI74AHC244 or equivalent
31 1 U6 LT1117CM-3.3 Linear Technology 5V to 3.3V
regulator, 800mA or equiv.
Epson Research and Development Page 25
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
32 1 U7 14-pin DIP socket Machined socket, 14-pin
33 1 U7 50MHz Fox 50.0MHz oscillator or equiv., 14-
pin DIP pckg, socketed
34 1 U8 74AHC04/SO SO-14, 74AHC04
35 1 U9 74HCT86/SO SO-14, 74HCT86
36 1 U10 RD-0412 Xentek RD-0412, positive power
supply
37 1 U11 EPN001 Xentek EPN001, negative power
supply
38 1 U14 EPF6016TC144-2 Altera EPF6016TC144-2
39 1 U15 8-pin DIP socket Machined socket, 8-pin
40 1 U15 EPC1441PC8 Altera EPC1441PC8, socketed
41 6 JP1,JP2,JP3,JP4,JP6,J
P7 Jumper shunt for 0.1" header
42 1 Bracket Computer Bracket, Blank - PCI,
Keystone - Cat. No. 9203
43 2 Scew Pan Head, #4-40 x 1/4"
Item Quantity Reference Part Description
Page 26 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
10 Schematics
Figure 10-1: S1D13705B00C Schematics (1 of 5)
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
By-pass Capacitors (1 per power pin)
Not Populated
Not Populated
<Doc> 2.0
S5U13705B00C - PCI bus: 13705F0A Chip
15Tuesday, October 02, 2001
Title
Size Document Number Rev
Date: Sheet of
CNF4
CNF4
BS#
AB15
CNF3
DB14
DB9
DB7
DB4
CNF2
AB10
AB5
AB16
BS#
FPDAT4
FPDAT3
AB11
AB0
CNF0
DB5
FPDAT2
AB6
DB13
AB7
AB2
DB[15:0]
DB10
DB2
AB9
DB8
DB6
DB0
FPDAT6
FPDAT1
AB12
SUSPEND
DB3
FPDAT5DB12
DB1
FPDAT7
CNF1
DB15
AB8
AB3
AB[16:0]
DB11
AB13
AB4
AB14
AB1
FPDAT[7:0]
FPDAT0
SUSPEND
CNF3
CNF2
CNF0
CNF1
WAIT#
4,5
FPDAT[7:0]
2
FPDAT8 2
FPDAT10 2
FPDAT9 2
FPDAT11 2
LCDPWR 2,3
FPFRAME 2
FPLINE 2
FPSHIFT 2
DRDY 2
DB[15:0]
4,5
AB[16:0]
4,5
RD/WR#
4,5
WE1#
4,5
WE0#
4,5 RD#
4,5
BS#
4,5
RESET#
4,5
CS#
4,5
CNF4 3
BCLK
4
BUSCLK 5
3.3V
IOVDD
+5V
+5V
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
+5V
3.3V
IOVDD
R4
15K
C6
0.1uF
U8C
74AHC04/SO
5 6
14
7
U8D
74AHC04/SO
9 8
14
7
U1
SED1375F0A
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
37
36
35
34
32
31
30
74
43
61
20
40
72
60
50
27
80
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
33
49
48
47
46
45
79
78
77
76
75
73
51
71
2
44
1
21
10
41
52
29
26
25
24
23
39
38
28
42
22
AB0
AB1
AB2
AB3
AB4
AB5
AB6
AB7
AB8
AB9
AB10
AB11
AB12
AB13
AB14
AB15
FPDAT0
FPDAT1
FPDAT2
FPDAT3
FPDAT5
FPDAT6
FPDAT7
CS#
LCDPWR
COREVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
DB8
DB9
DB10
DB11
DB12
DB13
DB14
DB15
FPDAT4
CNF0
CNF1
CNF2
CNF3
AB16
RD/WR#
WE1#
WE0#
RD#
BS#
RESET#
CLKI
BCLK
WAIT#
TESTEN
COREVDD
COREVDD
IOVDD
COREVDD
IOVDD
IOVDD
FPDAT8/GPIO1
FPDAT9GPIO2
FPDAT10/GPIO3
FPDAT11/GPIO4
FPFRAME
FPLINE
FPSHIFT
DRDY
GPIO0
C17
0.1uF
R9 0R
SW1
SW DIP-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
11
10
9
8
7
R7 0R
C1
0.1uF
JP2
HEADER 3
1
2
3
R8 0R
R5
15K
R10
15K
R11
15K
C2
0.1uF
C24
0.1uF
U8F
74AHC04/SO
13 12
14
7
JP3
HEADER 3
1
2
3
U8A
74AHC04/SO
1 2
14
7
C5
0.1uF
JP7
HEADER 3
1
2
3
C7
0.1uF
R6
15K
C3
0.1uF
JP1
HEADER 3
1
2
3
R2
15K
U8E
74AHC04/SO
11 10
14
7
U7 50MHz
1
87
14 NC
OUTGND
VCC
R3
15K
C4
0.1uF
C25
0.1uF
U2 6MHz
1
87
14 NC
OUTGND
VCC U8B
74AHC04/SO
3 4
14
7
R1
15K
Epson Research and Development Page 27
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
Figure 10-2: S1D13705B00C Schematics (2 of 5)
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
D
C
C
B B
A A
Not Populated
1 2 5.0V LCD Panels
2 3 3.3V LCD Panels
SELECTABLE 3.3V / 5.0V COLOR/MONO LCD CONNECTOR
<Doc> 2.0
S5U13705B00C - PCI bus: LCD connector
B
25Wednesday, October 10, 2001
Title
Size Document Number
Rev
Date: Sheet of
FPDAT1
BFPDAT9
BFPDAT8
BFPDAT4
BFPFRAME
LCDVCC
BFPDAT7
BFPDAT2
BFPLINE
BFPDAT5
FPDAT3
BFPDAT11
BFPDAT10
BFPDAT3
FPDAT0
BLCDPWR
FPDAT7
BFPDAT1
FPDAT2
FPDAT5
BFPSHIFT
FPDAT[7:0]
FPDAT4
BFPDAT0
BDRDY
LCDVCC
FPDAT6 BFPDAT6
LCDP
FPDAT[7:0]1
LCDPWR1,3 nLCDPWR 3
FPDAT81
FPDAT91
FPDAT101
FPDAT111
FPSHIFT1
DRDY1
FPLINE1
FPFRAME1
VDDH
VLCD
+5V
+5V
3.3V
+12V
JP6
HEADER 3
1
2
3
+
C12
10uF/25V
R41 0R
U5
74AHC244
218
416
614
812
11 9
13 7
15 5
17 3
1
19
20
10
1A1 1Y1
1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
2A1 2Y1
2A2 2Y2
2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
1G
2G
VCC
GND
J5
CON40A
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
U3
74AHC244
218
416
614
812
11 9
13 7
15 5
17 3
1
19
20
10
1A1 1Y1
1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
2A1 2Y1
2A2 2Y2
2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
1G
2G
VCC
GND
U4
74AHC244
218
416
614
812
11 9
13 7
15 5
17 3
1
19
20
10
1A1 1Y1
1A2 1Y2
1A3 1Y3
1A4 1Y4
2A1 2Y1
2A2 2Y2
2A3 2Y3
2A4 2Y4
1G
2G
VCC
GND
U6
LT1117CM-3.3
3
1
2
VIN
A
D
J
VOUT
C11
0.1uF
C8
0.1uF
C9
0.1uF
C10
0.1uF
JP4
HEADER 3
1
2
3
Page 28 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
Figure 10-3: S1D13705B00C Schematics (3 of 5)
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
D
C
C
B B
A A
<Doc> 2.0
S5U13705B00C -PCI bus: LCD Power Supplies
B
35Tuesday, October 02, 2001
Title
Size Document Number
Rev
Date: Sheet of
nLCDPWR
nLCDPWR 2
CNF41
LCDPWR1,2
PSVCC
IOVDD
VLCD
+5V PSVCC
PSVCC
PSIOVDD
VDDH
PSIOVDD
PSVCC
+5V
+5V
+5V +5V
U9C
74HCT86/SO
9
10
8
147
C16
0.1uF
+
C21
4.7uF/50V
R18
10K R19
100K
R20
100K
Q2
MMBT3904
1
2 3
R14
475K
R15
200K Pot.
1 3
2
R16
14K
+
C19
4.7uF/50V
+
C20
4.7uF/50V
+
C22
47uF/16V
+
C23
56uF/35V Low ESR
+
C18
47uF/16V
R17
10K
U9B
74HCT86/SO
4
5
6
147
R21
100K Pot.
1
3
2
U10
RD-0412
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VOUT_ADJ
DC_IN
RE
MOTE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
N
C
GND
GND
D
C
_OUT
U11
EPN001
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
D
C_
OUT
DC_OUT
N
C
GN
D
GN
D
V
O
UT_ADJ
NC
N
C
N
C
DC
_I
N
DC
_I
N
L1
1uH
2 5
Q1
MMBT3906
1
23
L3
1 2
L4
1 2
U9D
74HCT86/SO
12
13
11
147
L2
1 2
U9A
74HCT86/SO
1
2
3
147
Epson Research and Development Page 29
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
Figure 10-4: S1D13705B00C Schematics (4 of 5)
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
D
C
C
B B
A A
Place close to PCIB pin 61 & 62Place close to PCIB pin 5 & 6 Place close to PCIA pin 2
<Doc> 2.0
S5U13705B00C - PCI bus: Host Bus Connectors
B
45Tuesday, October 02, 2001
Title
Size Document Number
Rev
Date: Sheet of
AD16
AB3AB2
DB14
DB12
AD2
AB1
AD1
AD27
AD6
AB9
AB15
AD14
AD15
AB[16:0]
DB15
AB16
AB10
AD12
AD26
DB9
AD25
DB11
AD[31:0]
DB4 DB5
AD29
AD13
AD8
AB7
DB1
AD7
AD21
AB4
DB13
AB0
DB8
AD5
AD28
DB7
AB11
AD30
AB12
AD19
AB13
AD22
AD10
AB14
DB10
AD0
AB6
AB5
AD18
AD4
DB0
AD31
DB3
DB[15:0]
AD3
AD11 AB8
AD9
DB2
AD17
AD20
AD24
DB6
AD23
IDSEL5
CLK 5
RESET#
1,5
PERR#
5
RST#5
AD[31:0]5
RD# 1,5
WE0#
1,5
TRDY#
5
SERR# 5
IRDY# 5
FRAME#5
STOP#5AB[16:0]1,5
C/BE2#
5
C/BE3#
5
DEVSEL#
5
BS# 1,5
C/BE1#
5
BCLK1
RD/WR#1,5
WAIT# 1,5
CS#1,5
C/BE0#
5
WE1#
1,5
PAR5
DB[15:0]1,5
+5V+5V
+5V
+5V
+12V
+12V
+12V
+5V
+5V
+12V
+12V
+5V
IOVDD
+
C36
33u 20V
PCIB1
PCI-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
-12V
TCK
GND
TDO
+5V
+5V
INTB#
INTD#
PRSNT#1
RESERVED
PRSNT#2
RESERVED
GND
CLK
GND
REQ#
+VI/O
AD31
AD29
GND
AD27
AD25
+3.3V
C/BE3#
AD23
GND
AD21
AD19
+3.3V
AD17
C/BE2#
GND
IRDY#
+3.3V
DEVSEL#
GND
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3V
SERR#
3.3V
C/BE1#
AD14
GND
AD12
AD10
GND
AD8
AD7
+3.3V
AD5
AD3
GND
AD1
+VI/O
ACK64#
+5V
+5V
PCIA1
PCI-A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
TRST#
+12V
TMS
TDI
+5V
INTA#
INTC#
+5V
RESERVED
+VI/O
RESERVED
RESERVED
RST#
+VI/O
GNT#
GND
RESERVED
AD30
+3.3V
AD28
AD26
GND
AD24
IDSEL
+3.3V
AD22
AD20
GND
AD18
AD16
+3.3V
FRAME#
GND
TRDY#
GND
STOP#
+3.3V
SDONE
SBO#
GND
PAR
AD15
+3.3V
AD13
AD11
GND
AD9
C/BE0#
+3.3V
AD6
AD4
GND
AD2
AD0
+VI/O
REQ64#
+5V
+5V
+
C33
33u 20V
+
C34
68u 10V
+
C35
68u 10V
H2
HEADER 17X2
12
34
56
78
910
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
H1
HEADER 17X2
12
34
56
78
910
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
+
C37
68u 10V
Page 30 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
Figure 10-5: S1D13705B00C Schematics (5 of 5)
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D
D
C
C
B B
A A
Not Populated
FPGA configuration EPROM
Place jumper to disable FPGA
<Doc> 2.0
S5U13705B00C - PCI bus: FPGA--6016
B
55Tuesday, October 02, 2001
Title
Size Document Number
Rev
Date: Sheet of
AB[16:0]
AB14
nSTATUS
A
D
12
AB10
A
D
8
AD31
A
D
21
A
D
25
DCLK
DB4
CONF_DONE
AB16
AB15
DB6
A
D
15
DB12
AD28
AD26
DB14
D
C
L
K
A
D
18
DB8
AB13
AB11
DB5
A
D
19
DATA
AB5
DB2
AD0
DB1
A
D
24
AB0
n
S
T
AT
U
S
AD5
A
D
22
AD30
AD3
DB7
DB11
AB9
AB4
A
D
11
AB7
DB13
DB3
A
D
14
AD17
AD27
AD[31:0]
A
D
9
DB15
AD1
A
D
16
AB6
AB1
AB2
CONF_DONE
AD7
AD6
AB8
AD29
A
D
23
AD10
DB[15:0]
DB9
AB12
AD2
D
ATA
DB10
DB0
AD4
AB3
AD13
A
D
20
FRAME#4
STOP#4
WE1# 1,4
WE0# 1,4
CLK4
AD[31:0]4
SERR#4
C/BE1#4
TRDY#4
RD/WR# 1,4
CS# 1,4
C/BE2#
4
WAIT# 1,4
C/BE3#4
RESET# 1,4
BUSCLK 1
RD# 1,4
DEVSEL#4
C/BE0#4
DB[15:0] 1,4
PAR
4
PERR#
4
IRDY#4
IDSEL4
BS# 1,4
RST#4
AB[16:0] 1,4
+5V
IOVDD
+5V
+5V
IOVDD
+5V+5V
+5V
IOVDD
+5V
+5V
+5V
IOVDD
IOVDD
+5V
+5V
IOVDD
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
U14 EPF6016TC144-2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
1
0
9
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
4
1
1
5
1
1
6
1
1
7
1
1
8
1
1
9
1
2
0
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
5
1
2
6
1
2
7
1
2
8
1
2
9
1
3
0
1
3
1
1
3
2
1
3
3
134
1
3
5
1
3
6
1
3
7
1
3
8
1
3
9
1
4
0
1
4
1
1
4
2
1
4
3
1
4
4
IO1
IO2
IO3
nCE
GND
Vccint
Vccio
IO8
IO9
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15
IO16
I17
GND
Vccio
I20
IO21
IO22
IO23
IO24
IO25
IO26
IO27
IO28
IO29
GND
Vccint
Vccio
MSEL
IO34
IO35
IO36
IO37
IO38
IO39
IO40
IO41
IO42
IO43
IO44
IO45
IO46
IO47
IO48
IO49
IO50
IO51
IO52
n
C
ON
FIG
GND
V
cc
io
n
S
TA
TU
S
IO57
IO58
IO59
IO60
IO61
IO62
IO63
IO64
IO65
IO66
IO67
IO68
IO69
IO70
IO71
IO72
IO73
IO74
IO75
GND
Vccint
Vccio
IO79
IO80
IO81
IO82
IO83
IO84
IO85
IO86
IO87
IO88
I89
GND
Vccio
I92
IO93
IO94
IO95
IO96
IO97
IO98
IO99
IO100
IO101
GND
Vccint
Vccio
CONF_DONE
IO106
IO107
IO108
I
O
109
I
O
110
I
O
111
I
O
112
I
O
113
IO114
I
O
115
I
O
116
I
O
117
I
O
118
I
O
119
IO120
IO121
I
O
122
I
O
123
I
O
124
D
A
T
A
GND
Vc
ci
o
DC
LK
I
O
129
I
O
130
I
O
131
IO132
I
O
133
I
O
134
I
O
135
I
O
136
I
O
137
I
O
138
I
O
139
I
O
140
I
O
141
I
O
142
I
O
143
IO144
C38
0.22u
R36
15K R37
15K R38
15K R39
15K
R33
15K
U15
EPC1441PC8
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
DATA
DCLK
OE
nCS GND
nCASC
VCC
VCC
R34
1K
R35
1K
R40
1K
S1
SW DIP-4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
C40
0.22u
C39
0.22u
C44
0.22u
C42
0.22u
C41
0.22u
C43
0.22u
C46
0.22u
JP5
HEADER 2
1
2
C45
0.22u
R32
100K
Epson Research and Development Page 31
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual S1D13705
Issue Date: 2002/09/16 X27A-G-014-02
11 Board Layout
Page 32 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 S5U13705B00C Rev. 2.0 Evaluation Board User Manual
X27A-G-014-02 Issue Date: 2002/09/16
12 Technical Support
12.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp/
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
http://www.epson.com.hk/
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
http://www.epson.com.tw/
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
http://www.epson.com.sg/
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
http://www.epson-electronics.de/
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com/
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
Document Number: X27A-E-006-01
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
WINDOWS® CE 3.x DISPLAY DRIVERS
The Windows CE 3.x display driver is designed to support the S1D13705 Embedded
Memory LCD Controller running the Microsoft Windows CE operating system, version
3.0. The driver is capable of: 4 and 8 bit-per-pixel landscape modes (no rotation), and 4 and
8 bit-per-pixel SwivelView™ 270 degree mode.
This document and the source code for the Windows CE drivers are updated as appropriate.
Before beginning any development, please check the Epson Electronics America Website
at www.eea.epson.com or the Epson Research and Development Website at
www.erd.epson.com for the latest revisions.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
Example Driver Builds
The following sections describe how to build the Windows CE display driver for:
1. Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00 using the GUI interface.
2. Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00 using the command-line interface.
In all examples “x:” refers to the drive letter where Platform Builder is installed.
Build for CEPC (X86) on Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00 using the GUI Interface
1. Install Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows NT Workstation version
4.0 with Service Pack 5 or later.
2. Install Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00.
3. Start Platform Builder by double-clicking on the Microsoft Windows CE Platform
Builder icon.
4. Create a new project.
a. Select File | New.
b. In the dialog box, select the Platforms tab.
c. In the platforms dialog box, select “WCE Platform”, set a location for the project
(such as x:\myproject), set the platform name (such as myplatform), and set the
Processors to “Win32 (WCE x86)”.
d. Click the OK button.
e. In the dialog box “WCE Platform - Step 1 of 2”, select CEPC.
f. Click the Next button.
g. In the dialog box “WCE Platform - Step 2 of 2”, select Minimal OS (MinKern).
h. Click the Finish button.
i. In the dialog box “New Platform Information”, click the OK button.
5. Set the active configuration to “Win32 (WCE x86) Release”.
a. From the Build menu, select “Set Active Configuration”.
b. Select “MYPLATFORM - Win32 (WCE x86) Release”.
c. Click the OK button.
6. Add the environment variable CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X.
a. From the Platform menu, select “Settings”.
b. Select the “Environment” tab.
c. In the Variable box, type “CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X”.
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
d. In the Value box, type “1”.
e. Click the Set button.
f. Click the OK button.
7. Create a new directory S1D13705, under x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display,
and copy the S1D13705 driver source code into this new directory.
8. Add the S1D13705 driver component.
a. From the Platform menu, select “Insert | User Component”.
b. Set “Files of type:” to “All Files (*.*)”.
c. Select the file x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705\sources.
d. In the “User Component Target File” dialog box, select browse and then select the
path and the file name of “sources”.
9. Delete the component “ddi_flat”.
a. In the Workspace window, select the ComponentView tab.
b. Show the tree for MYPLATFORM components by clicking on the ‘+’ sign at the
root of the tree.
c. Right-click on the ddi_flat component.
d. Select “Delete”.
e. From the File menu, select “Save Workspace”.
10. From the Workspace window, click on ParameterView Tab. Show the tree for MY-
PLATFORM Parameters by clicking on the ‘+’ sign at the root of the tree. Expand the
the WINCE300 tree and then click on “Hardware Specific Files” and then double
click on “PLATFORM.BIB”. Edit the file the PLATFORM.BIB file and make the fol-
lowing two changes:
a. Insert the following text after the line “IF ODO_NODISPLAY !”:
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\S1D13X0X.dll NK SH
ENDIF
b. Find the section shown below, and insert the lines as marked:
IF CEPC_DDI_FLAT !
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X! ;Insert this line
IF CEPC_DDI_S3VIRGE !
IF CEPC_DDI_CT655X !
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA8BPP !
IF CEPC_DDI_S3TRIO64 !
IF CEPC_DDI_ATI !
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_flat.dll NK SH
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF ;Insert this line
ENDIF
11. Modify MODE0.H.
The file MODE0.H (located in x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705)
contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, color depth (bpp),
display type, display rotation, etc.
Before building the display driver, refer to the descriptions in the file MODE0.H for
the default settings of the console driver. If the default does not match the configura-
tion you are building for then MODE0.H will have to be regenerated with the correct
information.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the header file. For information on how to use
13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, document
number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, export the file as a “C Header File for
S1D13705 WinCE Drivers”. Save the new configuration as MODE0.H in the
\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display, replacing the original configuration file.
12. From the Platform window, click on ParameterView Tab. Show the tree for MY-
PLATFORM Parameters by clicking on the ‘+’ sign at the root of the tree. Expand the
the WINCE300 tree and click on “Hardware Specific Files”, then double click on
“PLATFORM.REG”. Edit the file PLATFORM.REG to match the screen resolution,
color depth, and rotation information in MODE.H.
For example, the display driver section of PLATFORM.REG should be as follows
when using a 320x240 LCD panel with a color depth of 8 bpp and a SwivelView
mode of 0° (landscape):
; Default for EPSON Display Driver
; 320x240 at 8 bits/pixel, LCD display, no rotation
; Useful Hex Values
; 1024=0x400, 768=0x300 640=0x280 480=0x1E0 320=140 240=0xF0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
“Width”=dword:140
“Height”=dword:F0
“Bpp”=dword:8
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
“ActiveDisp”=dword:1
“Rotation”=dword:0
13. From the Build menu, select “Rebuild Platform” to generate a Windows CE image file
(NK.BIN) in the project directory x:\myproject\myplatform\reldir\x86_release\nk.bin.
Build for CEPC (X86) on Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00 using the Command-Line Interface
1. Install Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows NT Workstation version
4.0 with Service Pack 5 or later.
2. Install Windows CE Platform Builder 3.00.
3. Create a batch file called x:\wince300\cepath.bat. Put the following in cepath.bat:
x:
cd \wince300\public\common\oak\misc
call wince x86 i486 CE MINSHELL CEPC
set IMGNODEBUGGER=1
set WINCEREL=1
set CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X=1
4. Generate the build environment by calling cepath.bat.
5. Create a new folder called S1D13705 under x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\dis-
play, and copy the S1D13705 driver source code into x:\wince300\platform\cepc\driv-
ers\display\S1D13705.
6. Edit the file x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display\dirs and add S1D13705 into
the list of directories.
7. Edit the file x:\wince300\platform\cepc\files\platform.bib and make the following two
changes:
a. Insert the following text after the line “IF ODO_NODISPLAY !”:
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\S1D13X0X.dll NK SH
ENDIF
b. Find the section shown below, and insert the lines as marked:
IF CEPC_DDI_FLAT !
IF CEPC_DDI_S1D13X0X! ;Insert this line
IF CEPC_DDI_S3VIRGE !
IF CEPC_DDI_CT655X !
IF CEPC_DDI_VGA8BPP !
IF CEPC_DDI_S3TRIO64 !
IF CEPC_DDI_ATI !
ddi.dll $(_FLATRELEASEDIR)\ddi_flat.dll NK SH
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF
ENDIF ;Insert this line
ENDIF
8. Modify MODE0.H.
The file MODE0.H (located in x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705)
contains the register values required to set the screen resolution, color depth (bpp),
display type, display rotation, etc.
Before building the display driver, refer to the descriptions in the file MODE0.H for
the default settings of the display driver. If the default does not match the configura-
tion you are building for then MODE0.H will have to be regenerated with the correct
information.
Use the program 13705CFG to generate the header file. For information on how to use
13705CFG, refer to the 13705CFG Configuration Program User Manual, document
number X27A-B-001-xx, available at www.erd.epson.com
After selecting the desired configuration, export the file as a “C Header File for
S1D13705 WinCE Drivers”. Save the new configuration as MODE0.H in the
\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display, replacing the original configuration file.
9. Edit the file PLATFORM.REG to match the screen resolution, color depth, and rota-
tion information in MODE.H. PLATFORM.REG is located in x:\wince300\plat-
form\cepc\files.
For example, the display driver section of PLATFORM.REG should be as follows
when using a 320x240 LCD panel with a color depth of 8 bpp and a SwivelView
mode of 0° (landscape):
; Default for EPSON Display Driver
; 320x240 at 8 bits/pixel, LCD display, no rotation
; Useful Hex Values
; 1024=0x400, 768=0x300 640=0x280 480=0x1E0 320=140 240=0xF0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
“Width”=dword:140
“Height”=dword:F0
“Bpp”=dword:8
“ActiveDisp”=dword:1
“Rotation”=dword:0
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
10. Delete all the files in the x:\wince300\release directory and delete the file
x:\wince300\platform\cepc\*.bif
11. Type BLDDEMO <ENTER> at the command prompt to generate a Windows CE image
file. The file generated will be x:\wince300\release\nk.bin.
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
Installation for CEPC Environment
Once the NK.BIN file is built, the CEPC environment can be started by booting either from a
floppy or hard drive configured with a Windows 9x operating system. The two methods are
described below.
1. To start CEPC after booting from a floppy drive:
a. Create a bootable floppy disk.
b. Edit CONFIG.SYS on the floppy disk to contain only the following line:
device=a:\himem.sys
c. Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT on the floppy disk to contain the following lines:
mode com1:9600,n,8,1
loadcepc /B:9600 /C:1 c:\nk.bin
d. Copy LOADCEPC.EXE and HIMEM.SYS to the bootable floppy disk. Search for
the loadCEPC utility in your Windows CE directories.
e. Copy NK.BIN to c:\.
f. Boot the system from the bootable floppy disk.
2. To start CEPC after booting from a hard drive:
a. Copy LOADCEPC.EXE to C:\. Search for the loadCEPC utility in your Windows
CE directories.
b. Edit CONFIG.SYS on the hard drive to contain only the following line:
device=c:\himem.sys
c. Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT on the hard drive to contain the following lines:
mode com1:9600,n,8,1
loadcepc /B:9600 /C:1 c:\nk.bin
d. Copy NK.BIN and HIMEM.SYS to c:\.
e. Boot the system.
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
Configuration
There are several issues to consider when configuring the display driver. The issues cover
debugging support, register initialization values and memory allocation. Each of these
issues is discussed in the following sections.
Compile Switches
There are several switches, specific to the S1D13705 display driver, which affect the
display driver.
The switches are added or removed from the compile options in the file SOURCES.
WINCEVER
This option is automatically set to the numerical version of WinCE for version 2.12 or later.
If the environment variable, _WINCEOSVER is not defined, then WINCEVER will
default 2.11. The S1D display driver may test against this option to support different
WinCE version-specific features.
EnablePreferVmem
This option enables the use of off-screen video memory. When this option is enabled,
WinCE can optimize some BLT operations by using off-screen video memory to store
images. You may need to disable this option for systems with limited off-screen memory.
EpsonMessages
This debugging option enables the display of EPSON-specific debug messages. These
debug message are sent to the serial debugging port. This option should be disabled unless
you are debugging the display driver, as they will significantly impact the performance of
the display driver.
DEBUG_MONITOR
This option enables the use of the debug monitor. The debug monitor can be invoked when
the display driver is first loaded and can be used to view registers, and perform a few
debugging tasks. The debug monitor is still under development and is UNTESTED.
This option should remain disabled unless you are performing specific debugging tasks that
require the debug monitor.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
GrayPalette
This option is intended for the support of monochrome panels only.
The option causes palette colors to be grayscaled for correct display on a mono panel. For
use with color panels this option should not be enabled.
Mode File
The MODE tables (contained in files MODE0.H, MODE1.H, MODE2.H . . .) contain
register information to control the desired display mode. The MODE tables must be
generated by the configuration program 13705CFG.EXE. The display driver comes with
example MODE tables.
By default, only MODE0.H is used by the display driver. New mode tables can be created
using the 13705CFG program. Edit the #include section of MODE.H to add the new mode
table.
If you only support a single display mode, you do not need to add any information to the
WinCE registry. If, however, you support more that one display mode, you should create
registry values (see below) that will establish the initial display mode. If your display driver
contains multiple mode tables, and if you do not add any registry values, the display driver
will default to the first mode table in your list.
To select which display mode the display driver should use upon boot, add the following
lines to your PLATFORM.REG file:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\Display\S1D13705]
“Width”=dword:140
“Height”=dword:F0
“Bpp”=dword:8
“Rotation”=dword:0
“RefreshRate”=dword:3C
“Flags”=dword:1
Note that all dword values are in hexadecimal, therefore 140h = 320, F0h = 240, and 3Ch
= 60. The value for “Flags” should be 1 (LCD). When the display driver starts, it will read
these values in the registry and attempt to match a mode table against them. All values must
be present and valid for a match to occur, otherwise the display driver will default to the
first mode table in your list.
A WinCE desktop application (or control panel applet) can change these registry values,
and the display driver will select a different mode upon warmboot. This allows the display
driver to support different display configurations and/or orientations. An example appli-
cation that controls these registry values will be made available upon the next release of the
display driver; preliminary alpha code is available by special request.
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
Resource Management Issues
The Windows CE 3.0 OEM must deal with certain display driver issues relevant to
Windows CE 3.0. These issues require the OEM balance factors such as: system vs. display
memory utilization, video performance, and power off capabilities.
The section “Simple Display Driver Configuration” on page 15 provides a configuration
which should work with most Windows CE platforms. This section is only intended as a
means of getting started. Once the developer has a functional system, it is recommended to
optimize the display driver configuration as described below in “Description of Windows
CE Display Driver Issues”.
Description of Windows CE Display Driver Issues
The following are some issues to consider when configuring the display driver to work with
Windows CE:
1. When Windows CE enters the Suspend state (power-off), the LCD controller and dis-
play memory may lose power, depending on how the OEM sets up the system. If dis-
play memory loses power, all images stored in display memory are lost.
If power-off/power-on features are required, the OEM has several options:
• If display memory power is turned off, add code to the display driver to save any
images in display memory to system memory before power-off, and add code to
restore these images after power-on.
• If display memory power is turned off, instruct Windows CE to redraw all images
upon power-on. Unfortunately it is not possible to instruct Windows CE to redraw
any off-screen images, such as icons, slider bars, etc., so in this case the OEM
must also configure the display driver to never use off-screen memory.
• Ensure that display memory never loses power.
2. Using off-screen display memory significantly improves display performance. For ex-
ample, slider bars appear more smooth when using off-screen memory. To enable or
disable the use of off-screen memory, edit the file: x:\wince300\platform\cepc\driv-
ers\display\S1D13705\sources. In SOURCES, there is a line which, when uncom-
mented, will instruct Windows CE to use off-screen display memory (if sufficient
display memory is available):
CDEFINES=$(CDEFINES) -DEnablePreferVmem
3. In the file PROJECT.REG under CE 3.0, there is a key called PORepaint (search the
Windows CE directories for PROJECT.REG). PORepaint is relevant when the Sus-
pend state is entered or exited. PORepaint can be set to 0, 1, or 2 as described below:
a. PORepaint=0
• This mode tells Windows CE not to save or restore display memory on sus-
pend or resume.
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
• Since display data is not saved and not repainted, this is the FASTEST mode.
• Main display data in display memory must NOT be corrupted or lost on sus-
pend. The memory clock must remain running.
• Off-screen data in display memory must NOT be corrupted or lost on sus-
pend. The memory clock must remain running.
• This mode cannot be used if power to the display memory is turned off.
b. PORepaint=1
• This is the default mode for Windows CE.
• This mode tells Windows CE to save the main display data to the system
memory on suspend.
• This mode is used if display memory power is going to be turned off when the
system is suspended, and there is enough system memory to save the image.
• Any off-screen data in display memory is LOST when suspended. Therefore
off-screen memory usage must either be disabled in the display driver (i.e:
EnablePreferVmem not defined in SOURCES file), or new OEM-specific
code must be added to the display driver to save off-screen data to system
memory when the system is suspended, and restored when resumed.
• If off-screen data is used (provided that the OEM has provided code to save
off-screen data when the system suspends), additional code must be added to
the display driver’s surface allocation routine to prevent the display driver
from allocating the “main memory save region” in display memory. When
WinCE OS attempts to allocate a buffer to save the main display data, WinCE
OS marks the allocation request as preferring display memory. We believe
this is incorrect. Code must be added to prevent this specific allocation from
being allocated in display memory - it MUST be allocated from system mem-
ory.
• Since the main display data is copied to system memory on suspend, and then
simply copied back on resume, this mode is FAST, but not as fast as mode 0.
c. PORepaint=2
• This mode tells WinCE to not save the main display data on suspend, and
causes WinCE to REPAINT the main display on resume.
• This mode is used if display memory power is going to be turned off when the
system is suspended, and there is not enough system memory to save the im-
age.
• Any off-screen data in display memory is LOST, and since there is insuffi-
cient system memory to save display data, off-screen memory usage MUST
be disabled.
• When the system is resumed, WinCE instructs all running applications to re-
paint themselves. This is the SLOWEST of the three modes.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/05/25 X27A-E-006-01
Simple Display Driver Configuration
The following display driver configuration should work with most platforms running
Windows CE. This configuration disables the use of off-screen display memory and forces
the system to redraw the main display upon power-on.
1. This step disables the use of off-screen display memory.
Edit the file x:\wince300\platform\cepc\drivers\display\S1D13705\sources and
change the line
CDEFINES=$(CDEFINES) -DEnablePreferVmem
to
#CDEFINES=$(CDEFINES) -DEnablePreferVmem
2. This step causes the system to redraw the main display upon power-on. This step is
only required if display memory loses power when Windows CE is shut down. If dis-
play memory is kept powered up (set the S1D13705 in powersave mode), then the dis-
play data will be maintained and this step can be skipped.
Search for the file PROJECT.REG in your Windows CE directories, and inside
PROJECT.REG find the key PORepaint. Change PORepaint as follows:
“PORepaint”=dword:2
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Windows® CE 3.x Display Drivers
X27A-E-006-01 Issue Date: 01/05/25
Comments
• The display driver is CPU independent, allowing use of the driver for several Windows
CE Platform Builder supported platforms.
• If you are running 13705CFG.EXE to produce multiple MODE tables, make sure you
change the Mode Number in the WinCE tab for each mode table you generate. The
display driver supports multiple mode tables, but only if each mode table has a unique
mode number.
• At this time, the drivers have been tested on the x86 CPUs and have been built with Plat-
form Builder v3.00.
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS
TMPR3912 Microprocessor
Document Number: X27A-G-004-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the TMPR3912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 Direct Connection to the Toshiba TMPR3912 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 S1D13705 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5 Using the ITE IT8368E PC Card Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2 IT8368E Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.3 Memory Mapping and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.4 S1D13705 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2 Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.3 ITE IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 4-1: S1D13705 Configuration for Direct Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 5-1: TMPR3912 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E. . . . . 16
Table 5-2: S1D13705 Configuration Using the IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
List of Figures
Figure 4-1: S1D13705 to TMPR3912 Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 5-1: S1D13705 to TMPR3912 Connection Using an IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Processor. The
pairing of these two devices results in an embedded system offering impressive display
capability with very low power consumption.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the TMPR3912
The Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 processor supports up to two PC Card (PCMCIA) slots. It
is through this host bus interface that the S1D13705 connects to the TMPR3912 processor.
The S1D13705 can be successfully interfaced using one of two configurations:
• Direct connection to TMPR3912.
• System design using one ITE IT8368E PC Card/GPIO buffer chip.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
would be used to interface to the TMPR3912.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface modes used for the TMPR3912 are:
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
• Generic #2 (External Chip Select, shared Read/Write Enable for high byte, individual
Read/Write Enable for low byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For configuration details, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #1 Generic #2
AB[15:1] A[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1# BHE#
CS# External Decode External Decode
BCLK BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to VSS connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# RD1# connect to IO VDD
RD# RD0# RD#
WE0# WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
3.3 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13705. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing and compatibility with the TMPR3912 control signals.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles for the S1D13705, to be
driven low when the host CPU accesses the S1D13705.
• WE0# is the write enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 Direct Connection to the Toshiba TMPR3912
4.1 General Description
In this example implementation, the S1D13705 occupies the TMPR3912 PC Card slot #1.
The S1D13705 is easily interfaced to the TMPR3912 with minimal additional logic. The
address bus of the TMPR3912 PC Card interface is multiplexed and must be demultiplexed
using an advanced CMOS latch (e.g., 74AHC373). The direct connection approach makes
use of the S1D13705 in its “Generic Interface #2” configuration.
The following diagram demonstrates a typical implementation of the interface.
Figure 4-1: S1D13705 to TMPR3912 Direct Connection
Note
See Section 3.1 on page 9 and Section 3.3 on page 11 for Generic #2 pin descriptions.
WE0#
RD#
DB[7:0]
WAIT#
BCLK
S1D13705
RESET#
AB[16:13]
D[31:24]
CARD1WAIT*
A[12:0]
TMPR3912
pull-up
Oscillator
WE1#
CARD1CSL*
CARD1CSH*
Latch
ALE
System RESET
CARDIOWR*
CARDIORD*
BS#
RD/WR#
+3.3V
+3.3V
ENDIAN
DB[15:8]
D[23:16]
AB[12:0]
VDD
DCLKOUT
...or...
CS#
CLKI
See text
Clock divider
IO VDD, CORE VDD
+3.3V
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
The “Generic #2” host interface control signals of the S1D13705 are asynchronous with
respect to the S1D13705 bus clock. This gives the system designer full flexibility to choose
the appropriate source (or sources) for CLKI and BCLK. The choice of whether both clocks
should be the same, and whether to use DCLKOUT (divided) as clock source, should be
based on the desired:
• pixel and frame rates.
• power budget.
•part count.
• maximum S1D13705 clock frequencies.
The S1D13705 also has internal clock dividers providing additional flexibility.
4.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing
In this example implementation the TMPR3912 control signal CARDREG* is ignored;
therefore the S1D13705 takes up the entire PC Card slot 1.
The S1D13705 requires an addressing space of 128K bytes. The on-chip display memory
occupies the range 0 through 13FFFh. The registers occupy the range 1FFE0h through
1FFFFh. The TMPR3912 demultiplexed address lines A17 and above are ignored, thus the
S1D13705 is aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals over the 64M byte PC Card slot #1
memory space.
Note
If aliasing is undesirable, additional decoding circuitry must be added.
4.3 S1D13705 Configuration
The S1D13705 is configured at power up by latching the state of the CNF[3:0] pins. Pin
BS# also plays a role in host bus interface configuration. For details on configuration, refer
to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
The table below shows those configuration settings relevant to the direct connection
approach.
Table 4-1: S1D13705 Configuration for Direct Connection
S1D13705
Configuration
Pin
Value hard wired on this pin is used to configure:
1 (IO VDD)0 (V
SS)
BS# Generic #2 Generic #1
CNF3 Big Endian Little Endian
CNF[2:0] 111: Generic #1 or #2
= configuration for Toshiba TMPR3912 host bus interface
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5 Using the ITE IT8368E PC Card Buffer
If the system designer uses the ITE IT8368E PC Card and multiple-function I/O buffer, the
S1D13705 can be interfaced so that it “shares” a PC Card slot. The S1D13705 is mapped
to a rarely-used 16M byte portion of the PC Card slot buffered by the IT8368E, making the
S1D13705 virtually transparent to PC Card devices that use the same slot.
5.1 Hardware Description
The ITE8368E has been specially designed to support EPSON LCD controllers and
provides eleven Multi-Function IO pins (MFIO). Configuration registers may be used to
allow these MFIO pins to provide the control signals required to implement the S1D13705
CPU interface.
The TMPR3912 processor only provides addresses A[12:0], therefore devices requiring
more address space must use an external device to latch A[25:13]. The IT8368E’s MFIO
pins can be configured to provide this latched address.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
Figure 5-1: S1D13705 to TMPR3912 Connection Using an IT8368E
Note
See Section 3.1 on page 9 and Section 3.2 on page 10 for Generic #1 pin descriptions.
The “Generic #1” host interface control signals of the S1D13705 are asynchronous with
respect to the S1D13705 bus clock. This gives the system designer full flexibility to choose
the appropriate source (or sources) for CLKI and BCLK. The choice of whether both clocks
should be the same, and whether to use DCLKOUT (divided) as clock source, should be
based on pixel and frame rates, power budget, part count and maximum S1D13705
respective clock frequencies. Also, internal S1D13705 clock dividers provide additional
flexibility.
IT8368E
S1D13705
A[12:0] AB[12:0]
D[31:24] DB[7:0]
LHA[23]/MFIO[10] WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
CS#
LHA[22]/MFIO[9]
LHA[21]/MFIO[8]
LHA[20]/MFIO[7]
LHA[19]/MFIO[6]
WAIT#
CARDxWAIT*
RESET#
AB[16:13]
TMPR3912
D[23:16] DB[16:8]
DCLKOUT
ENDIAN
System RESET
LHA[16:13]/
Oscillator
...or...
pull-up
VDD
BCLK
CLKI
See text
Clock divider
BS#
IO VDD, CORE VDD
+3.3V
MFIO[3:0]
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5.2 IT8368E Configuration
The IT8368E provides eleven multi-function IO pins (MFIO). The IT8368E must have
both “Fix Attribute/IO” and “VGA” modes on. When both these modes are enabled, the
MFIO pins provide control signals needed by the S1D13705 host bus interface, and a 16M
byte portion of the system PC Card attribute and IO space is allocated to address the
S1D13705. When accessing the S1D13705 the associated card-side signals are disabled in
order to avoid any conflicts.
For mapping details, refer to section 3.3: “Memory Mapping and Aliasing.” For connection
details see Figure 5-1:
“S1D13705 to TMPR3912 Connection Using an IT8368E,” on page
15
. For further information on the IT8368E, refer to the IT8368E PC Card/GPIO Buffer
Chip Specification.
Note
When a second IT8368E is used, that circuit should not be set in VGA mode.
5.3 Memory Mapping and Aliasing
When the TMPR3912 accesses the PC Card slots without the ITE IT8368E, its system
memory is mapped as in Table 5-1:
TMPR3912 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With
and Without the IT8368E
.
Note
Bit CARD1IOEN or CARD2IOEN, depending on which card slot is used, must to be set
to 0 in the TMPR3912 Memory Configuration Register 3.
When the TMPR3912 accesses the PC Card slots buffered through the ITE IT8368E, bits
CARD1IOEN and CARD2IOEN are ignored and the attribute/IO space of the TMPR3912
is divided into Attribute, I/O and S1D13705 access. Details of the Attribute/IO address
reallocation by the IT8368E are found in Table 5-1:
TMPR3912 to PC Card Slots Address
Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
.
Table 5-1: TMPR3912 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
PC Card
Slot #
TMPR3912
Address Size Using the ITE IT8368E Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=0
Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=1
1
0800 0000h 16M byte Card 1 IO
S1D13705
(aliased 512 times
at 128K byte intervals) Card 1 IO0900 0000h 16M byte S1D13705 (aliased 128
times
at 128K byte intervals)
0A00 0000h 32M byte Card 1 Attribute
6400 0000h 64M byte Card 1 Memory S1D13705 (aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals)
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
5.4 S1D13705 Configuration
The S1D13705 is configured at power up by latching the state of the CNF[3:0] pins. Pin
BS# also plays a role in host bus interface configuration. For details on configuration, refer
to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X26A-A-001-xx.
The table below shows those configuration settings relevant to this specific interface.
2
0C00 0000h 16M byte Card 2 IO
S1D13705
(aliased 512 times
at 128K byte intervals) Card 2 IO0D00 0000h 16M byte S1D13705 (aliased 128
times
at 128K byte intervals)
0E00 0000h 32M byte Card 2 Attribute
6800 0000h 64M byte Card 2 Memory S1D13705 (aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals)
Table 5-2: S1D13705 Configuration Using the IT8368E
S1D13705
Configuration
Pin
Value hard wired on this pin is used to configure:
1 (IO VDD)0 (V
SS)
BS# Generic #2 Generic #1
CNF3 Big Endian Little Endian
CNF[2:0] 111: Generic #1 or #2
= configuration for connection using ITE IT8368E
Table 5-1: TMPR3912 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
PC Card
Slot #
TMPR3912
Address Size Using the ITE IT8368E Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=0
Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=1
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
1357CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-004-02
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Processor
7.3 ITE IT8368E
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
http://www.toshiba.com/taec/nonflash/indexproducts.html
Integrated Technology Express, Inc.
Sales & Marketing Division
2710 Walsh Avenue
Santa Clara, CA 95051, USA
Tel: (408) 980-8168
Fax: (408) 980-9232
http://www.iteusa.com
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Toshiba MIPS TMPR3912 Microprocessor
X27A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
S1D13705
Power Consumption
Document Number: X27A-G-006-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other Trademarks are the property of their respective owners
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Power Consumption
X27A-G-006-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Power Consumption S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-006-02
1 S1D13705 Power Consumption
S1D13705 power consumption is affected by many system design variables.
• Input clock frequency (CLKI): the CLKI frequency and the internal clock divide register deter-
mine the operating clock (CLK) frequency of the S1D13705. The higher CLK is, the higher the
frame fate, performance, and power consumption.
• CPU interface: the S1D13705 current consumption depends on the BUSCLK frequency, data
width, number of toggling pins, and other factors – the higher the BUSCLK, the higher the CPU
performance and power consumption.
•V
DD voltage levels (Core and IO): the voltage level of the Core and IO sections in the S1D13705
affects power consumption – the higher the voltage, the higher the consumption.
• Display mode: the resolution, panel type, and color depth affect power consumption. The higher
the resolution/color depth and number of LCD panel signals, the higher the power consumption.
Note
If the High Performance option is turned on, the power consumption increases to that of
8 bit-per-pixel mode for all color depths.
There are two power save modes in the S1D13705: Software and Hardware Power Save. The power
consumption of these modes is affected by various system design variables.
• CPU bus state during Power Save: the state of the CPU bus signals during Power Save has a
substantial effect on power consumption. An inactive bus (e.g. BUSCLK = low, Addr = low etc.)
reduces overall system power consumption.
• CLKI state during Power Save: disabling the CLKI during Power Save has substantial power
savings.
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Power Consumption
X27A-G-006-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
1.1 Conditions
Table 1-1: “S1D13705 Total Power Consumption” below gives an example of a specific
environment and its effects on power consumption.
Note
1. Conditions for Software Power Save:
• CPU interface active (signals toggling)
• CLKI active
2. Conditions for Hardware Power Save:
• CPU interface inactive (high impedance)
• CLKI active
Table 1-1: S1D13705 Total Power Consumption
Test Condition
Core VDD = 3.3V, IO VDD = 3.3V
BUSCLK = 8.33MHz
Gray Shades /
Colors
Power Consumption
Active Power Save Mode
Core IO Total Software Hardware
1Input Clock = 6MHz
LCD Panel = 320x240 4-bit Single
Monochrome
Black-and-White
4 Gray Shades
16 Gray Shades
4.29mW
4.99mW
6.13mW
0.52mW
0.76mW
0.75mW
4.81mW
5.75mW
6.88mW 1.44mW11.21mW2
2Input Clock = 6MHz
LCD Panel = 320x240 4-bit Single Color
2 Colors
4 Colors
16 Colors
256 Colors
4.64mW
5.30mW
6.58mW
8.65mW
0.73mW
1.51mW
1.57mW
1.52mW
5.37mW
6.81mW
8.15mW
10.16mW
1.44mW11.22mW2
3Input Clock = 25MHz
LCD Panel = 640x480 8-bit Single
Monochrome
Black-and-White
4 Gray Shades 13.97mW
16.75mW 1.10mW
2.08mW 15.07mW
18.83mW 2.53mW12.32mW2
4Input Clock = 25MHz
LCD Panel = 640x480 8-bit Single Color 2 Colors
4 Colors 15.53mW
18.30mW 2.64mW
7.16mW 18.17mW
25.47mW 2.53mW12.32mW2
5Input Clock = 25MHz
LCD Panel = 640x480 8-bit Dual
Monochrome
Black-and-White
4 Grey Shades 13.84mW
20.38mW 1.08mW
2.07mW 14.93mW
22.45mW 2.53mW12.32mW2
6Input Clock = 25MHz
LCD Panel = 640x480 8-bit Dual Color 2 Colors
4 Colors 15.82mW
23.31mW 2.62mW
7.01mW 18.44mW
30.32mW 2.53mW12.32mW2
7Input Clock = 25MHz
LCD Panel = 640x480 9-bit TFT 2 Colors
4 Colors 11.42mW
19.74mW 7.40mW
20.96mW 18.82mW
40.70mW 2.53mW12.32mW2
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Power Consumption S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-006-02
2 Summary
The system design variables in Section 1, “S1D13705 Power Consumption” and in Table 1-1:
“S1D13705 Total Power Consumption” show that S1D13705 power consumption depends on the
specific implementation. Active Mode power consumption depends on the desired CPU perfor-
mance and LCD frame-rate, whereas Power Save Mode consumption depends on the CPU Interface
and Input Clock state.
In a typical design environment, the S1D13705 can be configured to be an extremely power-efficient
LCD Controller with high performance and flexibility.
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Power Consumption
X27A-G-006-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’
Family of Microprocessors
Document Number: X27A-G-007-04
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the MC68328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The MC68328 System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.2 Chip-Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.3 MC68K #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.4 MC68328 To S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.4.3 MC68328 Chip Select Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3 Interfacing to the MC68EZ328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1 The MC68EZ328 System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2 Chip-Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.4 MC683EZ28 To S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.4.3 MC68EZ328 Chip Select Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4 Interfacing to the MC68VZ328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1 The MC68VZ328 System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2 Chip-Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.3 MC68K #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.4 MC68VZ328 To S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.4.3 MC68VZ328 Chip Select and Pin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
7.2 Motorola Dragonball Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
List of Tables
Table 2-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 2-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 2-3: Host Bus Interface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 3-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 3-3: Host Bus Interface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Table 4-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 4-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table 4-3: Host Bus Interface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Typical Implementation of MC68328 to S1D13705 Interface - MC68K #1 . . . . . . .12
Figure 2-2: Typical Implementation of MC68328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1 . . . . . . .13
Figure 3-1: Typical Implementation of MC68EZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1 . . . . . .18
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MC68VZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - MC68K #1 . . . . . .24
Figure 4-2: Typical Implementation of MC68VZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1 . . . . . .25
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the Motorola “Dragonball” family of micropro-
cessors. Each “Dragonball” microprocessor, the MC68328, the MC68EZ328, and the
MC68VZ328, will be described in their own sections.
By implementing an embedded display refresh buffer, the S1D13705 can reduce system
power consumption, improve image quality, and increase system performance as compared
to the Dragonball’s on-chip LCD controller.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the MC68328
2.1 The MC68328 System Bus
The MC68328 is the first generation of Motorola’s Dragonball microprocessors. The
MC68328 is an integrated controller for handheld products, based upon the MC68EC000
microprocessor core. It implements a 16-bit data bus and a 32-bit address bus. The bus
interface consists of all the standard MC68EC000 bus interface signals, plus some new
signals intended to simplify the task of interfacing to typical memory and peripheral
devices.
The MC68EC000 bus control signals are well documented in Motorola’s user manuals, and
will not be described here. A brief summary of the new signals appears below:
• Output Enable (OE) is asserted when a read cycle is in process; it is intended to connect
to the output enable control of a typical static RAM, EPROM, or Flash EPROM device.
• Upper Write Enable and Lower Write Enable (UWE / LWE) are asserted during
memory write cycles for the upper and lower bytes of the 16-bit data bus; they may be
directly connected to the write enable inputs of a typical memory device.
The S1D13705 implements the MC68EC000 bus interface using its MC68K #1 mode, so
this mode may be used to connect the MC68328 directly to the S1D13705 with no glue
logic. However, several of the MC68EC000 bus control signals are multiplexed with IO
and interrupt signals on the MC68328, and in many applications it may be desirable to
make these pins available for these alternate functions. This requirement may be accommo-
dated through the use of the Generic #1 interface mode on the S1D13705.
2.2 Chip-Select Module
The MC68328 can generate up to 16 chip select outputs, organized into four groups, “A”
through “D”.
Each chip select group has a common base address register and address mask register, to
set the base address and block size of the entire group. In addition, each chip select within
a group has its own address compare and address mask register, to activate the chip select
for a subset of the group’s address block. Finally, each chip select may be individually
programmed to control an 8 or 16-bit device, and each may be individually programmed to
generate from 0 through 6 wait states internally, or allow the memory or peripheral device
to terminate the cycle externally through use of the standard MC68000 DTACK signal.
Groups A and B can have a minimum block size of 64K bytes, so these are typically used
to control memory devices. Chip select A0 is active immediately after reset, so it is
typically used to control a boot EPROM device. Groups C and D have a minimum block
size of 4K bytes, so they are well-suited to controlling peripheral devices. Chip select D3
is associated with the MC68328 on-chip PCMCIA control logic.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
2.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
may be used to interface to the MC68328.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The two interface modes that may be used for the MC68328 are:
• Motorola MC68K #1 (using Upper Data Strobe / Lower Data Strobe).
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
2.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 2-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names MC68K #1 Generic #1
AB[15:1] A[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 LDS A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# UDS WE1#
CS# External Decode External Decode
BCLK CLK BCLK
BS# AS connect to VSS
RD/WR# R/W RD1#
RD# connect to IO VDD RD0#
WE0# connect to IO VDD WE0#
WAIT# DTACK WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
2.3.3 MC68K #1 Interface Mode
The MC68K #1 Interface Mode can be used to interface to the MC68328 microprocessor
if the previously mentioned, multiplexed, bus signals will not be used for other purposes.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB1 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• A0 and WE1# are the enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively, to be
driven low when the host CPU is reading or writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD/WR# is the read/write signal that is driven low when the CPU writes to the
S1D13705 and is driven high when the CPU is doing a read from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal indicates that the address on the address bus is valid.
• The WE0# and RD# signals is not used in the bus interface for MC68K #1 and must be
tied high (tied to IO VDD).
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2.4 MC68328 To S1D13705 Interface
2.4.1 Hardware Description
The interface between the MC68328 and the S1D13705 can be implemented using either
the MC68K #1 or Generic #1 host bus interface of the S1D13705.
Using The MC68K #1 Host Bus Interface
The MC68328 multiplexes dual functions on some of its bus control pins (specifically
UDS, LDS, and DTACK). In implementations where all of these pins are available for use
as bus control pins, then the S1D13705 interface is a straightforward implementation of the
“MC68K #1” host bus interface.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MC68328 to S1D13705
using the MC68K #1 host bus interface. For further information on the MC68K #1 host bus
interface and AC Timing, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Figure 2-1: Typical Implementation of MC68328 to S1D13705 Interface - MC68K #1
MC68328 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[15:0]
DTACK
UDS
LDS
R/W
CLK0
AB[16:1]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
AB0
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
1K
CSB3
AS BS#
Vcc
System RESET
WE0##
Vcc
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
Using The Generic #1 Host Bus Interface
If UDS and/or LDS are required for their alternate IO functions, then the MC68328 to
S1D13705 interface may be implemented using the S1D13705 Generic #1 host bus
interface. Note that in either case, the DTACK signal must be made available for the
S1D13705, since it inserts a variable number of wait states depending upon CPU/LCD
synchronization and the LCD panel display mode. WAIT# must be inverted (using an
inverter enabled by CS#) to make it an active high signal and thus compatible with the
MC68328 architecture. A single resistor is used to pull up the WAIT# (DTACK) signal
when terminating the bus cycle.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MC68328 to S1D13705
using the Generic #1 host bus interface. For further information on the Generic #1 host bus
interface and AC Timing, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Figure 2-2: Typical Implementation of MC68328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1
MC68328 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[15:0]
DTACK
UWE
LWE
OE
CLK0
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
1K
CSB3
BS#
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
System RESET
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show those configuration settings important to the MC68K #1 and
Generic #1 host bus interfaces.
2.4.3 MC68328 Chip Select Configuration
The S1D13705 requires a 128K byte address space for the display buffer and its internal
registers. To accommodate this block size, it is preferable (but not required) to use one of
the chip selects from groups A or B. Virtually any chip select other than CSA0 or CSD3
would be suitable for the S1D13705 interface.
In the example interface, chip select CSB3 is used to control the S1D13705. A 128K byte
address space is used with the S1D13705 control registers mapped into the top 32 bytes of
the 128K byte block and the 80K bytes of display buffer mapped to the starting address of
the block. The chip select should have its RO (Read Only) bit set to 0, its BSW (Bus Data
Table 2-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
S1D1370
5
Pin Name
value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (1/0)
01
CNF0
See Table 2-3: “Host Bus Interface Selection” CNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for MC68328 support
Table 2-3: Host Bus Interface Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
0 0 0 X SH-4 interface
0 0 1 X SH-3 interface
010Xreserved
0 1 1 X MC68K #1, 16-bit
100Xreserved
1 0 1 X MC68K #2, 16-bit
1100reserved
1101reserved
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for MC68328 using Generic #1 host bus interface
= configuration for MC68328 using MC68K #1 host bus interface
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
Width) set to 1 for a 16-bit bus, and the WS (Wait states) bit should be set to 111b to allow
the S1D13705 to terminate bus cycles externally. Enable DTACK pin function with
Register FFFFF433, Port G Select Register, bit 0.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3 Interfacing to the MC68EZ328
3.1 The MC68EZ328 System Bus
The MC68EZ328 is Motorola’s second generation Dragonball microprocessor. The
DragonballEZ is an integrated controller for handheld products, based upon the
MC68EC000 microprocessor core. The DragonballEZ differs from its predecessor mainly
in that it has increased speed, a DRAM controller, infrared communication, and an in-
circuit emulator. The bus interface has also been simplified; it implements a 16-bit data bus
and a 24-bit address bus. The bus interface is based on the standard MC68EC000 bus
interface signals although the data bus byte lane control signals of the MC68EC000 bus
interface (UDS and LDS - upper and lower data strobes) have been replaced by some new
signals intended to simplify the task of interfacing to typical memory and peripheral
devices.
The MC68EC000 bus control signals are well documented in Motorola’s user manuals, and
will not be described here. A brief summary of the new signals appears below:
• Output Enable (OE) is asserted when a read cycle is in process; it is intended to connect
to the output enable control of a typical static RAM, EPROM, or Flash EPROM device.
• Upper Write Enable and Lower Write Enable (UWE / LWE) are asserted during
memory write cycles for the upper and lower bytes of the 16-bit data bus; they may be
directly connected to the write enable inputs of a typical memory device.
The S1D13705 implements the MC68000 bus interface using its MC68K #1 mode but this
mode requires the MC68EC000 control signals UDS and LDS so this mode cannot be used
to connect the MC68EZ328 directly to the S1D13705. However, the Generic #1 interface
mode on the S1D13705 is well suited to interface to the MC68EZ328.
3.2 Chip-Select Module
The MC68EZ328 can generate up to 8 chip select outputs, organized into four groups “A”
through “D”.
Each chip select group has a common base address register and address mask register, to
set the base address and block size of the entire group. In addition, each chip select within
a group has its own address compare and address mask register, to activate the chip select
for a subset of the group’s address block. Finally, each chip select may be individually
programmed to control an 8 or 16-bit device, and each may be individually programmed to
generate from 0 through 6 wait states internally, or allow the memory or allow the memory
or peripheral device to terminate the cycle externally through use of the standard MC68000
DTACK signal.
Groups A and B are used to control ROM, SRAM, and Flash memory devices and have a
block size of 128K bytes to 16M bytes. Chip select A0 is active immediately after reset and
is a global chip-select so it is typically used to control a boot EPROM device. This chip
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
select ceases to decode globally once this chip-select’s registers are programmed. Groups
C and D are special in that they can also control DRAM interfaces. These last two groups
have block size of 32K bytes to 4M bytes.
3.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
may be used to interface to the MC68EZ328.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode that may be used for the MC68EZ328 is:
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
3.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #1
AB[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to VSS
RD/WR# RD1#
RD# RD0#
WE0# WE0#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
3.4 MC683EZ28 To S1D13705 Interface
3.4.1 Hardware Description
The interface between the MC68328 and the S1D13705 can be implemented using the
Generic #1 host bus interface of the S1D13705.
The DTACK signal must be made available for the S1D13705, since it inserts a variable
number of wait states depending upon CPU/LCD synchronization and the LCD panel
display mode. WAIT# must be inverted (using an inverter enabled by CS#) to make it an
active high signal and thus compatible with the MC68EZ328 architecture. A single resistor
is used to pull up WAIT# (DTACK) signal when terminating the bus cycle.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MC68EZ328 to S1D13705
using the Generic #1 host bus interface. For further information on the Generic #1 host bus
interface and AC Timing, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Figure 3-1: Typical Implementation of MC68EZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1
MC68EZ328 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[15:0]
DTACK
UWE
LWE
OE
CLK0
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
1K
CSB0
BS#
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
System RESET
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show those configuration settings important to the Generic #1 host bus
interface.
3.4.3 MC68EZ328 Chip Select Configuration
The S1D13705 requires a 128K byte address space for the display buffer and its internal
registers. To accommodate this block size, it is preferable (but not required) to use one of
the chip selects from groups A or B. Groups A and B can have a size range of 128K bytes
to 16M bytes and groups C and D have a size range of 32K bytes to 16M bytes. Therefore,
any chip select other than CSA0 would be suitable for the S1D13705 interface.
In the example interface, chip select CSB0 is used to control the S1D13705. A 128K byte
address space is used with the S1D13705 control registers mapped into the top 32 bytes of
the 128K byte block and the 80K bytes of display buffer mapped to the starting address of
the block. The chip select should have its RO (Read Only) bit set to 0, its BSW (Bus Data
Table 3-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
S1D1370
5
Pin Name
value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (1/0)
01
CNF0
See Table 2-3: “Host Bus Interface Selection” CNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for MC68EZ328 support
Table 3-3: Host Bus Interface Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
0 0 0 X SH-4 interface
0 0 1 X SH-3 interface
010Xreserved
0 1 1 X MC68K #1, 16-bit
100Xreserved
1 0 1 X MC68K #2, 16-bit
1100reserved
1101reserved
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for MC68EZ328 using Generic #1 host bus interface
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
Width) set to 1 for a 16-bit bus, and the WS (Wait states) bit should be set to 111b to allow
the S1D13705 to terminate bus cycles externally with DTACK. Enable DTACK pin
function with Register FFFFF433, Port G Select Register, bit 0.
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 Interfacing to the MC68VZ328
4.1 The MC68VZ328 System Bus
The MC68VZ328 is Motorola’s third generation Dragonball microprocessor. The Dragon-
ballVZ is an integrated controller for handheld products, based upon the FLX68000 micro-
processor core with an external 24-bit address bus and 16-bit data bus. The DragonballVZ
differs from its predecessor mainly in that it has increased speed, and support for SDRAM
has been added to the DRAM controller. The bus interface consists of all the standard
MC68000 bus interface signals except AS, plus some new signals intended to simplify the
task of interfacing to typical memory and peripheral devices. The 68000 signals are multi-
plexed with IrDA, SPI and LCD controller signals.
The MC68000 bus control signals are well documented in Motorola’s user manuals, and
will not be described here. A brief summary of the new signals appears below:
• Output Enable (OE) is asserted when a read cycle is in process; it is intended to connect
to the output enable control of a typical static RAM, EPROM, or Flash EPROM device.
• Upper Write Enable and Lower Write Enable (UWE / LWE) are asserted during
memory write cycles for the upper and lower bytes of the 16-bit data bus; they may be
directly connected to the write enable inputs of a typical memory device.
The S1D13705 implements the MC68000 bus interface using its MC68K #1 mode. This
mode may be used to interface the S1D13705 to the DragonballVZ if external logic is used
to generate AS. The Generic #1 interface mode on the S1D13705 is also well suited to
interface to the MC68VZ328.
4.2 Chip-Select Module
The MC68VZ328 can generate up to 8 chip select outputs, organized into four groups, “A”
through “D”.
Each chip select group has a common base address register and address mask register, to
set the base address and block size of the entire group. In addition, each chip select within
a group has its own address compare and address mask register, to activate the chip select
for a subset of the group’s address block. Finally, each chip select may be individually
programmed to control an 8 or 16-bit device, and each may be individually programmed to
generate from 0 through 6 wait states internally, or allow the memory or peripheral device
to terminate the cycle externally through use of the standard MC68000 DTACK signal.
Groups A and B are used to control ROM, SRAM, and Flash memory devices and have a
block size of 128K bytes to 16M bytes. Chip select A0 is active immediately after reset and
is a global chip-select so it is typically used to control a boot EPROM device. This chip
select ceases to decode globally once this chip-select’s registers are programmed. Groups
C and D are special in that they can also control DRAM interfaces. These last two groups
have block size of 32K bytes to 4M bytes.
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
4.3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
may be used to interface to the MC68VZ328.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The two interface modes that may be used for the MC68VZ328 are:
• Motorola MC68K #1 (using Upper Data Strobe / Lower Data Strobe).
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
4.3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 4-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names MC68K #1 Generic #1
AB[15:1] A[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 LDS A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# UDS WE1#
CS# External Decode External Decode
BCLK CLK BCLK
BS# AS connect to VSS
RD/WR# R/W RD1#
RD# connect to IO VDD RD0#
WE0# connect to IO VDD WE0#
WAIT# DTACK WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 25
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
4.3.3 MC68K #1 Interface Mode
The MC68K #1 Interface Mode can be used to interface to the MC68VZ328 micropro-
cessor if the previously mentioned, multiplexed, bus signals will not be used for other
purposes.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB1 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• A0 and WE1# are the enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively, to be
driven low when the host CPU is reading or writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD/WR# is the read/write signal that is driven low when the CPU writes to the
S1D13705 and is driven high when the CPU is doing a read from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal indicates that the address on the address bus is valid.
• The WE0# and RD# signals is not used in the bus interface for MC68K #1 and must be
tied high (tied to IO VDD).
Page 26 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.4 MC68VZ328 To S1D13705 Interface
4.4.1 Hardware Description
The interface between the MC68VZ328 and the S1D13705 can be implemented using
either the MC68K #1 or Generic #1 host bus interface of the S1D13705.
Using The MC68K #1 Host Bus Interface
The MC68VZ328 multiplexes dual functions on some of its bus control pins (specifically
UDS, LDS, and DTACK). In implementations where all of these pins are available for use
as bus control pins, then the S1D13705 interface is a straightforward implementation of the
“MC68K #1” host bus interface. Since AS is not provided by the DragonballVZ, CSB1 is
connected to BS# and indicates that a valid address is on the bus.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MC68VZ328 to S1D13705
using the MC68K #1 host bus interface. For further information on the MC68K #1 host bus
interface and AC Timing, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MC68VZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - MC68K #1
MC68VZ328 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[15:0]
DTACK
UDS
LDS
R/W
CLK0
AB[16:1]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
AB0
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
1K
CSB1
BS#
Vcc
System RESET
WE0##
Vcc
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 27
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
Using The Generic #1 Host Bus Interface
The DTACK signal must be made available for the S1D13705, since it inserts a variable
number of wait states depending upon CPU/LCD synchronization and the LCD panel
display mode. WAIT# must be inverted (using an inverter enabled by CS#) to make it an
active high signal and thus compatible with the MC68VZ328 architecture. A single resistor
is used to pull up the WAIT# (DTACK) signal when terminating the bus cycle.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MC68VZ328 to S1D13705
using the Generic #1 host bus interface. For further information on the Generic #1 host bus
interface and AC Timing, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Figure 4-2: Typical Implementation of MC68VZ328 to S1D13705 Interface - Generic #1
MC68VZ328 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[15:0]
DTACK
UWE
LWE
OE
CLK0
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
1K
CSB1
BS#
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
System RESET
Page 28 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show those configuration settings important to the MC68K #1 and
Generic #1 host bus interfaces.
Table 4-2: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
S1D1370
5
Pin Name
value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (1/0)
01
CNF0
See Table 2-3: “Host Bus Interface Selection” CNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for MC68VZ328 support
Table 4-3: Host Bus Interface Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
0 0 0 X SH-4 interface
0 0 1 X SH-3 interface
010Xreserved
0 1 1 X MC68K #1, 16-bit
100Xreserved
1 0 1 X MC68K #2, 16-bit
1100reserved
1101reserved
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for MC68VZ328 using Generic #1 host bus interface
= configuration for MC68VZ328 using MC68K #1 host bus interface
Epson Research and Development Page 29
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
4.4.3 MC68VZ328 Chip Select and Pin Configuration
The S1D13705 requires a 128K byte address space for the display buffer and its internal
registers. To accommodate this block size, it is preferable (but not required) to use one of
the chip selects from groups A or B. Groups A and B can have a size range of 128K bytes
to 16M bytes and groups C and D have a size range of 32K bytes to 16M bytes. Therefore,
any chip select other than CSA0 would be suitable for the S1D13705 interface.
In the example interface, chip select CSB1 is used to control the S1D13705. A 128K byte
address space is used with the S1D13705 control registers mapped into the top 32 bytes of
the 128K byte block and the 80K bytes of display buffer mapped to the starting address of
the block. The chip select should have its RO (Read Only) bit set to 0, its BSW (Bus Data
Width) set to 1 for a 16-bit bus, and the WS (Wait states) bit should be set to 111b to allow
the S1D13705 to terminate bus cycles externally with DTACK. Enable DTACK pin
function with Register FFFFF433, Port G Select Register, bit 0.
Additional registers must be configured if the M68K #1 host bus interface is used. LDS,
UDS and R/W must be enabled by setting register FFFFFF443h bits 1, 2, and 3 to zero to
enable the internal 68000 pin functions.
Page 30 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE display drivers can be
customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE display drivers are available from your sales
support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 31
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-007-04
6 References
6.1 Documents
• Motorola Inc., MC68328 DragonBall® Integrated Microprocessor User’s Manual,
Motorola Publication no. MC68328UM; available on the Internet at
http://www.mot.com/SPS/WIRELESS/products/MC68328.html.
• Motorola Inc., MC68EZ328 DragonBall-EZ® Integrated Processor User’s Manual,
Motorola Publication no. MC68EZ328UM1; available on the Internet at
http://www.mot.com/SPS/WIRELESS/products/MC68EZ328.html.
• Motorola Inc., MC68VZ328 DragonBall-VZ® Integrated Processor User’s Manual,
Motorola Publication no. MC683VZ28UM; available on the Internet at
http://www.mot.com/SPS/WIRELESS/products/MC68VZ328.html.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification;
Document Number X27A-A-001-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• Motorola Inc.: Motorola Literature Distribution Center, (800) 441-2447.
• Motorola Website: http://www.mot.com.
• Epson Electronics America website: http://www.eea.epson.com.
Page 32 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola ‘Dragonball’ Family of Microprocessors
X27A-G-007-04 Issue Date: 01/02/13
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 Motorola Dragonball Processors
• Motorola Design Line, (800) 521-6274.
• Local Motorola sales office or authorized distributor.
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the NEC
VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
Document Number: X27A-G-008-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1 The NEC VR4102/VR4111 System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1.2 LCD Memory Access Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4 VR4102/VR4111 to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3 NEC VR4102/VR4111 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1 Epson LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.2 NEC Electronics Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: NEC VR4102/VR4111 Read/Write Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of VR4102/VR4111 to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . .14
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
(uPD30102). The NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor is specifically designed to
support an external LCD controller and the pairing of these two devices results in an
embedded system offering impressive display capability with very low power
consumption.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111
2.1 The NEC VR4102/VR4111 System Bus
The VR-Series family of microprocessors features a high-speed synchronous system bus
typical of modern microprocessors. Designed with external LCD controller support and
Windows CE-based embedded consumer applications in mind, the VR4102/VR4111 offers
a highly integrated solution for portable systems. This section is an overview of the
operation of the CPU bus to establish interface requirements.
2.1.1 Overview
The NEC VR4102/VR4111 is designed around the RISC architecture developed by MIPS.
This microprocessor is designed around the 66MHz VR4100 CPU core which supports 64-
bit processing. The CPU communicates with the Bus Control Unit (BCU) with its internal
SysAD bus. The BCU in turn communicates with external devices with its ADD and DAT
buses that can be dynamically sized to 16 or 32-bit operation.
The NEC VR4102/VR4111 has direct support for an external LCD controller. Specific
control signals are assigned for an external LCD controller that provide an easy interface to
the CPU. A 16M byte block of memory is assigned for the LCD controller with its own chip
select and ready signals available. Word or byte accesses are controlled by the system high
byte signal, SHB#.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
2.1.2 LCD Memory Access Cycles
Once an address in the LCD block of memory is placed on the external address bus,
ADD[25:0], the LCD chip select, LCDCS#, is driven low. The read or write enable signals,
RD# and WR#, are driven low for the appropriate cycle. LCDRDY is driven low by the
S1D13705 to insert wait states into the cycle. The high byte enable is driven low for 16-bit
transfers and high for 8-bit transfers.
Figure 2-1: “NEC VR4102/VR4111 Read/Write Cycles,” on page 9 shows the read and
write cycles to the LCD Controller Interface.
Figure 2-1: NEC VR4102/VR4111 Read/Write Cycles
TCLK
ADD[25:0]
LCDCS#
WR#,RD#
LCDRDY
VALID
VALID
VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
(write)
(read)
SHB#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
would be used to interface to the VR4102/VR4111.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode used for the VR4102/VR4111 is:
• Generic #2 (External Chip Select, shared Read/Write Enable for high byte, individual
Read/Write Enable for low byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #2
AB[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# BHE#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# connect to IO VDD
RD# RD#
WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13705. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing and compatibility with the VR4102/VR4111 control signals.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles.
• WE0# is the write enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 VR4102/VR4111 to S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Description
The NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor is specifically designed to support an external
LCD controller by providing the internal address decoding and control signals necessary.
By using the Generic # 2 interface, no glue logic is required to interface the S1D13705 and
the NEC VR4102/VR4111. A pull-up resistor is attached to WAIT# to speed up its rise time
when terminating a cycle.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the VR4102/VR4111 to
S1D13705 interface.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of VR4102/VR4111 to S1D13705 Interface
WE1#
WE0#
DB[15:0]
WAIT#
RD#
BUSCLK
S1D13705
CS#
RESET#
AB[16:0]
SHB#
WR#
DATA[15:0]
LCDCS#
RD#
BUSCLK
LCDRDY
ADD[16:0]
NEC VR4102/VR4111
Pull-up
BS#
RD/WR#
Vcc
Vcc
System RESET
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show those configuration settings important to the Generic #2 host bus
interface.
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
Signal value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (0/1)
01
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for NEC VR4102/VR4111 support
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for NEC VR4102/VR4111 support
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.3 NEC VR4102/VR4111 Configuration
The NEC VR4102/VR4111 provides the internal address decoding necessary to map to an
external LCD controller. Physical address 0A000000h to 0AFFFFFFh (16M bytes) is
reserved for an external LCD controller.
The S1D13705 supports up to 80K bytes of display buffer memory and 32 bytes for internal
registers. Therefore, the S1D13705 will be shadowed over the entire 16M byte memory
range at 128K byte segments. The starting address of the display buffer is 0A000000h and
register 0 of the S1D13705 (REG[00h]) resides at 0A01FFE0h.
The NEC VR4102/VR4111 has a 16-bit internal register named BCUCNTREG2 located at
address 0B000002h. It must be set to the value of 0001h to indicate that LCD controller
accesses use a non-inverting data bus.
The 16-bit internal register named BCUCNTREG1, located at address 0B000000h, must
have bit D[13] (ISA/LCD bit) set to 0 to reserve the 16M bytes space, 0A000000h to
0AFFFFFFh, for LCD use and not as ISA bus memory space.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6 References
6.1 Documents
• NEC VR4102/VR4111 64/32-bit Microprocessor Preliminary User’s Manual.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Embedded Memory Color LCD
Controller Hardware Functional Specification; Document Number X27A-A-001-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• NEC website: http://www.nec.com.
• Epson Electronics America website: http://www.eea.epson.com
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-008-02
7 Technical Support
7.1 Epson LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 NEC Electronics Inc.
NEC Electronics Inc. (U.S.A.)
Santa Clara
California
Tel: (800) 366-9782
Fax: (800) 729-9288
http://www.nec.com
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4102/VR4111 Microprocessor
X27A-G-008-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
Document Number: X27A-G-009-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The PC Card System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.1.1 PC Card Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2 Memory Access Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 PC Card to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 Register/Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7.2 PC Card Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 4-2: Host Bus Interface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: PC Card Read Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 2-2: PC Card Write Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of PC Card to S1D13705 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware and software environment required to
interface the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the PC Card (PCMCIA)
bus.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
2.1 The PC Card System Bus
PC Card technology has gained wide acceptance in the mobile computing field as well as
in other markets due to its portability and ruggedness. This section is an overview of the
operation of the 16-bit PC Card interface conforming to the PCMCIA 2.0/JEIDA 4.1
Standard (or later).
2.1.1 PC Card Overview
The 16-bit PC Card provides a 26-bit address bus and additional control lines which allow
access to three 64M byte address ranges. These ranges are used for common memory space,
IO space, and attribute memory space. Common memory may be accessed by a host system
for memory read and write operations. Attribute memory is used for defining card specific
information such as configuration registers, card capabilities, and card use. IO space
maintains software and hardware compatibility with hosts such as the Intel x86
architecture, which address peripherals independently from memory space.
Bit notation follows the convention used by most microprocessors, the high bit is the most
significant. Therefore, signals A25 and D15 are the most significant bits for the address and
data bus respectively.
Support is provided for on-chip DMA controllers. To find further information on these
topics, refer to Section 6, “References” on page 15.
PC Card bus signals are asynchronous to the host CPU bus signals. Bus cycles are started
with the assertion of either the CE1# and/or the CE2# card enable signals. The cycle ends
once these signals are de-asserted. Bus cycles can be lengthened using the WAIT# signal.
Note
The PCMCIA 2.0/JEIDA 4.1 (and later) PC Card Standard support the two signals
WAIT# and RESET which are not supported in earlier versions of the standard. The
WAIT# signal allows for asynchronous data transfers for memory, attribute, and IO ac-
cess cycles. The RESET signal allows resetting of the card configuration by the reset
line of the host CPU.
2.1.2 Memory Access Cycles
A data transfer is initiated when the memory address is placed on the PC Card bus and one,
or both, of the card enable signals (CE1# and CE2#) are driven low. REG# must be kept
inactive. If only CE1# is driven low, 8-bit data transfers are enabled and A0 specifies
whether the even or odd data byte appears on data bus lines D[7:0]. If both CE1# and CE2#
are driven low, a 16-bit word transfer takes place. If only CE2# is driven low, an odd byte
transfer occurs on data lines D[15:8].
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
During a read cycle, OE# (output enable) is driven low. A write cycle is specified by
driving OE# high and driving the write enable signal (WE#) low. The cycle can be
lengthened by driving WAIT# low for the time needed to complete the cycle.
Figure 2-1: and Figure 2-2: illustrate typical memory access cycles on the PC Card bus.
Figure 2-1: PC Card Read Cycle
Figure 2-2: PC Card Write Cycle
A[25:0]
CE1#
OE#
WAIT#
ADDRESS VALID
DATA VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[15:0]
REG#
CE2#
Transfer Start Transfer Complete
A[25:0]
CE1#
OE#
WAIT#
ADDRESS VALID
DATA VALID
Hi-Z Hi-Z
D[15:0]
REG#
CE2#
Transfer Start Transfer Complete
WE#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
would be used to interface to the PC Card bus.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode used for the PC Card bus is:
• Generic #2 (External Chip Select, shared Read/Write Enable for high byte, individual
Read/Write Enable for low byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of the host bus interface signals.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #2
AB[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# BHE#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# connect to IO VDD
RD# RD#
WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13705. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing and compatibility with the PC Card bus control signals.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles.
• WE0# is the write enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 PC Card to S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Connections
The S1D13705 is interfaced to the PC Card bus with a minimal amount of glue logic. In
this implementation, the address inputs (AB[16:0]) and data bus (DB[15:0] connect directly
to the CPU address (A[16:0]) and data bus (D[15:0]).
The PC Card interface does not provide a bus clock, so one must be supplied for the
S1D13705. Since the bus clock frequency is not critical, nor does it have to be synchronous
to the bus signals, it may be the same as CLKI.
BS# (bus start) is not used by Generic #2 mode but is used to configure the S1D13705 for
either Generic #1 or Generic #2 bus and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD).
RD/WR# is also not used by Generic #2 bus and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD).
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the PC Card to S1D13705
interface.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of PC Card to S1D13705 Interface
RD/WR#
RD#
DB[15:0]
WAIT#
BUSCLK
S1D13705
RESET#
AB[16:0]
OE#
D[15:0]
WAIT#
A[16:0]
PC Card socket
15K pull-up
CLKI
Oscillator
WE1#
WE0#
CS#
WE#
CE1#
CE2#
RESET
IO VDD
BS#
IO VDD
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show only those configuration settings important to the PC Card host bus
interface.
4.3 Register/Memory Mapping
The S1D13705 is a memory mapped device. The S1D13705 memory may be addressed
starting at 0000h, or on consecutive 128K byte blocks, and its internal registers are located
in the upper 32 bytes of the 128K byte block (i.e. REG[0] = 1FFE0h).
While the PC Card socket provides 64M bytes of memory address space, the S1D13705
only needs a 128K byte block of memory to accommodate its 80K byte display buffer and
its 32 byte register set. For this reason only address bits A[16:0] are used while A[25:17]
are ignored. Because the entire 64M bytes of memory is available, the S1D13705’s memory
and registers will be aliased every 128K bytes for a total of 512 times.
Note
If aliasing is not desirable, the upper addresses must be fully decoded.
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
Signal Low High
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for PC Card host bus interface
Table 4-2: Host Bus Interface Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for PC Card host bus interface
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the PC Card Bus S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-009-02
6 References
6.1 Documents
• PC Card (PCMCIA) Standard March 1997
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Embedded Memory Color LCD
Controller Hardware Functional Specification; Document Number X27A-A-001-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• PC Card website: http://www.pc-card.com.
• Epson Electronics America website: http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the PC Card Bus
X27A-G-009-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 PC Card Standard
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
PCMCIA
(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association)
2635 North First Street, Suite 209
San Jose, CA 95134
Tel: (408) 433-2273
Fax: (408) 433-9558
http://www.pc-card.com
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821
Microprocessor
Document Number: X27A-G-010-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the MPC821 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The MPC8xx System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2 MPC821 Bus Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.1 Normal (Non-Burst) Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.2 Burst Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3 Memory Controller Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.1 General-Purpose Chip Select Module (GPCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.2 User-Programmable Machine (UPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1 Host Bus Interface Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Generic #1 Host Bus Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 MPC821 to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 MPC821ADS Evaluation Board Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.3 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.4 MPC821 Chip Select Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.5 Test Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.1 EPSON LCD/CRT Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2 Motorola MPC821 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 4-1: List of Connections from MPC821ADS to S1D13705 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Table 4-2: Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Table 4-3: Host Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: Power PC Memory Read Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 2-2: Power PC Memory Write Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MPC821 to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware and software environment required to
interface the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the Motorola MPC821
Processor.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the MPC821
2.1 The MPC8xx System Bus
The MPC8xx family of processors feature a high-speed synchronous system bus typical of
modern RISC microprocessors. This section provides an overview of the operation of the
CPU bus in order to establish interface requirements.
2.2 MPC821 Bus Overview
The MPC8xx microprocessor family uses a synchronous address and data bus. All IO is
synchronous to a square-wave reference clock called MCLK (Master Clock). This clock
runs at the machine cycle speed of the CPU core (typically 25 to 50 MHz). Most outputs
from the processor change state on the rising edge of this clock. Similarly, most inputs to
the processor are sampled on the rising edge.
Note
The external bus can run at one-half the CPU core speed using the clock control register.
This is typically used when the CPU core is operated above 50 MHz.
The MPC821 can generate up to eight independent chip select outputs, each of which may
be controlled by one of two types of timing generators: the General Purpose Chip Select
Module (GPCM) or the User-Programmable Machine (UPM). Examples are given using
the GPCM.
It should be noted that all Power PC microprocessors, including the MPC8xx family, use
bit notation opposite from the convention used by most other microprocessor systems. Bit
numbering for the MPC8xx always starts with zero as the most significant bit, and incre-
ments in value to the least-significant bit. For example, the most significant bits of the
address bus and data bus are A0 and D0, while the least significant bits are A31 and D31.
The MPC8xx uses both a 32-bit address and data bus. A parity bit is supported for each of
the four byte lanes on the data bus. Parity checking is done when data is read from external
memory or peripherals, and generated by the MPC8xx bus controller on write cycles. All
IO accesses are memory-mapped meaning there is no separate IO space in the Power PC
architecture.
Support is provided for both on-chip (DMA controllers) and off-chip (other processors and
peripheral controllers) bus masters. For further information on this topic, refer to Section
6, “References” on page 23.
The bus can support both normal and burst cycles. Burst memory cycles are used to fill
on-chip cache memory, and for certain on-chip DMA operations. Normal cycles are used
for all other data transfers.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
2.2.1 Normal (Non-Burst) Bus Transactions
A data transfer is initiated by the bus master by placing the memory address on address
lines A0 through A31 and driving TS (Transfer Start) low for one clock cycle. Several
control signals are also provided with the memory address:
• TSIZ[0:1] (Transfer Size) -- indicates whether the bus cycle is 8, 16, or 32-bit.
• RD/WR -- set high for read cycles and low for write cycles.
• AT[0:3] (Address Type Signals) -- provides more detail on the type of transfer being
attempted.
When the peripheral device being accessed has completed the bus transfer, it asserts TA
(Transfer Acknowledge) for one clock cycle to complete the bus transaction. Once TA has
been asserted, the MPC821 will not start another bus cycle until TA has been de-asserted.
The minimum length of a bus transaction is two bus clocks.
Figure 2-1: “Power PC Memory Read Cycle” illustrates a typical memory read cycle on
the Power PC system bus.
Figure 2-1: Power PC Memory Read Cycle
A[0:31]
D[0:31]
TSIZ[0:1], AT[0:3]
TS
TA
SYSCLK
Wait StatesTransfer Start Transfer Next Transfer
Sampled when TA low
RD/WR
Complete Starts
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
Figure 2-2: “Power PC Memory Write Cycle” illustrates a typical memory write cycle on
the Power PC system bus.
Figure 2-2: Power PC Memory Write Cycle
If an error occurs, TEA (Transfer Error Acknowledge) is asserted and the bus cycle is
aborted. For example, a peripheral device may assert TEA if a parity error is detected, or
the MPC821 bus controller may assert TEA if no peripheral device responds at the
addressed memory location within a bus time-out period.
For 32-bit transfers, all data lines (D[0:31]) are used and the two low-order address lines
A30 and A31 are ignored. For 16-bit transfers, data lines D0 through D15 are used and
address line A30 is ignored. For 8-bit transfers, data lines D0 through D7 are used and all
address lines (A[0:31]) are used.
Note
This assumes that the Power PC core is operating in big endian mode (typically the case
for embedded systems).
2.2.2 Burst Cycles
Burst memory cycles are used to fill on-chip cache memory and to carry out certain on-chip
DMA operations. They are very similar to normal bus cycles with the following exceptions:
• Always 32-bit.
• Always attempt to transfer four 32-bit words sequentially.
• Always address longword-aligned memory (i.e. A30 and A31 are always 0:0).
• Do not increment address bits A28 and A29 between successive transfers; the addressed
device must increment these address bits internally.
A[0:31]
D[0:31]
TSIZ[0:1], AT[0:3]
TS
TA
SYSCLK
Wait StatesTransfer Start
RD/WR
Valid
Transfer Next Transfer
Complete Starts
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
If a peripheral is not capable of supporting burst cycles, it can assert Burst Inhibit (BI)
simultaneously with TA, and the processor will revert to normal bus cycles for the
remaining data transfers.
Burst cycles are mainly intended to facilitate cache line fills from program or data memory.
They are normally not used for transfers to/from IO peripheral devices such as the
S1D13705, therefore the interfaces described in this document do not attempt to support
burst cycles. However, the example interfaces include circuitry to detect the assertion of
BDIP and respond with BI if caching is accidently enabled for the S1D13705 address space.
2.3 Memory Controller Module
2.3.1 General-Purpose Chip Select Module (GPCM)
The General-Purpose Chip Select Module (GPCM) is used to control memory and
peripheral devices which do not require special timing or address multiplexing. In addition
to the chip select output, it can generate active-low Output Enable (OE) and Write Enable
(WE) signals compatible with most memory and x86-style peripherals. The MPC821 bus
controller also provides a Read/Write (RD/WR) signal which is compatible with most 68K
peripherals.
The GPCM is controlled by the values programmed into the Base Register (BR) and Option
Register (OR) of the respective chip select. The Option Register sets the base address, the
block size of the chip select, and controls the following timing parameters:
• The ACS bit field allows the chip select assertion to be delayed with respect to the
address bus valid, by 0, ¼, or ½ clock cycle.
• The CSNT bit causes chip select and WE to be negated ½ clock cycle earlier than
normal.
• The TRLX (relaxed timing) bit will insert an additional one clock delay between asser-
tion of the address bus and chip select. This accommodates memory and peripherals
with long setup times.
• The EHTR (Extended hold time) bit will insert an additional 1-clock delay on the first
access to a chip select.
• Up to 15 wait states may be inserted, or the peripheral can terminate the bus cycle itself
by asserting TA (Transfer Acknowledge).
• Any chip select may be programmed to assert BI (Burst Inhibit) automatically when its
memory space is addressed by the processor core.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2.3.2 User-Programmable Machine (UPM)
The UPM is typically used to control memory types, such as Dynamic RAMs, which have
complex control or address multiplexing requirements. The UPM is a general purpose
RAM-based pattern generator which can control address multiplexing, wait state gener-
ation, and five general-purpose output lines on the MPC821. Up to 64 pattern locations are
available, each 32 bits wide. Separate patterns may be programmed for normal accesses,
burst accesses, refresh (timer) events, and exception conditions. This flexibility allows
almost any type of memory or peripheral device to be accommodated by the MPC821.
In this application note, the GPCM is used instead of the UPM, since the GPCM has enough
flexibility to accommodate the S1D13705 and it is desirable to leave the UPM free to
handle other interfacing duties, such as EDO DRAM.
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface mode used on the S1D13705 to interface
to the MPC821.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode used for the MPC821 is:
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
3.1 Host Bus Interface Modes
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #1
AB[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to VSS
RD/WR# RD1#
RD# RD0#
WE0# WE0#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.2 Generic #1 Host Bus Interface Mode
Generic #1 host bus interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific host bus
interface mode on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 host bus interface mode was chosen for
this interface due to the simplicity of its timing.
The host bus interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
IO or memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
4 MPC821 to S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Description
The interface between the S1D13705 and the MPC821 requires minimal glue logic. One
inverter is required to change the polarity of the WAIT# signal (an active low signal) to
insert wait states in the bus cycle. The MPC821 Transfer Acknowledge signal (TA) is an
active low signal which ends the current bus cycle. The inverter is enabled using CS# so
that TA is not driven by the S1D13705 during non-S1D13705 bus cycles. A single resistor
is used to speed up the rise time of the WAIT# (TA) signal when terminating the bus cycle.
BS# (bus start) is not used in this implementation and should be tied low (connected to
GND).
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MPC821 to S1D13705
interface.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MPC821 to S1D13705 Interface
MPC821 S1D13705
A[15:31]
D[0:15]
CS4
TA
WE0
WE1
OE
SYSCLK
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
470
BS#
System RESET
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.2 MPC821ADS Evaluation Board Hardware Connections
The following table details the connections between the pins and signals of the MPC821
and the S1D13705.
Table 4-1: List of Connections from MPC821ADS to S1D13705
MPC821 Signal Name MPC821ADS Connector and Pin Name S1D13705 Signal Name
Vcc P6-A1, P6-B1 Vcc
A15 P6-D20 A16
A16 P6-B24 A15
A17 P6-C24 A14
A18 P6-D23 A13
A19 P6-D22 A12
A20 P6-D19 A11
A21 P6-A19 A10
A22 P6-D28 A9
A23 P6-A28 A8
A24 P6-C27 A7
A25 P6-A26 A6
A26 P6-C26 A5
A27 P6-A25 A4
A28 P6-D26 A3
A29 P6-B25 A2
A30 P6-B19 A1
A31 P6-D17 A0
D0 P12-A9 D15
D1 P12-C9 D14
D2 P12-D9 D13
D3 P12-A8 D12
D4 P12-B8 D11
D5 P12-D8 D10
D6 P12-B7 D9
D7 P12-C7 D8
D8 P12-A15 D7
D9 P12-C15 D6
D10 P12-D15 D5
D11 P12-A14 D4
D12 P12-B14 D3
D13 P12-D14 D2
D14 P12-B13 D1
D15 P12-C13 D0
SRESET P9-D15 RESET#
SYSCLK P9-C2 BUSCLK
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
Note
The bit numbering of the Power PC bus signals is reversed from the normal convention,
e.g.: the most significant address bit is A0, the next is A1, A2, etc.
CS4 P6-D13 CS#
TA P6-B6 to inverter enabled by CS# WAIT#
WE0 P6-B15 WE1#
WE1 P6-A14 WE0#
OE P6-B16 RD/WR#, RD#
GND
P12-A1, P12-B1, P12-A2, P12-B2,
P12-A3, P12-B3, P12-A4, P12-B4,
P12-A5, P12-B5, P12-A6, P12-B6,
P12-A7
Vss
Table 4-1: List of Connections from MPC821ADS to S1D13705 (Continued)
MPC821 Signal Name MPC821ADS Connector and Pin Name S1D13705 Signal Name
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.3 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show only those configuration settings important to the MPC821
interface. The settings are very similar to the ISA bus with the following exceptions:
• the WAIT# signal is active high rather than active low.
• the Power PC is big endian rather than little endian.
Table 4-2: Configuration Settings
Signal Low High
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for MPC821 host bus interface
Table 4-3: Host Bus Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
= configuration for MPC821 host bus interface
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
4.4 MPC821 Chip Select Configuration
The DRAM on the MPC821 ADS board extends from address 0 through 3F FFFFh, so the
S1D13705 is addressed starting at 40 0000h. The S1D13705 uses a 128K byte segment of
memory starting at this address, with the first 80K bytes used for the display buffer and the
upper 32 bytes of this memory block used for the S1D13705 internal registers.
Chip select 4 is used to control the S1D13705. The following options are selected in the
base address register (BR4):
• BA (0:16) = 0000 0000 0100 0000 0 – set starting address of S1D13705 to 40 0000h
• AT (0:2) = 0 – ignore address type bits
• PS (0:1) = 1:0 – memory port size is 16 bits
• PARE = 0 – disable parity checking
• WP = 0 – disable write protect
• MS (0:1) = 0:0 – select General Purpose Chip Select module to control this chip select
• V = 1 – set valid bit to enable chip select
The following options were selected in the option register (OR4):
• AM (0:16) = 1111 1111 1100 0000 0 – mask all but upper 10 address bits; S1D13705
consumes 4M byte of address space
• ATM (0:2) = 0 – ignore address type bits
• CSNT = 0 – normal CS/WE negation
• ACS (0:1) = 1:1 – delay CS assertion by ½ clock cycle from address lines
• BI = 1 – assert Burst Inhibit
• SCY (0:3) = 0 – wait state selection; this field is ignored since external transfer
acknowledge is used; see SETA below
• SETA = 1 – the S1D13705 generates an external transfer acknowledge using the
WAIT# line
• TRLX = 0 – normal timing
• EHTR = 0 – normal timing
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.5 Test Software
The test software to exercise this interface is very simple. It configures chip select 4 on the
MPC821 to map the S1D13705 to an unused 128k byte block of address space and loads
the appropriate values into the option register for CS4. At that point the software runs in a
tight loop reading the 13705 Revision Code Register REG[00h], which allows monitoring
of the bus timing on a logic analyzer.
The source code for this test routine is as follows:
BR4 equ $120 ; CS4 base register
OR4 equ $124 ; CS4 option register
MemStart equ $40 ; upper word of S1D13705 start address
RevCodeReg equ 1FFE0 ; address of Revision Code Register
Start mfspr r1,IMMR ; get base address of internal registers
andis. r1,r1,$ffff ; clear lower 16 bits to 0
andis. r2,r0,0 ; clear r2
oris r2,r2,MemStart ; write base address
ori r2,r2,$0801 ; port size 16 bits; select GPCM; enable
stw r2,BR4(r1) ; write value to base register
andis. r2,r0,0 ; clear r2
oris r2,r2,$ffc0 ; address mask – use upper 10 bits
ori r2,r2,$0708 ; normal CS negation; delay CS ½ clock;
; inhibit burst
stw r2,OR4(r1) ; write to option register
andis. r1,r0,0 ; clear r1
oris r1,r1,MemStart ; point r1 to start of S1D13705 mem space
Loop lbz r0,RevCodeReg(r1) ; read revision code into r1
b Loop ; branch forever
end
Epson Research and Development Page 21
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
This code was entered into the memory of the MPC821ADS using the line-by-line
assembler in MPC8BUG, the debugger provided with the ADS board. It was executed on
the ADS and a logic analyzer was used to verify operation of the interface hardware.
Note
MPC8BUG does not support comments or symbolic equates; these have been added for
clarity.
It is important to note that when the MPC821 comes out of reset, its on-chip caches and
MMU are disabled. If the data cache is enabled, then the MMU must be set up so that the
S1D13705 memory block is tagged as non-cacheable, to ensure that accesses to the
S1D13705 will occur in proper order, and also to ensure that the MPC821 does not attempt
to cache any data read from or written to the S1D13705 or its display buffer.
Page 22 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 23
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-010-02
6 References
6.1 Documents
• Motorola Inc., Power PC MPC821 Portable Systems Microprocessor User’s Manual,
Motorola Publication no. MPC821UM/AD; available on the Internet at
http://www.mot.com/SPS/ADC/pps/_subpgs/_documentation/821/821UM.html.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Hardware Functional Specification; Document Number X27A-A-002-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., Programming Notes and Examples; Document
Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• Motorola Inc. Literature Distribution Center: (800) 441-2447.
• Motorola Inc. Website: http://www.mot.com.
• Epson Electronics America website: http://www.eea.epson.com.
Page 24 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MPC821 Microprocessor
X27A-G-010-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD/CRT Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 Motorola MPC821 Processor
• Motorola Design Line, (800) 521-6274.
• Local Motorola sales office or authorized distributor.
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307
"ColdFire" Microprocessor
Document Number: X27A-G-011-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the MCF5307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The MCF5307 System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2 Normal (Non-Burst) Bus Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.3 Burst Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Chip-Select Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4 MCF5307 To S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.3 MCF5307 Chip Select Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7.2 Motorola MCF5307 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 4-2: Host Bus Interface Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
List of Figures
Figure 2-1: MCF5307 Memory Read Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 2-2: MCF5307 Memory Write Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MCF5307 to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the Motorola MCF5307 Processor. The pairing of
these two devices results in an embedded system offering impressive display capability
with very low power consumption.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the MCF5307
2.1 The MCF5307 System Bus
The MCF5200/5300 family of processors feature a high-speed synchronous system bus
typical of modern microprocessors. This section is an overview of the operation of the CPU
bus to establish interface requirements.
2.1.1 Overview
The MCF5307 microprocessor family uses a synchronous address and data bus, very
similar in architecture to the MC68040 and MPC8xx. All outputs and inputs are timed with
respect to a square-wave reference clock called BCLK0 (Master Clock). This clock runs at
a software-selectable divisor rate from the machine cycle speed of the CPU core, typically
20 to 33 MHz. Both the address and the data bus are 32 bits in width. All IO accesses are
memory-mapped; there is no separate IO space in the Coldfire architecture.
The bus can support two types of cycles, normal and burst. Burst memory cycles are used
to fill on-chip cache memories, and for certain on-chip DMA operations. Normal cycles are
used for all other data transfers.
2.1.2 Normal (Non-Burst) Bus Transactions
A data transfer is initiated by the bus master by placing the memory address on address
lines A31 through A0 and driving TS (Transfer Start) low for one clock cycle. Several
control signals are also provided with the memory address:
• SIZ[1:0] (Transfer Size), which indicate whether the bus cycle is 8, 16, or 32 bits in
width.
•R/W
, which is high for read cycles and low for write cycles.
• A set of transfer type signals (TT[1:0]) which provide more detail on the type of transfer
being attempted.
•TIP
(Transfer In Progress), which is asserted whenever a bus cycle is active.
When the peripheral device being accessed has completed the bus transfer, it asserts TA
(Transfer Acknowledge) for one clock cycle, completing the bus transaction. Once TA has
been asserted, the MCF5307 will not start another bus cycle until TA has been de-asserted.
The minimum length of a bus transaction is two bus clocks.
Figure 2-1 illustrates a typical memory read cycle on the MCF5307 system bus, and Figure
2-2 illustrates a memory write cycle.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
Figure 2-1: MCF5307 Memory Read Cycle
Figure 2-2: MCF5307 Memory Write Cycle
2.1.3 Burst Cycles
Burst cycles are very similar to normal cycles, except that they occur as a series of four
back-to-back, 32-bit memory reads or writes, with the TIP (Transfer In Progress) output
asserted continuously through the burst. Burst memory cycles are mainly intended to facil-
itate cache line fill from program or data memory; they are typically not used for transfers
to or from IO peripheral devices such as the S1D13705. The MCF5307 chip selects provide
a mechanism to disable burst accesses for peripheral devices which are not able to support
them.
A[31:0]
D[31:0]
SIZ[1:0], TT[1:0]
TS
TA
BCLK0
Wait StatesTransfer Start Transfer Next Transfer
Sampled when TA low
R/W
Complete Starts
TIP
A[31:0]
D[31:0]
SIZ[1:0], TT[1:0]
TS
TA
BCLK0
Wait StatesTransfer Start
R/W
Valid
Transfer Next Transfer
Complete Starts
TIP
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2.2 Chip-Select Module
In addition to generating eight independent chip-select outputs, the MCF5307 Chip Select
Module can generate active-low Output Enable (OE) and Write Enable (BWE) signals
compatible with most memory and x86-style peripherals. The MCF5307 bus controller also
provides a Read/Write (R/W) signal which is compatible with most 68K peripherals.
Chip selects 0 and 1 can be programmed independently to respond to any base address and
block size. Chip select 0 can be active immediately after reset, and is typically used to
control a boot ROM. Chip select 1 is likewise typically used to control a large static or
dynamic RAM block.
Chip selects 2 through 7 have fixed block sizes of 2M bytes each. Each has a unique, fixed
offset from a common, programmable starting address. These chip selects are well-suited
to typical IO addressing requirements.
Each chip select may be individually programmed for port size (8/16/32 bits), 0 to 15 wait
states or external acknowledge, address space type, burst or non-burst cycle support, and
write protect.
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface mode used on the S1D13705 to interface
to the MCF5307.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode used for the MCF5307 is:
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #1
AB[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to VSS
RD/WR# RD1#
RD# RD0#
WE0# WE0#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
4 MCF5307 To S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Description
The S1D13705 is interfaced to the MCF5307 with a minimal amount of glue logic. One
inverter is required to change the polarity of the WAIT# signal, which is an active low
signal to insert wait states in the bus cycle, while the MCF5307’s Transfer Acknowledge
signal (TA) is an active low signal to end the current bus cycle. The inverter is enabled by
CS# so that TA is not driven by the S1D13705 during non-S1D13705 bus cycles. A single
resistor is used to speed up the rise time of the WAIT# (TA) signal when terminating the
bus cycle.
The following diagram shows a typical implementation of the MCF5307 to S1D13705
interface.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of MCF5307 to S1D13705 Interface
MCF5307 S1D13705
A[16:0]
D[31:16]
CS4
TA
BWE1
BWE0
OE
BCLK0
AB[16:0]
DB[15:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
BUSCLK
RESET#
Vcc
470
BS#
System RESET
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Table 4-1: “Summary of Power-
On/Reset Options” and Table 4-2: “Host Bus Interface Selection” shows the settings used
for the S1D13705 in this interface.
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
S1D1370
5 Pin
Name
value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (0/1)
01
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for MFC5307 support
Table 4-2: Host Bus Interface Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 0 Generic #1, 16-bit
= configuration for MFC5307 support
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
4.3 MCF5307 Chip Select Configuration
Chip Selects 0 and 1 have programmable block sizes from 64K bytes through 2G bytes.
However, these chip selects would normally be needed to control system RAM and ROM.
Therefore, one of the IO chip selects CS2 through CS7 is required to address the entire
address space of the S1D13705. These IO chip selects have a fixed, 2M byte block size. In
the example interface, chip select 4 is used to control the S1D13705. The S1D13705 only
uses a 128K byte block with its 80K byte display buffer residing at the start of this 128K
byte block and its internal registers occupying the last 32 bytes of this block. This block of
memory will be shadowed over the entire 2M byte space. The CSBAR register should be
set to the upper 8 bits of the desired base address.
The following options should be selected in the chip select mask registers (CSMR4/5):
• WP = 0 – disable write protect
• AM = 0 - enable alternate bus master access to the S1D13705
• C/I = 1 - disable CPU space access to the S1D13705
• SC = 1 - disable Supervisor Code space access to the S1D13705
• SD = 0 - enable Supervisor Data space access to the S1D13705
• UC = 1 - disable User Code space access to the S1D13705
• UD = 0 - enable User Data space access to the S1D13705
• V = 1 - global enable (“Valid”) for the chip select
The following options should be selected in the chip select control registers (CSCR4/5):
• WS0-3 = 0 - no internal wait state setting
• AA = 0 - no automatic acknowledgment
• PS (1:0) = 1:0 – memory port size is 16 bits
• BEM = 0 – Byte enable/write enable active on writes only
• BSTR = 0 – disable burst reads
• BSTW = 0 – disable burst writes
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-011-02
6 References
6.1 Documents
• Motorola Inc., MCF5307 ColdFire® Integrated Microprocessor User’s Manual,
Motorola Publication no. MCF5307UM/AD; available on the Internet at
http://www.mot.com/SPS/HPESD/prod/coldfire/5307UM.html.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification;
Document Number X27A-A-002-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• Motorola Inc.: Motorola Literature Distribution Center, (800) 441-2447.
• Motorola website: http://www.mot.com.
• Epson Electronics America website: http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Motorola MCF5307 "ColdFire" Microprocessor
X27A-G-011-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 Motorola MCF5307 Processor
• Motorola Design Line, (800) 521-6274.
• Local Motorola sales office or authorized distributor.
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS
PR31500/PR31700 Processor
Document Number: X27A-G-012-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the PR31500/PR31700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 Direct Connection to the Philips PR31500/PR31700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 S1D13705 Configuration and Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Using the ITE IT8368E PC Card Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 IT8368E Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.3 Memory Mapping and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.4 S1D13705 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.2 Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.3 ITE IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 4-1: S1D13705 Configuration for Direct Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 5-1: PR31500/PR31700 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E. 17
Table 5-2: S1D13705 Configuration Using the IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
List of Figures
Figure 4-1: S1D13705 to PR31500/PR31700 Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Figure 5-1: S1D13705 to PR31500/PR31700 Connection Using an IT8368E . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor.
The pairing of these two devices results in an embedded system offering impressive display
capability with very low power consumption.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the PR31500/PR31700
The Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 processor supports up to two PC Card (PCMCIA)
slots. It is through this host bus interface that the S1D13705 connects to the
PR31500/PR31700 processor.
The S1D13705 can be successfully interfaced using one of two configurations:
• Direct connection to PR31500/PR31700 (see Section 4, Direct Connection to the
Philips PR31500/PR31700 on page 12).
• System design using one ITE IT8368E PC Card/GPIO buffer chip (see Section 5, Using
the ITE IT8368E PC Card Buffer on page 15).
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
would be used to interface to the PR31500/PR31700.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface modes used for the PR31500/PR31700 are:
• Generic #1 (Chip Select, plus individual Read Enable/Write Enable for each byte).
• Generic #2 (External Chip Select, shared Read/Write Enable for high byte, individual
Read/Write Enable for low byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #1 Generic #2
AB[15:1] A[15:1] A[15:1]
AB0 A0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# WE1# BHE#
CS# External Decode External Decode
BCLK BCLK BCLK
BS# connect to VSS connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# RD1# connect to IO VDD
RD# RD0# RD#
WE0# WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET# RESET#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3.2 Generic #1 Interface Mode
Generic #1 interface mode is the most general and least processor-specific interface mode
on the S1D13705. The Generic # 1 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which is required by the S1D13705 host interface. It is sepa-
rate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE0# and WE1# are write enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is writing data to the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# and RD/WR# are read enables for the low-order and high-order bytes, respectively,
to be driven low when the host CPU is reading data from the S1D13705. These signals
must be generated by external hardware based on the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal output from the S1D13705 that indicates the host CPU must wait
until data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host CPU
accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is possible
that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers and/or refresh
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) signal is not used in the bus interface for Generic #1 mode.
However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for Generic #1 mode and should be
tied low (connected to GND).
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
3.3 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13705. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing and compatibility with the PR31500/PR31700 control signals.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles.
• WE0# is the write enable signal for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU
is writing data from the S1D13705.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 13705 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 Direct Connection to the Philips PR31500/PR31700
4.1 General Description
In this example implementation the S1D13705 occupies the PR31500/PR31700 PC Card
slot #1.
The S1D13705 is easily interfaced to the PR31500/PR31700 with minimal additional logic.
The address bus of the PR31500/PR31700 PC Card interface is multiplexed and must be
demultiplexed using an advanced CMOS latch (e.g., 74AHC373). The direct connection
approach makes use of the S1D13705 in its “Generic #2” interface configuration.
The following diagram demonstrates a typical implementation of the interface.
Figure 4-1: S1D13705 to PR31500/PR31700 Direct Connection
Note
See Section 3.1 on page 9 and Section 3.3 on page 11 for Generic #2 pin descriptions.
WE0#
RD#
DB[7:0]
WAIT#
BCLK
S1D13705
RESET#
AB[16:13]
D[31:24]
/CARD1WAIT
A[12:0]
PR31500/PR31700
pull-up
Oscillator
WE1#
/CARD1CSL
/CARD1CSH
Latch
ALE
System RESET
/CARDIOWR
/CARDIOREAD
BS#
RD/WR#
+3.3V
+3.3V
ENDIAN
DB[15:8]
D[23:16]
AB[12:0]
VDD
DCLKOUT
...or...
CS#
CLKI
See text
Clock divider
IO VDD, CORE VDD
+3.3V
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
The “Generic #2” host interface control signals of the S1D13705 are asynchronous with
respect to the S1D13705 bus clock. This gives the system designer full flexibility to choose
the appropriate source (or sources) for CLKI and BCLK. The choice of whether both clocks
should be the same, and whether to use DCLKOUT (divided) as clock source, should be
based on the desired:
• pixel and frame rates.
• power budget.
•part count.
• maximum S1D13705 clock frequencies.
The S1D13705 also has internal clock dividers providing additional flexibility.
4.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing
The S1D13705 requires an addressing space of 128K bytes. The on-chip display memory
occupies the range 0 through 13FFFh. The registers occupy the range 1FFE0h through
1FFFFh. The PR31500/PR31700 demultiplexed address lines A17 and above are ignored,
thus the S1D13705 is aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals over the 64M byte PC Card
slot #1 memory space. In this example implementation, the PR31500/PR31700 control
signal /CARDREG is ignored; therefore the S1D13705 also takes up the entire PC Card slot
1 configuration space.
Note
If aliasing is undesirable, additional decoding circuitry must be added.
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.3 S1D13705 Configuration and Pin Mapping
The S1D13705 is configured at power up by latching the state of the CNF[3:0] pins. Pin
BS# also plays a role in host bus interface configuration. For details on configuration, refer
to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
The table below shows those configuration settings relevant to the direct connection
approach.
Table 4-1: S1D13705 Configuration for Direct Connection
S1D13705
Configuration
Pin
Value hard wired on this pin is used to configure:
1 (IO VDD)0 (V
SS)
BS# Generic #2 Generic #1
CNF3 Big Endian Little Endian
CNF[2:0] 111: Generic #1 or #2
= configuration for Philips PR31500/PR31700 host bus interface
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
5 Using the ITE IT8368E PC Card Buffer
If the system designer uses the ITE IT8368E PC Card and multiple-function I/O buffer, the
S1D13705 can be interfaced so that it “shares” a PC Card slot. The S1D13705 is mapped
to a rarely-used 16M byte portion of the PC Card slot buffered by the IT8368E. This makes
the S1D13705 virtually transparent to PC Card devices that use the same slot.
5.1 Hardware Description
The ITE8368E has been specially designed to support EPSON LCD controllers. The ITE
IT8368E provides eleven Multi-Function IO pins (MFIO). Configuration registers may be
used to allow these MFIO pins to provide the control signals required to implement the
S1D13705 CPU interface.
The PR31500/PR31700 processor only provides addresses A[12:0]; therefore devices
requiring more address space must use an external device to latch A[25:13]. The IT8368E’s
MFIO pins can be configured to provide this latched address.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
Figure 5-1: S1D13705 to PR31500/PR31700 Connection Using an IT8368E
Note
See Section 3.1 on page 9 and Section 3.2 on page 10 for Generic #1 pin descriptions.
The “Generic #1” host interface control signals of the S1D13705 are asynchronous with
respect to the S1D13705 bus clock. This gives the system designer full flexibility to choose
the appropriate source (or sources) for CLKI and BCLK. The choice of whether both clocks
should be the same, and whether to use DCLKOUT (divided) as clock source, should be
based on the desired:
• pixel and frame rates.
• power budget.
• part count.
• maximum S1D13705 clock frequencies.
The S1D13705 also has internal clock dividers providing additional flexibility.
IT8368E
S1D13705
HA[12:0] AB[12:0]
HD[31:24] DB[7:0]
LHA[23]/MFIO[10] WE1#
WE0#
RD/WR#
RD#
CS#
LHA[22]/MFIO[9]
LHA[21]/MFIO[8]
LHA[20]/MFIO[7]
LHA[19]/MFIO[6]
WAIT#
/CARDxWAIT
RESET#
AB[16:13]
PR31500/PR31700
HD[23:16] DB[15:8]
DCLKOUT
ENDIAN
System RESET
LHA[16:13]/
Oscillator
...or...
pull-up
VDD
BCLK
CLKI
See text
Clock divider
BS#
IO VDD, CORE VDD
+3.3V
MFIO[3:0]
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
5.2 IT8368E Configuration
The IT8368E provides eleven multi-function IO pins (MFIO). The IT8368E must have
both “Fix Attribute/IO” and “VGA” modes on. When both these modes are enabled, the
MFIO pins provide control signals needed by the S1D13705 host bus interface, and a 16M
byte portion of the system PC Card attribute and IO space is allocated to address the
S1D13705. When accessing the S1D13705 the associated card-side signals are disabled in
order to avoid any conflicts.
For mapping details, refer to section 3.3: “Memory Mapping and Aliasing.” For connection
details see Figure 5-1:
“S1D13705 to PR31500/PR31700 Connection Using an IT8368E,”
on page 16
. For further information on the IT8368E, refer to the IT8368E PC Card/GPIO
Buffer Chip Specification.
Note
When a second IT8368E is used, that circuit should not be set in VGA mode.
5.3 Memory Mapping and Aliasing
When the PR31500/PR31700 accesses the PC Card slots without the ITE IT8368E, its
system memory is mapped as in Table 5-1:
PR31500/PR31700 to PC Card Slots Address
Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
.
Note
Bit CARD1IOEN or CARD2IOEN, depending on which card slot is used, must to be set
to 0 in the PR31500/PR31700 Memory Configuration Register 3.
When the PR31500/PR31700 accesses the PC Card slots buffered through the ITE
IT8368E, bits CARD1IOEN and CARD2IOEN are ignored and the attribute/IO space of
the PR31500/PR31700 is divided into Attribute, I/O and S1D13705 access. Table 5-1:
PR31500/PR31700 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
provides all details of the Attribute/IO address reallocation by the IT8368E.
Table 5-1: PR31500/PR31700 to PC Card Slots Address Mapping With and Without the IT8368E
PC Card
Slot #
TX3912
Address Size Using the ITE IT8368E Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=0
Direct Connection,
CARDnIOEN=1
1
0800 0000h 16M byte Card 1 IO S1D13705
(aliased 512 times
at 128K byte intervals) Card 1 IO0900 0000h 16M byte S1D13705 (aliased 128 times
at 128K byte intervals)
0A00 0000h 32M byte Card 1 Attribute
6400 0000h 64M byte Card 1 Memory S1D13705 (aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals)
2
0C00 0000h 16M byte Card 2 IO S1D13705
(aliased 512 times
at 128K byte intervals) Card 2 IO0D00 0000h 16M byte S1D13705 (aliased 128 times
at 128K byte intervals)
0E00 0000h 32M byte Card 2 Attribute
6800 0000h 64M byte Card 2 Memory S1D13705 (aliased 512 times at 128K byte intervals)
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
5.4 S1D13705 Configuration
The S1D13705 is configured at power up by latching the state of the CNF[3:0] pins. Pin
BS# also plays a role in host bus interface configuration. For details on configuration, refer
to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx.
The table below shows those configuration settings relevant to this specific interface.
Table 5-2: S1D13705 Configuration Using the IT8368E
S1D13705
Configuration
Pin
Value hard wired on this pin is used to configure:
1 (IO VDD)0 (V
SS)
BS# Generic #2 Generic #1
CNF3 Big Endian Little Endian
CNF[2:0] 111: Generic #1 or #2
= configuration for connection using ITE IT8368E
Epson Research and Development Page 19
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-012-02
6 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
1357CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or www.eea.epson.com.
Page 20 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
X27A-G-012-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
7 Technical Support
7.1 EPSON LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 Philips MIPS PR31500/PR31700 Processor
7.3 ITE IT8368E
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
Philips Semiconductors
Handheld Computing Group
4811 E. Arques Avenue
M/S 42, P.O. Box 3409
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3409
Tel: (408) 991-2313
http://www.philips.com
Integrated Technology Express, Inc.
Sales & Marketing Division
2710 Walsh Avenue
Santa Clara, CA 95051, USA
Tel: (408) 980-8168
Fax: (408) 980-9232
http://www.iteusa.com
S1D13704/5 Embedded Memory Color LCD Controller
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU
Module
Document Number: X00A-G-004-02
Copyright © 1998, 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
EPSON Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
2 S1D13704/5 Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 Bus Interface Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
2.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
3 TMPR3912/22U and S1D13704/5 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.1 Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 S1D13704/5 Configuration and Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 CPU Module Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 Clock Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1.1 BUSCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1.2 CLKI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 LCD Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2.1 50-pin LCD Module Connector, J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2.2 Standard Epson LCD Connector, J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 LCD Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.1 S1D13704 vs. S1D13705 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.2 LCDPWR Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3.3 S1D13704\75 Chip Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Page 4 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
EPSON Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: S1D13704/5 Configuration for Generic #2 Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Table 3-2: S1D13704/5 Generic #2 Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
List of Figures
Figure 3-1: S1D13704 to TMPR3912/22U Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Page 6 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
EPSON Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
1 Introduction
This manual describes the interface between the S1D13704/5 LCD Controller (LCDC) and
the TMPR3912/22U microprocessor as implemented on the Toshiba 3912/22 and
S1D13704/5 CPU Module. This module is used in conjunction with the Toshiba TX RISC
Reference Platform.
For more information regarding the S1D13704 or S1D13705 refer to their respective
Hardware Functional Specification, document number X26A-A-001-xx and
X27A-A-001-xx respectively.
For more information regarding the TMPR3912/22U, refer to the TMPR3912/22U 32-Bit
MIPS RISC Processor User’s Manual. See the Toshiba website under semiconductors at
http://toshiba.com/taec/nonflash/indexproducts.html.
1.1 General Description
The Toshiba TX RISC Reference Kit consists of 6 boards which include: a main board, a
CPU board, a EPROM board, a FMEM board, a debug board, and an analog board. The
main board acts as the motherboard for all the other add-on boards. In addition to these
boards, there is an LCD module that connects to the CPU board. In order to support the
add-on LCD panel that connects to the LCD module, the CPU board microprocessor must
have an internal LCD controller or the CPU board must have an LCD controller on it that
interfaces to the microprocessor.
For the TMPR3912/22U microprocessor, the S1D13704 or S1D13705 LCDC is used to
provide support for LCD panels. The LCDC is socketed so that it can be interchanged
between the S1D13704 and the S1D13705. These controllers are very similar, with the
main differences being the amount of embedded display memory and the lookup-table
architecture (LUT). The S1D13704 has 40K bytes of display memory and the S1D13705
has 80K bytes.
The Toshiba TMPR3912/22U processor supports two PC Card (PCMCIA) slots on the TX
RISC Reference Platform. The S1D13704 or S1D13705 LCD controller uses the PC Card
slot 1 to interface to the TMPR3912/22U, therefore, this slot is unavailable for use on the
TX RISC Reference Platform.
Page 8 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
2 S1D13704/5 Bus Interface
This section is summary of the bus interface modes available on the S1D13704 and
S1D13705 LCDCs, and offers some detail on the Generic #2 bus mode used to implement
the interface to the TMPR3912/22U.
2.1 Bus Interface Modes
The S1D13704/5 implements a general-purpose 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor,
which may operate in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded
microprocessor families.
Bus interface mode selections are made during reset by sampling the state of the configu-
ration pins CNF[2:0] and the BS# line. Table 5-1 in the S1D13704 or S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification details the values needed for the configuration pins and BS# to
select the desired mode.
EPSON Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
2.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13704/5. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to its
compatibility with the PC Card interface.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13704/5. BUSCLK is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven
by the host CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB15, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles and WE0# is the enable
signal for a write access. These must be generated by external decode hardware based
upon the control outputs from the host CPU.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13704/5, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13704/5. RD# must be generated by external decode hard-
ware based upon the control outputs from the host CPU.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13704/5 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13704/5 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 13704/5 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13704/5 for
Generic #2 mode and must be tied high (connected to IOVDD = 3.3V). RD/WR# must
also be tied high.
Page 10 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
3 TMPR3912/22U and S1D13704/5 Interface
3.1 Hardware Connections
The S1D13704/5 occupies the TMPR3912/22U’s PC Card slot #1. Therefore, this slot
cannot be used for other devices on the main board. The Generic # 2 bus mode of the
S1D13704/5 is used to interface to this PC Card slot #1.
The S1D13704/5 is interfaced to the TMPR3912/22U with minimal glue logic. Since the
address bus of the TMPR3912/22U is multiplexed, it is demultiplexed using an advanced
CMOS latch (74ACT373) to obtain the higher address bits needed for the S1D13704/5.
The following diagram demonstrates the implementation of the interface.
Figure 3-1: S1D13704 to TMPR3912/22U Interface
WE10#
RD#
DB[7:0]
WAIT#
BUSCLK
S1D13704
RESET#
AB[15:13]
D[31:24]
CARD1WAIT*
A[12:0]
TMPR3912/22U
10K pull-up
WE1#
CARD1CSL*
CARD1CSH*
Latch
ALE
System RESET
WE*
RD*
BS#
RD/WR#
3.3V
3.3V
ENDIAN
DB[15:8]
D[23:16]
AB[12:0]
3.3V
DCLKOUT
CS#
CLKI
or...
Clock divider
IO VDD, CORE VDD
+3.3V
/ 2
Clock divider
/ 2 Oscillator
EPSON Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
3.2 Memory Mapping and Aliasing
The S1D13704 requires an addressing space of 64K bytes while the S1D13705 requires
128K. The on-chip display memory occupies the range 0 through 9FFFh. The registers
occupy the range FFE0h through FFFFh. The TMPR3912/22U demultiplexed address lines
A16 and above are ignored if the S1D13704 is used, thus it is aliased 1024 times at 64K
byte intervals over the 64M byte PC Card slot #1 memory space. If the S1D13705 is used,
address lines A17 and above are ignored; therefore the S1D13705 is aliased 512 times at
128K byte intervals. The TMPR3912/22U control signal CARDREG# is ignored; therefore
the S1D13704 also takes up the entire PC Card slot #1 configuration space.
Note
If aliasing is undesirable, additional decoding circuitry must be added.
3.3 S1D13704/5 Configuration and Pin Mapping
The S1D13704/5 host bus interface is configured at power up by latching the state of the
CNF[3:0] pins. Pin BS# also plays a role in host bus interface configuration. One additional
configuration pin for the S1D13704, CNF4, is also used to set the polarity of the LCDPWR
signal.
The table below shows the configuration pin connections to configure the S1D13704/5 for
use with the TMPR3912/22U microprocessor.
When the S1D13704/5 is configured for Generic #2 bus interface mode, the host interface
pins are mapped as in the table below.
Table 3-1: S1D13704/5 Configuration for Generic #2 Bus Interface
S1D13704
Configuration
Pin
Value hard wired on this pin is used to configure:
1 (IO VDD)0 (V
SS)
BS# Generic #2 Generic #1
CNF3 Big Endian Little Endian
CNF[2:0] 111: Generic #1 or #2
= configuration for Toshiba TMPR3912/22U host bus interface
Table 3-2: S1D13704/5 Generic #2 Interface Pin Mapping
Pin Name Pin Function
WE1# BHE#
BS# Connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# Connect to IO VDD
RD# RD#
WE0# WE#
Page 12 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
4 CPU Module Description
This section will describe the various parts of the CPU module that pertain to the
S1D13704/5 LCD Controller.
4.1 Clock Signals
4.1.1 BUSCLK
Because the bus clock for the S1D13704/5 does not need to be synchronous with the bus
interface control signals, a lot of flexibility is available in the choice for BUSCLK. In this
CPU module, BUSCLK is a divided by two version of the SDRAM clock signal,
DCLKOUT. Since DCLKOUT equals 73.728MHz, BUSCLK = 36.864MHz.
4.1.2 CLKI
The pixel clock for the S1D13704/5, CLKI, is also asynchronous with respect to the
interface control signals. This clock is selected based upon panel frame rates, power vs
performance budget, and maximum input frequencies. The maximum CLKI input is
25MHz if the internal CLKI/2 isn’t used, and if it is used the maximum input is 50MHz.
On the CPU module, CLKI’s default input is a divided by four version of DCLKOUT,
which gives a CLKI = 18.432MHZ. This frequency gives good performance for 320x240
resolution panels for both portrait and landscape modes. If power saving is desired, the
CLKI can be reduced by using the internal CLKI/2 and the various PCLK and MCLK
dividers for portrait mode.
A socket for an external oscillator is also provided if a different frequency is required. This
option is selected by positioning jumper JP8 in the 2 3 position and adding a standard 14-
DIP type oscillator in the socket U10.
4.2 LCD Connectors
4.2.1 50-pin LCD Module Connector, J3
The standard connector used on Toshiba’s CPU Modules to connect to the LCD module is
included in this CPU module. All twelve LCD data lines, FPDAT[11:0], from the
S1D13704/5, as well as the five video control signals, FPFRAME, FPSHIFT, FPLINE,
DRDY, LCDPWR, are passed through this connector. Through this connector, the
S1D13704/5 supports monochrome and color STN panels up to a resolution of 640x480 as
well as color TFT/D-TFT up to a resolution of 640x480. All touch panel signals from the
main board have also been routed through this connector.
EPSON Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
Issue Date: 01/03/07 X00A-G-004-02
4.2.2 Standard Epson LCD Connector, J4
A shrouded 40-pin header, J4, is also added to the CPU module to connect to LCD panels.
This header is the standard LCD connector used on Epson Research and Development
evaluation boards and can be used to directly connect LCD panels to the S1D13704/5
controller. All LCD signals are buffered to allow 3.3V or 5.0V logic LCD panels to be
connected. Jumper, JP9, selects between these two types of panels.
A positive power supply for panels requiring a positive bias voltage is supplied to header
J4, by the LCD module through the 50-pin LCD module connector, J3. No negative power
supply is available on the LCD module, therefore only panels which have their own bias
voltage supply, or those that use a positive supply, can be connected to J4. The LCD
module can only support these panels as well.
Header, J4, and its associated buffers and components have been left unpopulated on the
CPU module. These parts can be added by the user if desired.
4.3 LCD Controller
4.3.1 S1D13704 vs. S1D13705
The LCD controller used in conjunction with the TMPR3912/22U microprocessor can
either be a S1D13704 or a S1D13705. If a S1D13704 is used, jumper JP7 must be set to
position 1 2. This setting allows CNF4 to be configured for the S1D13704. CNF4 controls
the polarity of the LCDPWR signal and can be set either high or low with jumper, JP11. If
a S1D13705 is used, jumper JP7 must be set to position 2 3. This setting allows pin 45 of
the LCDC to be used as address bit, AB16, which is needed on the S1D13705 to accom-
modate the larger display memory.
4.3.2 LCDPWR Polarity
The power supply on the LCD module used LCDON, an active low signal to turn on the
supply. This signal is connected to LCDPWR. Since LCDPWR is configurable on the
S1D13704 and is set active high on the S1D13705, a facility must be provided to invert this
signal if it is active high so that LCDON will be the right polarity to turn on the LCD power
supply. Jumper, JP10 must be set to position 1 2 if LCDPWR is active low and to position
2 3 if LCDPWR is active high.
4.3.3 S1D13704\75 Chip Select
Minimal glue logic is used on the CPU module to provide the chip select signal, CS#, for
the LCDC. A simple AND gate activates the S1D13704/5 whenever the PC Card slot #1
is accessed, whether it be memory space or attribute space.
Page 14 EPSON Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S5U13704/5 - TMPR3912/22U CPU Module
X00A-G-004-02 Issue Date: 01/03/07
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™
Microprocessor
Document Number: X27A-G-013-02
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The NEC VR4181A System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2 LCD Memory Access Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4 VR4181A to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 NEC VR4181A Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.1 Epson LCD Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7.2 NEC Electronics Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Figures
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of VR4181A to S1D13705 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware required to interface the S1D13705
Embedded Memory LCD Controller and the NEC VR4181A microprocessor. The NEC
VR4181A microprocessor is specifically designed to support an external LCD controller
and the pairing of these two devices results in an embedded system offering impressive
display capability with very low power consumption.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com for the
latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
techpubs@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
2 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A
2.1 The NEC VR4181A System Bus
The VR-Series family of microprocessors features a high-speed synchronous system bus
typical of modern microprocessors. Designed with external LCD controller support and
Windows CE based embedded consumer applications in mind, the VR4181A offers a
highly integrated solution for portable systems. This section is an overview of the operation
of the CPU bus to establish interface requirements.
2.1.1 Overview
The NEC VR4181A is designed around the RISC architecture developed by MIPS. This
microprocessor is designed around the 100MHz VR4110 CPU core which supports the
MIPS III and MIPS16 instruction sets. The CPU communicates with external devices via
an ISA interface.
The NEC VR4181A has direct support for an external LCD controller. A 64 to 512-kilobyte
block of memory is assigned to the LCD controller with a dedicated chip select signal.
Word or byte accesses are controlled by the system high byte signal, #UBE.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
2.1.2 LCD Memory Access Signals
The S1D13705 requires an addressing range of 128Kbytes. When the VR4181A’s external
LCD controller chip select signal is programmed to a window of that size, the S1D13705
must reside in the VR4181A physical address range of 133E 0000h to 133F FFFFh which
is part of the external ISA memory space.
The signals required for external LCD controller access are listed below and obey ISA
signalling rules.
• A[16:0] Address bus
• #UBE High byte enable (active low)
• #LCDCS LCD controller (S1D13705) chip select (active low)
• D[15:0] Data bus
• #MEMRD Read command (active low)
• #MEMWR Write command (active low)
• #MEMCS16 Sixteen-bit peripheral capability acknowledge (active low)
• IORDY Ready signal from S1D13705
• SYSCLK Optional, prescalable bus clock
Once an address in the LCD block of memory is accessed, the LCD chip select #LCDCS is
driven low. The read or write enable signals, #MEMRD or #MEMWR, are driven low for
the appropriate cycle and IORDY is driven low by the S1D13705 to insert wait states into
the cycle. The high byte enable is driven low for 16-bit transfers and high for 8-bit transfers.
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
3 S1D13705 Host Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 that
would be used to interface to the VR4181A.
The S1D13705 implements a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The interface mode used for the VR4181A is:
• Generic #2 (External Chip Select, shared Read/Write Enable for high byte, individual
Read/Write Enable for low byte).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #2
AB[16:1] A[16:1]
AB0 A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0]
WE1# BHE#
CS# External Decode
BCLK BCLK
BS# Connect to IO VDD
RD/WR# Connect to IO VDD
RD# RD#
WE0# WE#
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 interface mode is a general and non-processor-specific interface mode on the
S1D13705. The Generic # 2 interface mode was chosen for this interface due to the
simplicity of its timing and compatibility with the VR4181A control signals.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively. On 32-bit big endian architec-
tures such as the Power PC, the data bus would connect to the high-order data lines; on
little endian hosts, or 16-bit big endian hosts, they would connect to the low-order data
lines. The hardware engineer must ensure that CNF3 selects the proper endian mode
upon reset.
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
register and memory address space.
• WE1# is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles.
• WE0# is the write enable signal for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU
is writing data from the S1D13705.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the S1D13705 internal registers or
memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait until the
resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be inverted if
the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IOVDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4 VR4181A to S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Description
The NEC VR4181A microprocessor is specifically designed to support an external LCD
controller by providing the internal address decoding and control signals necessary. By
using the Generic # 2 interface, a glueless interface is achieved. The diagram below shows
a typical implementation of the VR4181A to S1D13705 interface.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of VR4181A to S1D13705 Interface
WE1#
WE0#
DB[15:0]
WAIT#
RD#
BCLK
S1D13705
CS#
RESET#
AB[15:0]
#UBE
#MEMWR
D[15:0]
#LCDCS
#MEMRD
IORDY
A[16:0]
NEC VR4181A
Pull-up
BS#
RD/WR#
Vcc
Vcc
System RESET
Oscillator
#MEMCS16
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
The host interface control signals of the S1D13705 are asynchronous with respect to the
S1D13705 bus clock. This gives the system designer full flexibility to choose the appro-
priate source (or sources) for CLKI and BCLK. The choice of whether both clocks should
be the same, and whether an external or internal clock divider is needed, should be based
on the desired:
• pixel and frame rates.
• power budget.
•part count.
• maximum S1D13705 clock frequencies.
The S1D13705 also has internal clock dividers providing additional flexibility.
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF3 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show those configuration settings important to the Generic #2 host bus
interface.
Table 4-1: Summary of Power-On/Reset Options
Signal value on this pin at the rising edge of RESET# is used to configure: (0/1)
01
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
= configuration for NEC VR4181A support
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= configuration for NEC VR4181A support
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
4.3 NEC VR4181A Configuration
The NEC VR4181A must be configured through its internal registers in order to map the
S1D13705 to the external LCD controller space. The following register values must be set.
Register LCDGPMD at address 0B00 032Eh must be set as follows.
• Bit 7 must be set to 1 to disable the internal LCD controller and enable the external LCD
controller interface. This also maps pin SHCLK to #LCDCS and pin LOCLK to
#MEMCS16.
• Bits [1:0] must be set to 01b to reserve 128Kbytes of memory address range
133E 0000h to 133F FFFFh for the external LCD controller.
Register GPMD2REG at address 0B00 0304h must be set as follows.
• Bits [9:8] (GP20MD[1:0]) must be set to 11b to map pin GPIO20 to #UBE.
• Bits [5:4] (GP18MD[1:0]) must be set to 01b to map pin GPIO18 to IORDY.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
5 Software
Test utilities and Windows® CE v2.0 display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full
source code is available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG, or by directly modifying the source. The Windows CE v2.0 display drivers can
be customized by the OEM for different panel types, resolutions and color depths only by
modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and Windows CE v2.0 display drivers are available from your
sales support contact or on the internet at http://www.eea.epson.com.
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
6 References
6.1 Documents
• NEC VR4181A Target Specification, Revision 0.5, 9/11/98
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification;
Document Number X27A-A-002-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X27A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X27A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• NEC website at http://www.nec.com.
• Epson Electronics America website at http://www.eea.epson.com
Epson Research and Development Page 17
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/02/13 X27A-G-013-02
7 Technical Support
7.1 Epson LCD Controllers (S1D13705)
7.2 NEC Electronics Inc.
NEC Electronics Inc. (U.S.A.)
Santa Clara
California
Tel: (800) 366-9782
Fax: (800) 729-9288
http://www.nec.com
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com
Page 18 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to the NEC VR4181A™ Microprocessor
X27A-G-013-02 Issue Date: 01/02/13
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
S1D13705 Embedded Memory Color LCD Controller
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
Document Number: X27A-G-015-01
Copyright © 2001 Epson Research and Development, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. You may download and use this document, but only for your own use in
evaluating Seiko Epson/EPSON products. You may not modify the document. Epson Research and Development, Inc. disclaims any
representation that the contents of this document are accurate or current. The Programs/Technologies described in this document may contain
material protected under U.S. and/or International Patent laws.
EPSON is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. All Trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Page 2 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 3
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 The Generic 8-bit Processor System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 8-Bit Processor to S1D13705 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.1 Hardware Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3 Register/Memory Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
6 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.1 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6.2 Document Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1 Epson LCD/CRT Controllers (S1D13705) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Page 4 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 5
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
List of Tables
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 4-1: Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
List of Figures
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of an 8-bit Processor to the S1D13705 Generic #2 Interface . .11
Page 6 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK
Epson Research and Development Page 7
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
1 Introduction
This application note describes the hardware environment required to provide an interface
between the S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller and a generic 8-bit micropro-
cessor.
The designs described in this document are presented only as examples of how such
interfaces might be implemented. This application note will be updated as appropriate.
Please check the Epson Research and Development Website at http://www.erd.epson.com
for the latest revision of this document before beginning any development.
We appreciate your comments on our documentation. Please contact us via email at
documentation@erd.epson.com.
Page 8 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
2 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
2.1 The Generic 8-bit Processor System Bus
Although the S1D13705 does not directly support an 8-bit CPU, with minimal external
logic an 8-bit interface can be achieved.
Typically, the bus of an 8-bit microprocessor is straight forward with minimal CPU and
system control signals. To connect a memory mapped device such as the S1D13705, only
the write, read, and wait control signals, as well as the data and address lines, need to be
interfaced. Since the S1D13705 is a 16-bit device, some external logic is required.
Epson Research and Development Page 9
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
3 S1D13705 Bus Interface
This section is a summary of the host bus interface modes available on the S1D13705 and
offers some detail on the Generic #2 Host Bus Interface used to implement the interface to
an 8-bit processor.
The S1D13705 provides a 16-bit interface to the host microprocessor which may operate
in one of several modes compatible with most of the popular embedded microprocessor
families. The bus interface mode used in this example is:
• Generic #2 (this bus interface is ISA-like and can easily be modified to support an 8-bit
CPU).
3.1 Host Bus Pin Connection
The following table shows the functions of each host bus interface signal.
Note
If the CPU does not have address A16 all 80K Bytes of embedded memory will not be
accessible.
For details on configuration, refer to the S1D13705 Hardware Functional Specification,
document number X27A-A-001-xx.
Table 3-1: Host Bus Interface Pin Mapping
S1D13705
Pin Names Generic #2 Description
AB[16:1] A[16:1] Address [16:1]
AB0 A0 Address A0
DB[15:0] D[15:0] Data
WE1# BHE# Byte High Enable
CS# External Decode Chip Select
BCLK BCLK Bus Clock
BS# n/c Must be tied to IO VDD
RD/WR# n/c Must be tied to IO VDD
RD# RD# Read
WE0# WE# Write
WAIT# WAIT#
RESET# RESET#
Page 10 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
3.2 Generic #2 Interface Mode
Generic #2 Host Bus Interface is a general, non-processor specific interface mode on the
S1D13705 that is ideally suited to interface to an 8-bit processor bus.
The interface requires the following signals:
• BUSCLK is a clock input which synchronizes transfers between the host CPU and the
S1D13705. It is separate from the input clock (CLKI) and is typically driven by the host
CPU system clock. If the host CPU bus does not provide this clock, an asynchronous
clock can be provided.
• The address inputs AB0 through AB16, and the data bus DB0 through DB15, connect
directly to the CPU address and data bus, respectively.
Note
In an 8-bit environment D[7:0] must also be connected to DB[15:8] respectively (i.e. D7
connects to both DB15 and DB7, D6 connects to both DB14 and DB6, D5 connects to
both DB13 and DB5, etc.). See Figure 4-1: “Typical Implementation of an 8-bit Proces-
sor to the S1D13705 Generic #2 Interface” .
• Chip Select (CS#) is driven by decoding the high-order address lines to select the proper
memory address space.
• BHE# (WE1#) is the high byte enable for both read and write cycles.
Note
In an 8-bit environment, this signal is driven by inverting address line A0 thus indicating
that odd addresses are to be R/W on the high byte of the data bus.
• WE0# is the enable signal for a write access, to be driven low when the host CPU is
writing the 1375 memory or registers.
• RD# is the read enable for the S1D13705, to be driven low when the host CPU is
reading data from the S1D13705.
• WAIT# is a signal which is output from the S1D13705 to the host CPU that indicates
when data is ready (read cycle) or accepted (write cycle) on the host bus. Since host
CPU accesses to the S1D13705 may occur asynchronously to the display update, it is
possible that contention may occur in accessing the 1375 internal registers and/or
refresh memory. The WAIT# line resolves these contentions by forcing the host to wait
until the resource arbitration is complete. This signal is active low and may need to be
inverted if the host CPU wait state signal is active high.
• The Bus Status (BS#) and Read/Write (RD/WR#) signals are not used in the bus inter-
face for Generic #2 mode. However, BS# is used to configure the S1D13705 for
Generic #2 mode and should be tied high (connected to IO VDD). RD/WR# should also
be tied high.
Epson Research and Development Page 11
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
4 8-Bit Processor to S1D13705 Interface
4.1 Hardware Description
The interface between the S1D13705 and an 8-bit processor requires minimal glue logic. A
decoder is used to generate the chip select for the S1D13705 based on where the S1D13705
is mapped into memory. Alternatively, if the processor supports a chip select module, it can
be programmed to generate a chip select for the S1D13705 without the need of an address
decoder.
An inverter inverts A0 to generate the Byte High Enable signal for the S1D13705. If the
8-bit host interface has an active high WAIT signal, it must be inverted as well.
In order to support an 8-bit microprocessor with a 16-bit peripheral, the low and high order
bytes of the data bus must be connected together. The following diagram shows a typical
implementation of an 8-bit processor interfaced to the S1D13705.
Figure 4-1: Typical Implementation of an 8-bit Processor to the S1D13705 Generic #2 Interface
Generic 8-bit Bus S1D13705
A[16:1]
D[7:0]
Decoder
WAIT#
WE#
RD#
BUSCLK
AB[16:1]
DB[7:0]
CS#
WAIT#
WE0#
RD#
RD/WR#
BUSCLK
RESET#
DB[15:8]
IO VDD
BS#
BHE# (WE1#)
System RESET
Note:
When connecting the S1D13705 RESET# pin, the system designer should be aware of all
conditions that may reset the S1D13705 (e.g. CPU reset can be asserted during wake-up
from power-down modes, or during debug states).
A[0] AB[0]
Page 12 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
4.2 S1D13705 Hardware Configuration
The S1D13705 uses CNF4 through CNF0 and BS# to allow selection of the bus mode and
other configuration data on the rising edge of RESET#. Refer to the S1D13705 Hardware
Functional Specification, document number X27A-A-001-xx for details.
The tables below show only those configuration settings important to the 8-bit processor
interface. The endian must be selected based on the 8-bit processor used.
4.3 Register/Memory Mapping
The S1D13705 needs a 128K byte block of memory to accommodate its 80K byte display
buffer and its 32 byte register set. The starting memory address is located at 00000h of the
128K byte memory block while the internal registers are located in the upper 32 bytes of
this memory block. (i.e. REG[0]= 1FFE0h).
An external decoder can be used to decode the address lines and generate a chip select for
the S1D13705 whenever the selected 128K byte memory block is accessed. If the processor
supports a general chip select module, its internal registers can be programmed to generate
a chip select for the S1D13705 whenever the S1D13705 memory block is accessed.
Table 4-1: Configuration Settings
Signal Low High
CNF0
See “Host Bus Selection” table below See “Host Bus Selection” table belowCNF1
CNF2
CNF3 Little Endian Big Endian
CNF4 Active low LCDPWR signal Active high LCDPWR signal
= configuration for 8-bit processor host bus interface
Table 4-2: Host Bus Selection
CNF2 CNF1 CNF0 BS# Host Bus Interface
1 1 1 1 Generic #2, 16-bit
= required configuration for this application.
Epson Research and Development Page 13
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
5 Software
Test utilities and display drivers are available for the S1D13705. Full source code is
available for both the test utilities and the drivers.
The test utilities are configurable for different panel types using a program called
13705CFG. The display drivers can be customized by the OEM for different panel types,
resolutions and color depths only by modifying the source.
The S1D13705 test utilities and display drivers are available from your sales support
contact or on the internet at http://www.erd.epson.com.
Page 14 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
6 References
6.1 Documents
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Embedded Memory LCD Controller
Hardware Functional Specification; Document Number X27A-A-002-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S5U13705B00C Rev. 1.0 ISA Bus Evaluation
Board User Manual; Document Number X26A-G-005-xx.
• Epson Research and Development, Inc., S1D13705 Programming Notes and Examples;
Document Number X26A-G-002-xx.
6.2 Document Sources
• Epson Reasearch and Development Website: http://www.eea.epson.com.
Epson Research and Development Page 15
Vancouver Design Center
Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor S1D13705
Issue Date: 01/12/20 X27A-G-015-01
7 Technical Support
7.1 Epson LCD/CRT Controllers (S1D13705)
Japan
Seiko Epson Corporation
Electronic Devices Marketing Division
421-8, Hino, Hino-shi
Tokyo 191-8501, Japan
Tel: 042-587-5812
Fax: 042-587-5564
http://www.epson.co.jp/
Hong Kong
Epson Hong Kong Ltd.
20/F., Harbour Centre
25 Harbour Road
Wanchai, Hong Kong
Tel: 2585-4600
Fax: 2827-4346
http://www.epson.com.hk//
Taiwan
Epson Taiwan Technology
& Trading Ltd.
10F, No. 287
Nanking East Road
Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: 02-2717-7360
Fax: 02-2712-9164
http://www.epson.com.tw/
Singapore
Epson Singapore Pte., Ltd.
No. 1
Temasek Avenue #36-00
Millenia Tower
Singapore, 039192
Tel: 337-7911
Fax: 334-2716
http://www.epson.com.sg/
Europe
Epson Europe Electronics GmbH
Riesstrasse 15
80992 Munich, Germany
Tel: 089-14005-0
Fax: 089-14005-110
http://www.epson-electronics.de/
North America
Epson Electronics America, Inc.
150 River Oaks Parkway
San Jose, CA 95134, USA
Tel: (408) 922-0200
Fax: (408) 922-0238
http://www.eea.epson.com/
Page 16 Epson Research and Development
Vancouver Design Center
S1D13705 Interfacing to an 8-bit Processor
X27A-G-015-01 Issue Date: 01/12/20
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK

Navigation menu